Voltage Source Drive

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

IMAD10001EN
REV. 00 - 30 JULY 2015

1
Answer Drives 1000
PROGRAMMING MANUAL

CODE: IMAD10001EN

REVISION: 00

DATE: 30 JULY 2015

LANGUAGE: ENGLISH - TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS

Contact us for information and comments at: nidec-industrial.com

2
 Answer Drives 1000

REVISION DATE DESCRIPTION

00 30 JULY 2015 first issue

IMAD10001EN
REV. 00 - 30 JULY 2015

3
 Answer Drives 1000

Summary
Chapter 1 P. 6 1 Scope
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 2 Safety
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8 3 Programming overview 3.1 Programming flow chart 3.2 Backup system and software
Programming overview and parameters download

Chapter 4 P. 9 4 Programming tools 4.2.2 Connection 4.2.6 Menu navigation 4.2.9 Fault announcement
Programming tools 4.1 Introduction 4.2.3 Arrow keys functions 4.2.7 Quick access menu and families 4.2.10 Alarm announcement
4.2 Keypad 4.2.4 Menu system of available parameters 4.2.11 Backup and download parameters
4.2.1 Keypad connection 4.2.5 Monitor mode 4.2.8 Speed reference change

Chapter 5 P. 16 5 Programming levels and control modes 5.2 Programming levels 5.4 Factory settings (default values)
Programming levels 5.1 Commissioning 5.3 Control methods 5.5 IEC/NEMA selection
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 6 Quick start-up procedure 6.1.1 Sensorless (vector V/F) control 6.2 Operation in manual mode (from keypad)
Quick start-up procedure 6.1 Description of the quick motor start procedure with nameplate data only 6.3 Operation in automatic mode

XXXXXXXXXX
Chapter 7

SUMMARY
P. 21 7 Control mode selection and settings
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 8 States machine and process data 8.4.1 Command words 8.4.6 Process data for DC-BUS control 8.4.11 Process data expressed in engineering units
States machine and process data 8.1 States machine 8.4.2 Status word 8.4.7 Digital I/O’S 8.4.12 Communication diagnostics process data
8.2 Main states of the sequence 8.4.3 Alarms words 8.4.8 Analog inputs 8.4.13 Aux process data
8.3 Normalization of data 8.4.4 Process data for speed / frequency control 8.4.9 Diagnostics process data
8.4 Process data 8.4.5 Process data for current control 8.4.10 Logs

Chapter 9 P. 55 9 Functions 9.8 Digital potentiometer 9.23 Motor ID 9.35 Process PID: dead band delay
Functions 9.1 HOA – hand/off/auto 9.8.1 Speed reference memorization 9.23.1 Motor ID 1 9.36 Process PID: feedforward
9.1.1 Man/auto mode 9.8.2 Speed reference tracking 9.23.2 Inertia ID 9.37 Process PID: feedback supervision
9.1.2 Start/stop commands 9.9 Critical speeds avoidance 9.24 Multiple gains 9.38 Process PID: input pressure supervision
9.1.3 Edge start/stop 9.10 Analog monitor 9.25 Regulator autotuning 9.39 Process PID: analog feedback loss
9.1.4 Level start/stop 9.11 Analog command loss 9.26 Precharge management 9.40 Process PID: auxiliary pumps
9.1.5 Pulse start/stop 9.12 VDC undervoltage control 9.27 Auto on/off 9.41 Process PID: pressure, flow and level view
9.1.6 Run/forward/reverse command 9.13 VDC overvoltage control 9.28 Auto reset and restart 9.42 Soft fill
9.2 Stop mode 9.14 Bus drop and grid waiting 9.29 Motor switch 9.42.1 Horizontal piping systems
9.2.1 Ramp stop 9.14.1 Bus drop 9.30 Jog (flushing) 9.42.2 Vertical piping systems, simple solution
9.2.2 Quick stop 9.14.2 Grid waiting 9.31 Anti-blocking 9.42.3 Vertical piping systems, complex solution
9.2.3 Coast stop 9.15 Fly start 9.32 Auto-cleaning 9.43 Motor pause
9.3 Speed demand 9.16 Loss of output phase/output short circuit 9.33 Frost protection 9.44 Well draw down control
9.3.1 Reversal of rotation direction 9.17 Flux up 9.34 Process PID (suction control via constant pressure)
9.4 Ramps 9.18 Torque limits control 9.34.1 Continuous speed reference control 9.45 Low city or low suction inlet pressure
9.4.1 Speed reference limits 9.19 Speed deviation 9.34.2 On/off: hysteresis control 9.46 Logic
CONTINUES 9.5 S-ramp 9.20 Underload with fixed speed reference
SUMMARY
9.6 2-Ramps vs. Threshold frequencies 9.21 Energy optimization 9.34.3 Both: hysteresis control
9.7 Preset speed 9.22 Voltage boost with continuous speed reference

4
 Answer Drives 1000

Summary

Chapter 10 P. 104 10 Fieldbus 10.1.7 Profibus configuration parameters 10.2 Modbus 10.2.8 Data exchange area
Fieldbus 10.1 Profibus (optional card) 10.1.8 Word setting for received message 10.2.1 Introduction 10.3 Ethernet (optional card)
10.1.1 Introduction configuration 10.2.2 General characteristics 10.3.1 Introduction
10.1.2 General characteristics 10.1.9 Word setting for sent message configuration 10.2.3 Modbus functions 10.3.2 Physical interface
10.1.3 Connections 10.1.10 Management of loss of communication 10.2.4 Errors returned in the modbus protocol 10.3.3 Network interface configuration
10.1.4 LED with the profibus master (modbus exception code)
10.1.5 Protocol 10.1.11 Command word, status word, 10.2.5 Modbus configuration parameters
10.1.6 Structure of messages sent alarm status word 10.2.6 Loss of modbus communication
and received through profibus network 10.1.12 Control parameterization via profibus 10.2.7 Control parameterization via modbus

Chapter 11 P. 128 11 I/O configuration 11.2 Digital output 11.3 Analog input 11.4.1 Analog output configuration
I/0 Configuration 11.1 Digital input 11.2.1 Digital output configuration 11.3.1 Analog input configuration 11.4.2 Variables associated to analog outputs
11.1.1 Digital input configuration 11.2.2 Configuration of configurable bits 11.3.2 Examples 11.4.3 Examples
11.1.2 Status of digital input of status word 1 11.4 Analog output

Chapter 12 P. 145 12 Protections and troubleshooting instruments 12.1.2 Faults 12.2 Disconnection of the power 12.5 Troubleshooting
Protections and troubleshooting 12.1 Warning and fault 12.1.3 Not programmable faults 12.3 Alarms list 12.5.1 Reset procedures
instruments
12.1.1 Warnings 12.1.4 External fault 12.4 Fault history 12.5.2 Troubleshooting

XXXXXXXXXX
Annex

SUMMARY
P. 156 Annex A Parameters lists A-9 Analog inputs A-18 Motor under/overload A-27 Exch area 1/2 config
A-1 Induction motor A-10 Analog outputs A-19 Alarm settings A-28 Ethernet - TCP/IP
A-2 Drive A-11 Speed control A-20 Jog/flushing A-29 Info
A-3 Motor ID 1 A-12 Torque control A-21 Digit. potentiometer Annex B Switching frequencies
A-4 Inertia ID A-13 V/F control A-22 Process PID Annex C Data process refresh time
A-5 DC-Bus A-14 System CTRL inputs A-23 Fault history Annex D Flow chart menu
A-6 Per-unit base data A-15 Speed reference A-24 Trace settings Annex E Control schemes
A-7 Digital inputs A-16 Start/stop mode A-25 Profibus Annex F Setting up the firmware of the drive
A-8 Digital outputs A-17 Autoreset A-26 Modbus Annex G Pump application examples

5
 Answer Drives 1000 1
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 1 SCOPE
Scope
Scope of this manual is to provide Drive programming instructions for
Chapter 2 P. 7 AD1000.
Safety
This manual, together with the User and Maintenance Manual, is part of
Chapter 3 P. 8
the equipment and has to be stored in a safe and easily retrievable place
Programming overview
for the whole lifetime of AD1000.

Chapter 4 P. 9
Manuals are the same and apply to all models and types, electrical
Programming tools
schematic diagrams and mechanical drawings are specific for each size.

Chapter 5 P. 16 Only actions described in these manuals shall be performed on equipment.

Programming levels
and control modes
Neither other action, measurement or change of any type shall be
carried out.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
This Programming Manual is alligned with the software release:
Chapter 7 P. 21 1.15.4.0_0000-1G1504B1.
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

1 SCOPE
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

6
 Answer Drives 1000 2
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 2 SAFETY
Scope
It is mandatory to fully understand and strictly apply all Safety and
Chapter 2 P. 7 Cautionary Rules listed in the User and Maintenance Manual.
Safety
It is mandatory to fully understand and strictly apply all Safety Rules
Chapter 3 P. 8
according to local laws and all safety site regulations.
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

2 SAFETY
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

7
 Answer Drives 1000 3
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 3 ­PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW 3.2 BACKUP SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE

Scope
AND PARAMETERS DOWNLOAD
Chapter 2 P. 7 3.1 PROGRAMMING FLOW CHART In order to make backup or download of parameters and to download a
Safety firmware, it is necessary to use Drive Manager interface program (DVM);
Figure 3.1 - Programming Flow refer to DVM user guide for this operation.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
NOTE
In order to connect the Drive to a PC it is necessary to use the DB9-RJ45
Chapter 4 P. 9
adapter coded 1000007127. An RS232 port is required.
Programming tools

It is possible to backup and restore parameters also using the keypad.

Chapter 5 P. 16 Refer to paragraph 4.2.11 for the procedure.

3 ­PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW - 3.1 - 3.2

Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

8
 Answer Drives 1000 4
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 4 PROGRAMMING TOOLS Table 4.1 - Key and LED description Figure 4.1 - SVGTAFK keypad
Scope
- On: AD1000 ready
Chapter 2 P. 7 4.1 INTRODUCTION (pre-charged completed)
ON LED - Blinking: AD1000 ready
Safety AD1000 can be programmed with: (pre-charged completed) and in
Chapter 3 P. 8
• “Drive Manager” (DVM) interface program; refer to DVM user guide manual mode
Programming overview
for this operation; - On: One or more fault occurred
• Backlight graphic LCD type keypad. FAULT LED - Blinking: there are one or more
alarms
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
NOTE - On: AD1000 is working
The keypad type to be used with AD1000 is SVGTAFK; code 8000001597 RUN LED - Blinking: the braking chopper
is working
Chapter 5 P. 16 NOTE STOP KEY
Decelerates the motor in
Programming levels a controlled way until it stops ***
In order to connect the Drive to a PC it is necessary to use the DB9-RJ45

4 PROGRAMMING TOOLS - 4.1 - 4.2

and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 adapter coded 1000007127. An RS232 port is required. - Sets the AD1000 in manual mode
MAN KEY
Quick start-up procedure
- Starts it if it is in manual * mode
- Sets the AD1000 in Auto mode:
Chapter 7 P. 21
4.2 KEYPAD the run command and speed
Control mode selection and settings AUTO KEY
The SVGTAFK keypad is equipped with 4 arrow keys, 6 function keys and reference come from an external
source **
Chapter 8 P. 22 10 numeric/shortcut keys and allows immediate access to menus and
- Clears faults
States machine and process data parameters. RESET KEY - Acknowledges alarms
The MAN, AUTO and STOP keys described below are used with HOA - Fault test LED
Chapter 9 P. 55
function disabled. See paragraph 9.1. - Selects a submenu or parameter
Functions - Enters in edit mode for a selected
This key has got two functions: ENTER KEY
parameter
- in Auto mode it transfers control mode from Auto to Man. - Accepts a new value in edit mode
If so a confirmation request appears and the [Canc./Enter] key - Returns to the monitor page
shall be pressed to confirm the action. CANCEL KEY - Rejects any modification
- in Man mode, with Drive READY TO SWITCH ON to parameter values in edit mode
*MAN: (pre-charge performed), it makes the Drive run.
- Accesses the second group of
Transfer from Auto to Man can be performed whatever the Drive functions: shall be pressed before
status is; if it occurs with the Drive in RUN state, the Drive stops SHIFT KEY the desired function keys (example
SHIFT + 9 accesses
Chapter 10 P. 104 the motor in controlled deceleration.
the communication menu)
Fieldbus
In Man mode, the speed reference is set with the up [ ] and
down [ ] arrow keys.

This key is active only in Man mode. It transfers the control mode
Chapter 11 P. 128 from Man to Auto. If so a confirmation request appears and the
I/0 Configuration [Canc./Enter] key shall be pressed to confirm the action.
In Auto mode with drive pre-charged the AD1000 is started
**AUTO:
through the selected source (digital input or fieldbus). Transfer from
Chapter 12 P. 145
Man to Auto can be performed whatever the Drive status is; if it
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments occurs with the Drive in RUN state, the Drive stops the motor in
controlled deceleration. See HOA function for more details.
Annex P. 156

Active only in Man mode. Stops the motor in controlled

***STOP”:
deceleration.

9
 Answer Drives 1000 4
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 4.2.1 KEYPAD CONNECTION 4.2.3 ARROW KEYS FUNCTIONS

Scope
To connect the keypad to the Drive regulation card (Basis card), a standard
Chapter 2 P. 7 Ethernet network cable shall be used, the one normally used for network Table 4.2 Arrow keys functions
Safety connections. The communication cable shall be connected on the
regulation card to the connector (RJ45 type) called “COM”. Key combination Description
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Navigate through the menu system.
Change the active digit of a parameter value when in edit mode.
4.2.2 CONNECTION Display the highlight bar when in monitor mode.
Chapter 4 P. 9
When the keypad is connected for the first time to an Drive, it loads
Programming tools Change the mode from monitor to menu list.
configuration information to create an internal image of the Drive menu
Navigate through the menu system.
system and it saves it. If the keypad is connected to an Drive providing Change the active digit of a parameter value when in edit mode.
Chapter 5

4.2.1 KEYPAD CONNECTION - 4.2.2 - 4.2.3

P. 16 for the same version, it will use the menu structure internal image and
Programming levels
and control modes shall be immediately operating. If not, the keypad shall load configuration Scroll through the menu and parameter options lists.
Chapter 6 P. 18
information from the Drive. Change the speed reference (when in MAN mode and monitor mode).
In order to force the upload of the configuration from the Drive, Increases/decreases parameter values (when in edit mode).
Quick start-up procedure
Enter safety code (a combination of 4 digits, from 0 to 9).
disconnect the keypad from the Drive and reconnect it keeping the RESET
Enter the menu ID or ID parameter in numeric menu access mode.
Chapter 7 P. 21 key pressed. Highlight the monitor parameter when in monitor mode and the
Control mode selection and settings
highlight bar is present.
Chapter 8 P. 22 CANC To cancel and quit parameter changes.
ENTER
States machine and process data To return to the previous menu.
To enter the numeric access men. The operator is then required to
enter the ID number for the associated menu or parameter.
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Skips to the top of the currently selected menu or submenu.

Skips to the bottom of the currently selected menu or submenu.

Enters the programming level mode. The operator is required to

enter a programming level.

RESET or Change display contrast.

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
To lock the keypad: press “shift” key for more than 3 seconds and
only when the message “enter to lock the keypad” is displayed
SHIFT press “enter” key.
To unlock the keypad: press a key and only when the message
“enter to unlock the keypad” is displayed press “enter” key.
Chapter 11 P. 128
NOTE
I/0 Configuration
a. When parameter values are edited, all four digits shall be used.
Values with less than four digits shall be preceded by one or more
Chapter 12 P. 145
zeroes. For instance, to change the value of a 4-digit parameter from
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments 1234 to 975, the operator shall enter 0975.
Annex P. 156 b. In case of signed parameters, the first active digit is the sign. The sign
is changed using the up [ ] and down [ ] arrow keys. Positive values are
displayed with no “+” sign. Negative values have always the “-” sign.
c. For numbers with a decimal part, the decimal point is in a fixed position.

10
 Answer Drives 1000 4
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 4.2.4 MENU SYSTEM 4.2.5 MONITOR MODE

Scope
Parameters inside the menu system are organized according to logical The Monitor Mode allows the operator to observe Drive status and real
Chapter 2 P. 7 groups. To display or edit parameters, the operator shall select them using time values of selectable variables (process data).
Safety key sequences. Paragraphs 4.2.3 and 4.2.7 describe key sequences and The top left corner shows drive status, while the top right corner shows
the methods for navigating the menu system. the speed reference source.
Chapter 3 P. 8
The section below displays the actual values of five variables.
Programming overview
THE PRIMARY VISUALIZATION MODE IS MONITOR MODE.
Table 4.4 - Keys use in Monitor Mode
Chapter 4 P. 9
Table 4.3 - Keys use in System Menu
Programming tools To activate the highlight bar press key
To enter the menu system from the monitor mode press key:
To highlight the variable to be replaced use keys or
Chapter 5 P. 16
To scroll the available parameters/submenus
Programming levels or CANC
and control modes (as soon as the menu system has been entered) use keys: To activate the list of variable type choice press key ENTER

Chapter 6 P. 18
To select a parameter/submenu press keys:
CANC
or To highlight the variable type to be selected use keys or
ENTER
Quick start-up procedure

4.2.4 MENU SYSTEM - 4.2.5

Chapter 7 P. 21 To return to a previous menu press key: To activate the list of variable choice (as soon as the desired
parameter type has been selected) press key:
CANC
ENTER

Control mode selection and settings

After a parameter has been selected, to modify it (to highlight
or
To highlight the variable to be displayed use keys:
Chapter 8 P. 22 items within choice lists, or to change numeric values) use keys: or
States machine and process data CANC
To modify the underlined active digit within the editing fields, To select the highlighted parameter press key: ENTER
or
use keys:
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
To change the value of a parameter within the editing fields: Use numeric keys

To edit a parameter or CANC

ENTER
To confirm modification of a parameter press key:

To cancel and quit the modification of the selected parameter: SHIFT and CANC
ENTER

Table 4.5 and Figure 4.5 describe the process to select and modify
Chapter 10 P. 104 a parameter.
Fieldbus The menu system derives from the data obtained the first time the keypad
is connected to the Drive (during the configuration phase).
As soon as the load of configuration is completed, the menu structure is
stored in the keypad.
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

11
 Answer Drives 1000 4
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure 4.2 describes this process.

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 Figure 4.2 - Parameter selection

4.2.5 MONITOR MODE

Control mode selection and settings for display in Monitor Mode

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Figure 4.3 - Monitor Mode screen

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

12
 Answer Drives 1000 4
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 4.2.6 MENU NAVIGATION 4.2.6.2 Navigation in menu and changing a numeric parameter
Scope
The following sequence indicates the ways to navigate in menu and
Chapter 2 P. 7 change a parameter. Figure 4.5 - Selection and modification of a parameter
Safety A programming level code can be requested for certain menus and
parameters.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
4.2.6.1 Navigation in menu and changing a parameter by the selection list

Chapter 4 P. 9 Figure 4.4 - Navigation modes

Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

4.2.6 MENU NAVIGATION

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

13
 Answer Drives 1000 4
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 4.2.7 QUICK ACCESS MENU AND FAMILIES

Scope
OF AVAILABLE PARAMETERS
Chapter 2 P. 7 The [Shift] key allows accessing the second function of numeric keys. The

4.2.7 QUICK ACCESS MENU AND FAMILIES OF AVAILABLE PARAMETERS

Safety [Shift] key shall be pressed before the desired function key. After pressing
the [Shift] key, on top of the display, the [Shift] enabled indication appears.
Chapter 3 P. 8
The following table describes the combination of keys.
Programming overview

The following table describes the available families in the submenus and
Chapter 4 P. 9
the combination of keys associated with them.
Programming tools

Table 4.5 - Quick access menu

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
Combination Combination
of keys Description Available families of keys Description Available families
Chapter 6 P. 18
for quick access for quick access
Quick start-up procedure
SHIFT
HELP Context ELECTRICAL [75.00]
Chapter 7 P. 21
0
sensitive guide HYDRAULIC [76.00]
Control mode selection and settings COMMAND WORDS [51.00]
INDUCTION MOTOR [02.00] STATUS WORDS [52.00]
MOTOR
SHIFT Main MOTOR ID 1 [07.00]
Chapter 8 P. 22 1
INERTIA ID [10.00]
CURRENT REF[53.00]
CURRENT FDB [54.00]
States machine and process data
DCBUS FDB [56.00]
Drive [06.00] METER DIGITAL [57.00]
SHIFT 8 Meter menu
ANALOG [58.00]
Chapter 9 P. 55 DC - BUS [12.00]
SPEED REF [60.00]
PER – UNIT BASE DATA [13.00]
Functions SPEED FDB [61.00]
Drive DIGITAL INPUTS [15.00]
DIGITAL OUTPUTS [16.00] AUX [63.00]
ANALOG INPUTS [17.00] DIAGNOSTICS [64.00]
ANALOG OUTPUTS [18.00] COMMUNICATIONS [67.00]
ELECTRICAL [75.00]
HYDRAULIC [76.00]
SPEED CONTROL [21.00]
SHIFT
STAB
Control TORQUE CONTROL [22.00] PROFIBUS [81.00]
3
COMM MODBUS [82.00]
V/f CONTROL [24.00] SHIFT 9 Communications
EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG [87.00]
SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS [31.00] ETHERNET – TCP/IP [88.00]
Chapter 10 P. 104 AUTO SPEED REFERENCE [32.00] No combination
SHIFT 4 Auto
Fieldbus START/STOP MODE [33.00] of keys, from the
AUTORESET [34.00] JOG/FLUSHING [41.00]
monitor mode press
Macro DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER [42.00]
MAIN the right key [ ]
SHIFT 5 Main then scroll with the PROCESS PID [45.00]
down [ ] key
Chapter 11 P. 128 ALARM BUFFER [50.00]
LOGS FAULT HISTORY [59.00] No combination
I/0 Configuration SHIFT 6 Logs
TIME - RTC TIME [65.00] of keys, from the
TRACE SETTINGS [66.00] monitor mode
Utility INFO [99.00]
Chapter 12 P. 145
MOTOR UNDER/OVERLOAD [35.00]
press the right key
Protections and troubleshooting SHIFT Alarms [ ] then scroll with
instruments ALARM SETTINGS [36.00] the down [ ] key
Annex P. 156

14
 Answer Drives 1000 4
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 4.2.8 SPEED REFERENCE CHANGE 4.2.10 ALARM ANNOUNCEMENT

Scope
If the system is in manual mode and the keypad is active, the up [ ] and As soon as an Alarm occurs, it is displayed only if the Monitor screen
Chapter 2 P. 7 down [ ] arrow keys can be used to increase or decrease speed. When the is active. With active alarm the Fault led blinks.
Safety up [ ] and [ ] keys are pressed a window appears on the bottom left of If multiple alarms occur they are automatically queued.
the display showing the reference value sent to the Drive, as shown in
Chapter 3 P. 8
Figure 4.6. This window remains for 5 seconds after the up [ ] and [ ] keys Figure 4.8 - Alarm Display
Programming overview
have been released. To check the current value of the speed manual

4.2.8 SPEED REFERENCE CHANGE - 4.2.9 - 4.2.10 - 4.2.11

reference, momentarily press the up [ ] and down [ ] keys or the [Enter]
Chapter 4 P. 9
key, a window with the current value shall appear.
Programming tools
To increase or decrease the speed reference hold the key up [ ] or the
key down [ ] until reaching the desired value. The manual reference is a
Chapter 5 P. 16 frequency (Hz) reference.
Programming levels
and control modes
Figure 4.6 - Display with speed reference value
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
4.2.11 BACKUP AND DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS
It is possible to upload the values of parameters to the keypad in order
Chapter 9 P. 55
to download it on another Drive. The two Drives must have the same
Functions
firmware version.
To upload parameters to keypad press the right key [ ] and then scroll
with down key [ ] until “Store params in keypad” appears. Press [Enter]
and then select “Overwrite existing data”. The value of parameters will be
saved in the keypad.
4.2.9 FAULT ANNOUNCEMENT To download parameters to the Drive press the right key [ ] and
The Fault is displayed on the screen as soon as it occurs. If multiple faults then scroll with down key [ ] until “Load params to Drive” appears.
occur, they are automatically queued, to scroll them use the up [ ] and Press [Enter] and then select “Load”. The value of parameters will be
Chapter 10 P. 104 down [ ] keys; after the last fault the writing “Bottom of list” appears. downloaded to the Drive.
Fieldbus
Figure 4.7 - Fault Display

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

15
 Answer Drives 1000 5
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 5 PROGRAMMING LEVELS AND CONTROL MODES 5.3 CONTROL METHODS

Scope
Two motor control algorithms are available. Select the most indicated
Chapter 2 P. 7 5.1 COMMISSIONING mode based on the application.
Before proceeding with the commissioning check that all installation • V/f (also called Scalar V/f): default (parameter Scalar V/f En [24.07] to On).

5 PROGRAMMING LEVELS AND CONTROL MODES - 5.1 - 5.2 - 5.3 - 5.4

Safety

aspects have been completed, as indicated in the User and Maintenance • Sensorless (also called Vector V/f): set parameter Scalar V/f En [24.07]
Chapter 3 P. 8
to Off to enable the sensorless control (Vector V/f)
Manual, including all input, output, control, motor and load connections.
Programming overview

NOTE
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
Programming levels, control modes, characteristics and control cards are 5.4 FACTORY SETTINGS (DEFAULT VALUES)
illustrated in the manual. Refer to the following for description and definitions. The AD1000 is set at the factory at programming level 2, with V/f
(Scalar V/f) control and induction motor.
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 5.2 PROGRAMMING LEVELS
Chapter 6 P. 18 The AD1000 Software is organized according to three access levels. Each
Quick start-up procedure level allows the user to progressively access a wider list of functions,
macrofunctions and parameters.
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
LEVEL 1:
Chapter 8 P. 22 • For quick motor start.
States machine and process data • Minimum number of parameters to be set.
• Parameters organized according to menus and logic families.
• Access code 0001.
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
LEVEL 2:
• Provides pre-defined macros for standard applications and allows
establishing process parameters for application customization.
• Parameters organized according to menus and logic families.
• Allows configuration of the analog and digital inputs and outputs.
• Access code 0002.

LEVEL 3:
Chapter 10 P. 104
• Provides pre-defined macros for pump applications and allows
Fieldbus
establishing process parameters for application customization.
• Parameters organized according to menus and logic families.
• Access code 0003.
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration NOTE
For each programming level, the user can select the desired motor control mode.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

16
 Answer Drives 1000 5
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 5.5 IEC/NEMA SELECTION IEC/NEMA Selection [13.99]

Scope
With the parameter IEC/NEMA Selection [13.99], available in the family IEC NEMA
Chapter 2 P. 7 PER-UNIT BASE DATA [13.00], it is possible to select the following units of 02.01 Rated Power kW 02.91 Rated Power HP
Safety measure for the parameters and process data reported in the table below:
02.20 Rated Torque Nm 02.92 Rated Torque lb*ft
• IEC units of measure;
Chapter 3 P. 8
• NEMA units of measure.
13.05 Per-Unit Power kW 13.91 Per-Unit Power HP
Programming overview 13.06 Per-Unit Torque Nm 13.92 Per-Unit Torque lb*ft
When IEC units are visible the NEMA ones are hidden and vice versa.
13.11 User Per-Unit Press. 1 bar 13.31 User Per-Unit Press. 1 PSI
Chapter 4 P. 9
Example: if IEC/NEMA Selection [13.99] is set to NEMA, Rated Power 13.12 User Per-Unit Flow 1 m^3/h 13.32 User Per-Unit Flow 1 GPM
Programming tools
[02.91] in [HP] replaces Rated Power [02.01] in [kW]. 13.13 User Per-Unit Level 1 m 13.33 User Per-Unit Level 1 ft
13.14 User Per-Unit Temp. 1 C 13.34 User Per-Unit Temp. 1 F
Chapter 5 P. 16 13.21 User Per-Unit Press. 2 bar 13.41 User Per-Unit Press. 2 PSI
Programming levels
and control modes 13.22 User Per-Unit Flow 2 m^3/h 13.42 User Per-Unit Flow 2 GPM
Chapter 6 P. 18 13.23 User Per-Unit Level 2 m 13.43 User Per-Unit Level 2 ft
Quick start-up procedure 13.24 User Per-Unit Temp 2 C 13.44 User Per-Unit Temp. 2 F

5.5 IEC/NEMA SELECTION

Chapter 7 P. 21 75.13 Active Power [kW] kW 75.91 Active Power [HP] HP
Control mode selection and settings 76.01 Press. of Prs PID Ref 1 bar 76.41 Press. of Prs PID Ref 1 PSI
76.02 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 1 bar 76.42 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 1 PSI
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
76.03 Flow of Prs PID Ref 1 m^3/h 76.43 Flow of Prs PID Ref 1 GPM
76.04 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 1 m^3/h 76.44 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 1 GPM
76.05 Level of Prs PID Ref 1 m 76.45 Level of Prs PID Ref 1 ft
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 76.06 Level of Prs PID Fdb 1 m 76.46 Level of Prs PID Fdb 1 ft
76.07 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 1 C 76.47 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 1 F
76.08 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 1 C 76.48 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 1 F
76.21 Press. of Prs PID Ref 2 bar 76.61 Press. of Prs PID Ref 2 PSI
76.22 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 2 bar 76.62 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 2 PSI
76.23 Flow of Prs PID Ref 2 m^3/h 76.63 Flow of Prs PID Ref 2 GPM
76.24 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 2 m^3/h 76.64 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 2 GPM
76.25 Level of Prs PID Ref 2 m 76.65 Level of Prs PID Ref 2 ft
Chapter 10 P. 104
76.26 Level of Prs PID Fdb 2 m 76.66 Level of Prs PID Fdb 2 ft
Fieldbus
76.27 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 2 C 76.67 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 2 F
76.28 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 2 C 76.68 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 2 F

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

17
 Answer Drives 1000 6
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 6 QUICK START-UP PROCEDURE 6.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE QUICK MOTOR

Scope
The quick motor start procedure allows starting the Drive through a START PROCEDURE
Chapter 2 P. 7 limited number of parameters. For this type of procedure carry out the following steps:
Safety
1. Open the Drive Enable terminal: Terminal: XME 27 (DE).
Chapter 3 P. 8 NOTE
Programming overview 2. Supply the Drive with power; first the auxiliary part shall be supplied,
The procedure requires the programming of certain parameters of the
then power supply shall be inserted. If there are no alarms or faults
Drive. Instructions for this operation are summarized below; for more
Chapter 4 P. 9 the Drive is predisposed in waiting mode READY TO ON, led “ON”
Programming tools
details see chapter 4.
constantly switched on.
To access the parameter to be programmed press the T key and then
Chapter 5 P. 16 the key: a window called “ENTER MENU ID” appears. 3. If any alarm is present, press the key to reset the Drive
Programming levels Enter the number of the desired parameter and press ENTER CANC
to go to the and to bring it in READY TO ON state.

6 QUICK START-UP PROCEDURE - 6.1

and control modes
parameter.
Chapter 6 P. 18 CANC CANC
4. To display all the necessary parameters to the procedure it is necessary
Press ENTER to edit the parameter, enter the desired value and press ENTER
Quick start-up procedure to go to programming level 2:
to confirm the new value (when parameter values are edited all four digits
Chapter 7 P. 21 • Press SHIF then to show the “Enter Program Code” window.
shall be used; values with less than four digits shall be preceded by one or CANC
Control mode selection and settings • In the “Enter Program Code” window set 0002, then press ENTER .
more zeroes).
Chapter 8 P. 22 CANC
If SHIFT and then ENTER is pressed during the programming mode you
States machine and process data Program the parameters according to the data of the load and the control
return to the previous menu and, if you are in edit mode, parameter
method you wish to apply.
Chapter 9 P. 55
writing is quitted with no modifications.
Functions

NOTE
In parameter Drive Size [06.01], drive size is set. This datum is entered at
the factory during testing.
If a spare regulation card is used, check at the Drive Size [06.01] parameter
if the set size corresponds to the size of the Drive being used.
Drive size can be inferred from the namweplate on the Drive.
Chapter 10 P. 104 For instance, if the Drive code is the following “AD1A053FBNNHN”, Drive
Fieldbus size shall be “053F”.

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

18
 Answer Drives 1000 6
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 6.1.1 SENSORLESS (VECTOR V/F) CONTROL If the inertia of the load is not sufficient to prevent movements, after the
Scope
WITH NAMEPLATE DATA ONLY auto-identification, you must check that the value of parameter Voltage
Drop Over Rs [07.03] value is consistent with motor type being used.

6.1.1 SENSORLESS (VECTOR V/F) CONTROL WITH NAMEPLATE DATA ONLY

Chapter 2 P. 7
5. Set the following parameters:
Safety To perform the auto-identification first verify that the Drive is in manual
• 02.01 ÷ 02.09 (INDUCTION MOTOR) Motor nameplate data. mode, then, with Drive in READY TO ON state (the ON led blinking)
Chapter 3 P. 8 In order to avoid repeated changes to the parameters, the setting of close the Drive Enable terminal:
Programming overview parameter Max Speed 1 (pu) [02.09] must be done keeping in mind that Terminal: XME 27 (DE).
the per-unit normalization of all speed variables depends on this parameter. In order to enabling the test, set the parameter Static Test ID 1 [07.01]
Chapter 4 P. 9 For example, if the motor works only in the nominal range of speed, (Locked-Rotor ID) to Test On, then confirm with Canc/Enter key and
Programming tools the maximum speed must be set to the synchronous speed displayed follow the dialog box instructions; finally set the parameter Static Test
in parameter Synchro Speed [02.17]. If the motor instead works in ID 1 [07.01] to Test Done.
defluxing mode maximum speed must be set to the upper limit of speed
Chapter 5 P. 16 If the value of voltage drop over stator resistance is not know and it is
Programming levels reference. not possible to perform the auto-identification, refer initially (for 4 poles
and control modes • 06.01 ÷ 06.31 (Drive, particularly 06.01 and 06.24) motor) to the table below.
Chapter 6 P. 18 Drive nameplate parameter.
Quick start-up procedure • 21.05, 21.06 (SPEED CONTROL) Check the defaults values.
• 24.01 ÷ 24.03 (V/f CONTROL) Check the defaults values, later it 1 kW 10 kW 100 kW 500 kW
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
may need to correct the parameter Boost Gain [24.03].
0,060 pu 0,040 pu 0,020 pu 0,016 pu
• For safety, for the first starts it is recommended to reduce the fixed
Chapter 8 P. 22 torque limits defined by the parameters Pos Torque Limit 1 [22.01] e
States machine and process data Neg Torque Limit 1 [22.02] to +/- 20%. 7. Check that the parameter Static Test ID 1 [07.01] to Test Done.
6. In order to have an optimal functioning of Drive it is necessary 8. If the per-unit estimated value of voltage drop over stator resistance
Chapter 9 P. 55 to set correctly the value of the voltage drop over stator resistance
Functions
is correct (parameter Voltage Drop Over Rs [07.03]) it is not necessary
parameter Voltage Drop Over Rs [07.03]. If the value of this to modify the boost gain of V/f control (parameter Boost Gain [24.03]).
parameter is not know it is possible to use the auto-identification. Therefore it can remain at the default value.
The boost gain allows you to apply small changes without changing the
WARNING: during this procedure voltage shall be applied to the motor. voltage drop over the stator resistance. The actual voltage boost is the
For auto-identification results to be valid this test should be performed product of these two parameters: if the motor vibrates around the zero
with the rotor locked; often the inertia of the load is sufficient to prevent and it don’t follow the speed reference it is necessary to increase the
movements; verify that an eventual rotation does not result boost; However if the motor tries to rotate in the opposite direction it is
in any danger. necessary to decrease the boost.
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
For standard motors with output exceeding 20 kW the auto-identification 9. For operation in manual mode (keypad) see paragraph 6.2.
procedure can be also performed without the rotor locked, with adequate
results. With special motor or with motor of small power there may be
some problems with the identification algorithm. In this case it may be
Chapter 11 P. 128 necessary to lock the rotor or to use the default values.
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

19
 Answer Drives 1000 6
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 6.2 OPERATION IN MANUAL MODE (FROM KEYPAD) 6.3 OPERATION IN AUTOMATIC MODE
Scope
After the switching on and pre-charge phase, the Drive is set in
10. Close the Drive Enable command (Terminal: XME 27 - DE).
Chapter 2 P. 7 “automatic operation” mode; it is in the READY TO SWITCH ON status
Safety
It is a hardware command to be supplied by the user.
MAN
and the keypad “ON” led is constantly switched on. The speed reference
Chapter 3 P. 8 11. Press START to select local mode (from the keypad) for Drive control comes from the outside.
Programming overview The keypad displays message “Manual Press enter to confirm”
CANC
12. Press ENTER to confirm. To operate the following steps need to be complied with:

6.2 OPERATION IN LOCAL MODE (FROM KEYPAD) - 6.3

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools At this point the terminal returns in monitor mode and the “On” led 17. Close the Drive Enable command (Terminal: XME 27 - DE).
blinks to indicate local operation. The Drive is predisposed in READY
18. If in “manual” mode, press the key to select automatic
Chapter 5 P. 16 TO SWITCH ON status.
operation.
Programming levels
and control modes
If this procedure needs to be quitted, press the SHIFT key
CANC The keypad displays message “Auto Press enter to confirm”, press the
Chapter 6 P. 18
and then ENTER . CANC

MAN
ENTER key to confirm (if this procedure needs to be quitted, press the
Quick start-up procedure
13. To start the motor press the START key, the Drive is predisposed CANC
SHIFT key and then ENTER ).
Chapter 7 P. 21 in READY TO OPERATE status and the RUN led is switched on.
Control mode selection and settings 19. Set the speed reference source to analog input 1, terminals XME - 33
14. Now the Drive is working and the speed reference is set to zero. (AL1-), 34 (AL1+)
Chapter 8 P. 22 The speed reference can be increased/decreased with the
States machine and process data
To choose as speed reference the signal coming from analog input 1,
and keys. “AI1” needs to be set in parameter Main Speed Ref Sel [32.01]. The
When the up and down keys are pressed, a window input signal can be 0 - 20mA (4 - 20mA) or 0 - 10V. To have the motor
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
appears to the bottom left of the display indicating the reference value work at the speed defined by the parameter Synchro Speed [02.17],
sent to the Drive. This window remains for 5 seconds after the up a 10V value needs to be set at analog input 1.
and down keys have been released.
20. Close the Start/Stop command:
15. Check the motor rotation direction. If wrong, invert two phases at It is a hardware command to be supplied by the user at terminal XME
the ends of motor U, V, W and check again; it is also possible to set 26. The Drive switches over to the READY status, the “RUN” led is
the parameter Phase Reverse [06.28]. switched on and the motor starts accelerating based on the ramp
16. To stop the motor press the STOP key. When the motor stops times until the reference value set.
Chapter 10 P. 104
The reverse direction of rotation is controlled by the terminal XME 25.
Fieldbus
the “RUN” led is switched off.
If the parameter DI Run Fw/Rv Conntect. [31.10] is set to “DI1: Run
- DI2: Fw/Rv”, the direction of rotation depends on the logical value of
terminal XME 25.
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 21. When the Start/Stop command is removed (OFF), the motor stops
in ramp and when the motor is stopped the “RUN” led is switched off.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments For further information concerning analog and digital inputs and outputs,
Annex P. 156 refer to the User and Maintenance Manual.

20
 Answer Drives 1000 7
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 7 CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND SETTINGS

Scope
AD1000 makes available 2 control mode:
Chapter 2 P. 7 • V/f
Safety • Sensorless
Chapter 3 P. 8
V/f control mode is a standard V/f regulation in which the aim of the Drive
Programming overview
is to keep constant the magnet flux of the electric motor supplying the
electric motor with frequency proportional to the desired speed (speed
Chapter 4 P. 9
reference) and voltage proportional to the frequency in order to keep
Programming tools
constant the ratio voltage/frequency (V/f), that is proportional to the flux

7 CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND SETTINGS

electric motor. V/f control mode doesn’t need encoder feedback.
Chapter 5 P. 16 Sensorless control mode is a more performant control mode. It is a mix of
Programming levels
and control modes
V/f control and vector control derived from FOC (Field Oriented Control),
without the need of encoder feedback; also in this case, the magnet flux
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
of the electric motor is constant, but in this case is a consequence of the
vector control strategy.
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings In AD1000 software release and related documents, the 2 control mode
Chapter 8 P. 22
are also indicated:
States machine and process data
• Scalar V/f for V/f control mode
• Vector V/f for Sensorless control mode

Chapter 9 P. 55
It is possible to set the control mode using the parameter Scalar V/f En
Functions
[24.07]. Default value is On. In order to set Sensorless control mode, set
the parameter Scalar V/f [2407] to Off.

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

21
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8 STATES MACHINE AND PROCESS DATA Figure 8.1 States machine for Basis Drive
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 8.1 STATES MACHINE

Safety The interface of the Drive with Basis card is based on the PROFIDrive
communication profile for class 1 applications. The first class of
Chapter 3 P. 8
PROFIDrive applications represents the most widespread case, that is the
Programming overview
“Standard Drive” that always receives the primary set-point, for instance
speed, from an external controller (PLC). The second class corresponds to
Chapter 4 P. 9
the “Standard Drive with distributed technology controller” and refers to
Programming tools
the possibility of implementing PLC-type functions onboard the Drive itself.

8 STATES MACHINE AND PROCESS DATA - 8.1

Chapter 5 P. 16 The Drive states machine can be controlled from the outside through the
Programming levels
and control modes bits of the main command word Cmd Wd 1 [51.06] and current system
Chapter 6 P. 18
status is described by the main status word Status Wd 1 [52.01]; both are
Quick start-up procedure
expressed in the format provided by communication standard PROFIDrive.

Chapter 7 P. 21 Other two command words (Cmd Wd 2 [51.07], Cmd Wd 4 [51.09])

Control mode selection and settings
and other two status words (Status Wd 2 [52.02], Status Wd 3 [52.03])
Chapter 8 P. 22 allow controlling Drive auxiliary sequences and functions.
States machine and process data To the words providing information on Drive control current status also
alarm words (Alarm Wd 1 [52.05], Alarm Wd 2 [52.06], Alarm Wd 3
[52.07] and Alarm Wd 4 [52.08]) need to be added.
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

22
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.2 MAIN STATES OF THE SEQUENCE READY TO SWITCH-ON

Scope
Please note that, for every status providing more than one output The emergency command has been removed and everything is ready for
Chapter 2 P. 7 transition, stop commands have a higher priority than any other command machine power insertion.
Safety and that also among the latter a decreasing priority order exists, Power can either be present or not.
as follows: Drive parameters can be modified (from user interface or PLC with fieldbus).
Chapter 3 P. 8
1) Coast Stop (or Emergency OFF or OFF2), free stop Drive functions are disabled.
Programming overview
2) Quick Stop (or Emergency Stop or OFF3), quick ramp stop For pre-charge management see paragraph 9.26.
3) Ramp Stop (or OFF1), pre-set ramp stop Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X011 0001
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
NOTE
Please note that with motor in Stop we just mean that the internal ramp READY TO OPERATE (or READY or SWITCH – ON)
Chapter 5 P. 16 generator (RFG) completed the expected deceleration trajectory achieving The machine is supplied and correctly pre-charge, the bypass contactor
Programming levels Zero Speed [32.21] and not that the motor is actually stopped or that and the main contactor (if managed) are closed: Drive is Ready.

8.2 MAIN STATES OF THE SEQUENCE

and control modes
(real or estimated) speed feedback is null. Drive parameters can be modified.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X011 0011
START-UP
Chapter 7 P. 21 This status immediately follows the reset/power-on command
Control mode selection and settings of the control card (Basis card). The Drive control is initialized with the OPERATION ENABLED
configuration parameters, in particular parameter Precharge Delay Drive functions (pulses and regulation) are enabled and power is applied
Chapter 8 P. 22
to the motor.
States machine and process data
[12.08] (waiting time for sending the CTLR pre-charge end command).
Only at the end of the Drive control initialization operations This status corresponds to the normal system working status within which
communication with the fieldbus is enabled. also auxiliary sequences can be performed (Fly-Start, Jog, etc.).
Chapter 9 P. 55
Drive functions are disabled. For instance, the tests for parameter identification are activated in this
Functions status if command CW1.03 is set and the procedure itself is previously
Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX0X XXXX XXXX enabled through the enable parameter (families MOTOR ID 1 [07.00] and
INERTIA ID [10.00]).
NOT READY TO SWITCH - ON Only those parameters explicitly marked as “modifiable with Drive
Power can either be present or not in the Drive (based on machine running” can be updated in this status.
configuration). Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X011 0111
Pulses are certainly disabled and no energy is applied to the load.
Drive parameters can be modified (from user interface or PLC with fieldbus).
Chapter 10 P. 104 Drive functions are disabled. OFF1 ACTIVE (or RAMP STOP)
Fieldbus Controlled ramp stop (OFF1) is performed, during which Drive functions
Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X0XX 0000 are enabled and power is applied to the motor.
Once Zero Speed [32.21] has been reached, the Drive control takes
SWITCH – ON INHIBITED (or SWITCH – ON DISABLE) power away from the motor and switches automatically over to status
Chapter 11 P. 128
READY TO SWITCH-ON, if there are no other OFF commands active.
Power can either be present or not in the Drive (based on machine
I/0 Configuration
configuration). If during controlled deceleration the ON command (Cmd Wd 1 [51.06],
Pulses are certainly disabled and no energy is applied to the motor. bit 1) returns to 1, the Drive control starts again from status READY TO
Chapter 12 P. 145
Drive parameters can be modified (from user interface or PLC with fieldbus). OPERATE, unless other interlock conditions are present.
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Drive functions are disabled. Only those parameters explicitly marked as “modifiable with Drive
Annex P. 156 running” can be updated.
Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X1XX 0000
Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X011 0011
Status Word 2 (bit 15...0) XXXX 1XXX XXXX XXXX

23
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 OFF2 ACTIVE (or COAST STOP or EMERGENCY OFF) FAULT

Scope Free stop is performed (or OFF2 or Emergency OFF); Drive functions are The protection action associated to a Fault can be modified by a command
Chapter 2 P. 7 disabled and no power is applied to the motor. with higher priority: for instance, the ramp stop action provided for a fault
Safety It is not possible to modify Drive control parameters. can be interrupted by the quick stop action associated with another fault
that intervened in the meantime and the latter can, in turn, be interrupted
Chapter 3 P. 8 Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X010 00XX
by an Emergency OFF command (Cmd Wd 1.01=0) from the PLC.
Programming overview

OFF3 ACTIVE (or QUICK STOP or EMERGENCY STOP) Whatever the command sequence is, Drive control ends up anyway in
Chapter 4 P. 9 Quick ramp stop (or Emergency Stop) is performed; once Zero Speed FAULT status and switches over to the following status only if:
Programming tools [32.21] has been reached, the Drive control takes power away from the • The acknowledge command (0 ➡1) arrives from operator/controller
motor and switches automatically over to status SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. • There are no active faults
Chapter 5 P. 16 It is not possible to modify Drive control parameters.
Programming levels Exceptions, not programmed as Faults, generate simple Warnings and do

8.2 MAIN STATES OF THE SEQUENCE

and control modes Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X001 00XX
not bring to this status.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Transition from one status to the other can be inhibited also in the
Quick start-up procedure
presence of alarms programmed only as Warnings, such as “DspInitErr”
Chapter 7 P. 21 already signaling a wrong configuration during the Drive control
Control mode selection and settings initialization phase.
Chapter 8 P. 22
In case of protection it is possible to directly force complete power. As a
States machine and process data
matter of fact, in the alarms management family parameter Power Off if
HW Fault [36.65] is provided, to request switching off in case of HW fault
Chapter 9 P. 55 (those defined in the Alarm Wd1 [52.05]). See paragraph 12.2.
Functions
Status Word 1 (bit 15...0) XXXX XX1X X0XX 1XXX

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

24
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.3 NORMALIZATION OF DATA The reference value of characteristic quantity, in engineering units,
Scope are displayed in the family PER-UNIT BASE DATA [13.00].
Chapter 2 P. 7 Process data and parameter expressed in per-unit are normalized to the The following table lists, for each normalized quantity, the reference
Safety characteristic quantity of Drive-motor system. These are set with parameters quantity and the parameter where his value is displayed.
of families INDUCTION MOTOR [02.00], Drive [06.00] and PER-UNIT For the selection of IEC or NEMA units of measure refer to paragraph 5.5
Chapter 3 P. 8
BASE DATA [13.00].
Programming overview
Table 8.1 – Per-Unit reference quantity

Chapter 4 P. 9
Related parameter in family
Programming tools Normalized to:
PER-UNIT BASE DATA
Quantity type
Chapter 5 P. 16 Parameter Id Parameter Id
Programming levels
and control modes
Voltage DC Vdc Bus 06.31 Per-Unit DC-Bus Voltage 13.01
Chapter 6 P. 18

8.3 NORMALIZATION OF DATA

Quick start-up procedure Voltage AC Rated Voltage 02.03 Per-Unit AC Voltage 13.02

Chapter 7 P. 21 Current Rated Current 02.04 Per-Unit Current 13.03

Control mode selection and settings
Frequency Max Freq* 02.18 Per-Unit Frequency 13.04
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data Power [kW] Rated Power 02.01 Per-Unit Power 13.05

Power [HP] Rated Power 02.91 Per-Unit Power 13.91

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Torque [Nm] Rated Torque* 02.20 Per-Unit Torque 13.06

Torque [lb*ft] Rated Torque* 02.92 Per-Unit Torque 13.92

Speed Max Speed 02.09 Per-Unit Speed 13.07

Pressure 1 [bar] User Per-Unit Press. 1 13.11 User Per-Unit Press. 1 13.11

Pressure 1 [PSI] User Per-Unit Press. 1 13.31 User Per-Unit Press. 1 13.11

Chapter 10 P. 104 Flow 1 [m^3/h] User Per-Unit Flow 1 13.12 User Per-Unit Flow 1 13.12
Fieldbus
Flow 1 [GPM] User Per-Unit Flow 1 13.32 User Per-Unit Flow 1 13.12

Level 1 [m] User Per-Unit Level 1 13.13 User Per-Unit Level 1 13.13

Chapter 11 P. 128 Level 1 [ft] User Per-Unit Level 1 13.33 User Per-Unit Level 1 13.13
I/0 Configuration
Temperature 1 [°C] User Per-Unit Temperature 1 13.14 User Per-Unit Temperature 1 13.14
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting Temperature 1 [°F] User Per-Unit Temperature 1 13.34 User Per-Unit Temperature 1 13.34
instruments

Annex P. 156
*The value is not entered by the user but it is automatically calculated by the Drive.

1/2 25
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Related parameter in family
Normalized to:
Chapter 2 PER-UNIT BASE DATA
P. 7 Quantity type
Safety
Parameter Id Parameter Id
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Pressure 2 [bar] User Per-Unit Press. 2 13.21 User Per-Unit Press. 2 13.21

Pressure 2 [PSI] User Per-Unit Press. 2 13.41 User Per-Unit Press. 2 13.21
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Flow 2 [m^3/h] User Per-Unit Flow 2 13.22 User Per-Unit Flow 2 13.22

Chapter 5 P. 16
Flow 2 [GPM] User Per-Unit Flow 2 13.42 User Per-Unit Flow 2 13.22
Programming levels
and control modes Level 2 [m] User Per-Unit Level 2 13.23 User Per-Unit Level 2 13.23
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Level 2 [ft] User Per-Unit Level 2 13.43 User Per-Unit Level 2 13.23

8.4 PROCESS DATA - 8.4.1

Chapter 7 P. 21 Temperature 2 [°C] User Per-Unit Temperature 2 13.24 User Per-Unit Temperature 2 13.24
Control mode selection and settings
Temperature 2 [°F] User Per-Unit Temperature 2 13.44 User Per-Unit Temperature 2 13.44
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 2/2

Chapter 9 P. 55 8.4 PROCESS DATA

Functions
8.4.1 COMMAND WORDS
Table 8.2 – Command Words

51 - COMMAND WORDS

Index Name Description Access Type

Chapter 10 P. 104
51.01 Ext Cmd Wd - Ter Board Command Word from Terminal Board (see parameter Cmd Wd 1 Sel [31.01]) Read Write
Fieldbus
51.02 Ext Cmd Wd 1 Command Word Ext 1 Read Write

51.03 Ext Cmd Wd 2 Command Word Ext 2 Read Write

Chapter 11 P. 128
51.04 Ext Cmd Wd 3 Command Word Ext 3 (reserved) Read Write
I/0 Configuration
51.05 Ext Cmd Wd 4 Command Word Ext 4 Read Write
Chapter 12 P. 145
51.06 Cmd Wd 1 Command Word 1 Read Write
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
51.07 Cmd Wd 2 Command Word 2 Read Write
Annex P. 156
51.08 Cmd Wd 3 Command Word 3 (reserved) Read Write

51.09 Cmd Wd 4 Command Word 4 Read Write

26
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 COMMAND WORD 1

Scope The main Drive control command word complies with STW1 of the
Chapter 2 P. 7 PROFIDrive standard used in “Speed Control Mode” and is defined in the
Safety following table.

Chapter 3 P. 8 Table 8.3 – Command Word 1

Programming overview

Bit Val Name Description

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Pulse enable possible.
1 ON
Enter "Ready" state if in "Ready to switch-on" state.

Chapter 5 P. 16 0
Programming levels Ramp stop.
and control modes 0 Ramp Stop (OFF1) At standstill enter the "Not Ready to Switch-ON" state (if OFF 2 or OFF3 are not present).
Chapter 6 P. 18 The Ramp Stop can be interrupted by a Switch-ON command.
Quick start-up procedure

8.4.1 COMMAND WORDS

No OFF2.
Chapter 7 P. 21 1 No OFF2
➡ Pulse enable possible.
Control mode selection and settings
1
Chapter 8 P. 22 Coast to stop, then enter "Switch-ON Inhibited" state.
0 Coast Stop (OFF2)
States machine and process data A Coast Stop command is not interruptible (no return to operation).

Chapter 9 P. 55
1 No OFF3
No OFF3.
Functions Pulse enable possible.
2
Quick stop, then enter "Switch-ON Inhibited" state.
0 Quick Stop (OFF3)
A Quick Stop command is not interruptible (no return to operation).

Enable operation.
1 Enable Operation If bit 0, 1 and 2 of Cmd Wd 1 are set to 1 the power is inserted.
Pulse enable possible.
Chapter 10 P. 104 3
Fieldbus
Inhibit operation.
0 Disable Operation Cancel the pulses to IGBT.
The Drive coasts down to a standstill.

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 1 Enable Ramp Generator Ramp-function generator enabling.

4
Chapter 12 P. 145 Ramp-function generator disabling.
0 Reset Ramp Generator
Protections and troubleshooting Set Ramp-function generator output to zero.
instruments

Annex P. 156
1 Unfreeze Ramp Generator Start Ramp-function generator.
5
0 Freeze Ramp Generator Actual frequency reference from Ramp-function generator is frozen.

1/2 27
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Bit Val Name Description

Chapter 2 P. 7 1 Enable Setpoint Ramp-function generator input is enabled.

Safety 6
0 Disable Setpoint Ramp-function generator input is set to zero.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview 1 Acknowledge Fault (0 ➡ 1) Acknowledge faults on positive edge.
7
Chapter 4 P. 9 0 No effect No effect.
Programming tools

Jogging 1 ON.
1 Jog1 ON
Chapter 5 P. 16 8
➡ Prerequisite: Operation is enabled, Drive is in standstill and bit 4, 5, 6 of Status Wd 1 = 0.
Programming levels
and control modes
0 Jog1 OFF Jogging 1 OFF
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
Jogging 2 ON.

8.4.1 COMMAND WORDS

1 Jog2 ON
Chapter 7 P. 21
9
➡ Prerequisite: Operation is enabled, Drive is in standstill and bit 4, 5, 6 of Status Wd 1 = 0
Control mode selection and settings
0 Jog2 OFF Jogging 2 OFF
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 1 Remote Control This bit must be set by PLC in order to enable the external commands.

10
Chapter 9 P. 55
0 No Remote Control
Process data from PLC are considered invalid.
Functions If the freeze option is enabled the “last valid data” are used.

1 Reverse Command to reverse the rotation direction.

11
0 No Reverse Not reverse the rotation direction.

1 Configurable -
12
0 Configurable -
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 1 Configurable -
13
0 Configurable -

Chapter 11 P. 128 1 Configurable -

I/0 Configuration 14
0 Configurable -

Chapter 12 P. 145 1 Configurable -

Protections and troubleshooting
instruments 15
0 Configurable -
Annex P. 156

2/2 28
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 COMMAND WORD 2

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.4 – Command Word 2

Safety
Bit Val Name Description
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview 0 1 PRE-FLUX Enabling the Flux-Up function (see table 10.13).

Chapter 4 P. 9 1 1 TORQUE_FFW_EN Enabling the torque Feedforward.

Programming tools
2 1 RESET_SPEED_INT Reset actual speed controller integral part.

Chapter 5 P. 16
3 1 Bit 3 Reserved.
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 4 1 GENERATOR_OFF Disable Generator macro output (see table 10.20).

Quick start-up procedure

8.4.1 COMMAND WORDS

Switch Generator macro to DC bus voltage control (only if Generator macro is enabled: and CW2.04 = 0)
Chapter 7 P. 21 5 1 VDC_CTRL_ON
(see table 10.20).
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 6 1 MF_ON Activate Master/Follower macro (see table 10.14).

States machine and process data
7 1 TORQUE_LIM_SET2 Use the 2nd set of torque limits.

Chapter 9 P. 55
8 1 RAMP_SET2 Use the 2nd set of ramp acceleration/deceleration.
Functions

9 1 FIXED_TIME_RAMP Activate fixed-time ramp operations (see table 10.2).

10 1 GAIN_SET_SEL1 First bit for speed control gain set selection.

11 1 GAIN_SET_SEL2 Second bit for speed control gain set selection.

12 1 Bit 12 Reserved
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 13 1 RESET_POS_COUNT1 Reset position counters from speed feedback device 1.

14 1 Bit 14 Reserved

Chapter 11 P. 128 15 1 Bit 15 Reserved

I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

29
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 COMMAND WORD 3

Scope Command word 3 of the Drive control is for internal use only.
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety
COMMAND WORD 4
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Table 8.5 – Command Word 4

Chapter 4 P. 9
Bit Val Name Descriptions
Programming tools

0 1 UP Digital Potentiometer Up command

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
1 1 DOWN Digital Potentiometer Down command

Chapter 6 P. 18
2 1 CLEAR Digital Potentiometer Clear command
Quick start-up procedure

8.4.1 COMMAND WORDS

Chapter 7 P. 21 3 1 FIXED_SEL1 First bit for selecting the fixed speed reference (see table 10.3)
Control mode selection and settings
4 1 FIXED_SEL2 Second bit for selecting the fixed speed reference (see table 10.3)
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 5 1 AUX_REF_ON Command for switchover between Main Speed Ref and External Aux Speed Ref (see table 10.1)

Chapter 9 P. 55 6 1 ADDSPEEDREF_EN Command to enable Additional Speed Ref

Functions
7 1 SPDFFW_EN Command to enable Speed Feedforward

8 1 TORQUE_LIM_SEL2 Second bit for selecting the torque limit set

9 1 Bit 9 Reserved

10 1 LOWCITY Command to enable the Low City function

Chapter 10 P. 104 11 1 MOTORSWITCH Command to enable the Motor Switch function

Fieldbus

12 1 AUTOCLEANING Command to enable the Autocleaning function

13 1 Bit 13 Reserved
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 14 1 Bit 14 Reserved

Chapter 12 P. 145 15 1 Bit 15 Reserved

Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

30
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.2 STATUS WORD

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.6 – Status Words and Alarms Words

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8 52 - STATUS WORDS

Programming overview
Index Name Description Access Type
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
52.01 Status Wd 1 Status Word 1 Read Only

52.02 Status Wd 2 Status Word 2 Read Only

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 52.03 Status Wd 3 Status Word 3 Read Only
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 52.04 Status Wd 4 Status Word 4 Read Only

Quick start-up procedure

52.05 Alarm Wd 1 Alarm Word 1 Read Only

Chapter 7 P. 21

8.4.2 STATUS WORD

Control mode selection and settings
52.06 Alarm Wd 2 Alarm Word 2 Read Only
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
52.07 Alarm Wd 3 Alarm Word 3 Read Only

52.08 Alarm Wd 4 Alarm Word 4 Read Only

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 52.11 First Alarm First alarm logged in the buffer Read Only

52.12 Last Alarm Last alarm logged in the buffer Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

31
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 STATUS WORD 1

Scope Status word 1 of the Drive command complies with ZSW1 of the
Chapter 2 P. 7 PROFIDrive standard used in “Speed Control Mode” and is defined in the
Safety following table.

Chapter 3 P. 8 Table 8.7 – Status Word 1

Programming overview

Bit Val Name Description

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools READY TO SWITCH-ON. Cmd Wd 1 bit 0=0 and bits 1, 2, 10 are set to 1.
The emergency command has been removed and everything is ready for power insertion.
1 Ready To Switch-On Power can either be present or not (depends on the Drive configuration).
Chapter 5 P. 16 Drive parameters can be modified (from user interface or PLC with fieldbus).
Programming levels
and control modes 0 Drive functions are disabled.

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure NOT READY TO SWITCH-ON.
0 Not Ready To Switch-on
Cmd Wd 1 bit 0, 1 or 2 (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) is set to 0, or the Drive is tripped.
Chapter 7 P. 21

8.4.2 STATUS WORD

Control mode selection and settings
READY TO OPERATE.
Chapter 8 P. 22 1 Ready To Operate Cmd Wd 1 bit 0, 1 and 2 are set to 1. The machine is supplied and correctly pre-charge, the bypass contactor and the main
States machine and process data 1 contactor (if managed) are closed: Drive is Ready.

Chapter 9 P. 55 0 Not Ready To Operate Cmd Wd 1 bit 0, 1 or 2 (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) is set to 0, or the Drive is tripped.
Functions
OPERATION ENABLED.
1 Operation Enabled
Drive functions (pulses and regulation) are enabled and power is applied to the motor.
2
0 Operation Disabled Operation inhibited. Cmd Wd 1 bit 0, 1, 2 or 3 (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, Operation disabled) is set to 0, or the Drive is faulted.

FAULT.
1 Fault Faults are present. Faults can lead to specific fault reactions. The Drive goes into the “Switch-ON Inhibited” condition once
3 the fault has been acknowledge and the cause has been remedied.
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
0 No fault No active fault

1 Coast Stop Not Activated (no OFF2) No OFF2 active.

4
Chapter 11 P. 128 0 Coast Stop Activated (OFF2) Coast stop active.
I/0 Configuration

1 Quick Stop Not Activated (no OFF3) No OFF3 active.

Chapter 12 P. 145 5
Protections and troubleshooting 0 Quick Stop Activated (OFF3) Quick stop active.
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 32
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Bit Val Name Description

Chapter 2 P. 7
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Safety
1 Switch-ON Inhibited Cmd Wd 1 bit 1 or 2 (OFF2, OFF3) is set to 0 or fault has been acknowledged.
A restart is possible through Ramp Stop (OFF1) followed by ON (with No OFF2 and No OFF3).
Chapter 3 P. 8
6
Programming overview

Switch-ON not inhibited.

0 Switch-On Not Inhibited
Chapter 4 P. 9 Cmd Wd 1 bit 0=0 and bit10=1.
Programming tools
1 Warning Warning is present. No acknowledgement necessary.
7
Chapter 5 P. 16 0 No Warning There is no warning or the warning has disappeared.
Programming levels
and control modes
1 Feedback equal Ref Actual output frequency does equal frequency set point. Speed error is within tolerance bandwidth.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
8
0 Feedback not equal Ref Speed error not within tolerance band.
Chapter 7 P. 21

8.4.2 STATUS WORD

Control mode selection and settings This bit is set by the slave if it is prepared to be controlled by the master PLC.
1 Control Requested The bit is set without waiting for Cmd Wd 1 bit 10 from master.
Chapter 8 P. 22 9 Precondition: the control has to be set to the PROFIBUS interface (see chapter 11).
States machine and process data

0 No Control Requested Local operation.

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 1 Ref Reached Or Exceeded Actual value is equal to or greater than the speed reference.
10
0 Ref Not Reached Actual value is lower than the reference.

1 DE Input signal received Drive Enabled signal received.

11
0 DE Input not signal received Drive Enabled signal not received.

1 Configurable -
Chapter 10 P. 104
12
0 Configurable -
Fieldbus

1 Configurable -
13
0 Configurable -
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
1 Configurable -
14
Chapter 12 P. 145 0 Configurable -
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
1 Configurable -
Annex P. 156 15
0 Configurable -

2/2 33
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 8.8 – Status Word 2

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Bit Val Name Description
Safety
0 1 SPEED_LIM Speed reference limit reached.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview 1 1 CURR_LIM Current reference limit reached.

Chapter 4 P. 9 2 1 TORQUE_LIM Torque reference limit reached.

Programming tools
3 1 VOLT_LIM Output voltage limit reached (defluxing, DC bus voltage limit, etc.).

Chapter 5 P. 16 4 1 PRECHARGED DC bus pre-charged.

Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
5 1 FLUXED Fluxed motor.

Quick start-up procedure

6 1 CTLRM Line contactor command
Chapter 7 P. 21

8.4.2 STATUS WORD

Control mode selection and settings 7 1 MIN_SPEED Actual motor speed is lower than the one set in parameter Min Speed [32.19].

Chapter 8 P. 22
8 1 ZERO_SPEED Actual motor speed is lower than the one set in parameter Zero Speed [32.21].
States machine and process data

9 1 FLY_START Function Fly Start active.

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 10 1 RAMP_END Ramp function finished. The ramp output is equal to the input reference value.

11 1 PULSES_ENABLED Drive command pulses enabled.

12 1 BRAKE_ON Dynamic Brake Resistor (braking chopper) active.

13 1 OV_CONTROL_ON DC-Bus overvoltage controller is active.

14 1 UV_CONTROL_ON DC-Bus undervoltage controller is active

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
15 1 Bit 15 Reserved

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

34
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 STATUS WORD 3

Scope Status word 3 of the Drive control is for internal use only.
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety
STATUS WORD 4
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
Table 8.9 – Status Word 4

Chapter 4 P. 9
Bit Val Name Description
Programming tools

0 1 Bit 0 Reserved
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
1 1 RUN_INHIBITED Run Inhibited state reached

Chapter 6 P. 18
2 1 DIGIPOT_TRACK_ON Digital potentiometer tracking enabled
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 3 1 BUS_DROP Bus drop state reached

8.4.2 STATUS WORD

Control mode selection and settings
4 1 AUX_PUMP1 Auxiliary pump 1 enabled
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 5 1 AUX_PUMP2 Auxiliary pump 2 enabled

Chapter 9 P. 55 6 1 AUX_PUMP3 Auxiliary pump 3 enabled

Functions
7 1 AUX_PUMP4 Auxiliary pump 4 enabled

8 1 AUX_PUMP5 Auxiliary pump 5 enabled

9 1 AUX_PUMP6 Auxiliary pump 6 enabled

10 1 Bit 10 Reserved

Chapter 10 P. 104 11 1 Bit 11 Reserved

Fieldbus

12 1 Bit 12 Reserved

13 1 Bit 13 Reserved
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 14 1 Bit 14 Reserved

Chapter 12 P. 145 15 1 Bit 15 Reserved

Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

35
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.3 ALARMS WORDS The alarm of Alarm Word 2 are software protections. Their action in case
Scope of fault is configurable.
Chapter 2 P. 7 WARNING In the table below the alarms of AW2 alarms, whose status bit switch over
Safety The alarm of Alarm Word 1 are hardware protections. Their action in case to 0 even in the absence of an alarm reset command if the failure cause
of fault is not configurable (except the External Fault). has disappeared, are marked with (*).
Chapter 3 P. 8
When an alarm of AW1 is triggered, the bit of this alarm in AW1 is set to However, when an alarm is triggered the fault bit of Status Word 1
Programming overview
1 and its status does not change, even if the failure cause has disappeared, (SW1.3) is set to 1 and its status does not change, even if the failure cause
until receipt an alarm reset command. has disappeared, until receipt an alarm reset command.
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Table 8.10 – Alarms

Chapter 5 Configuration Default

P. 16 Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
Programming levels parameter Id action
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 01 WatchDog AW1.00 36.01 Watchdog

Quick start-up procedure
02 AC Supply AW1.01 36.02 AC Line Supply
Chapter 7

8.4.3 ALARMS WORDS

P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 03 VdcOV AW1.02 36.03 DC-bus overvoltage

Chapter 8 P. 22
04 IGBTDesat AW1.03 36.04 Coast Stop IGBT Power Module Fault
States machine and process data Coast
Stop (type of action is
05 OverHeat AW1.04 36.05 not configurable) Drive overtemperature
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
06 Earth AW1.05 36.06 Short-circuit/Earth Fault at motor side based on sum current measurement

07 OverCur AW1.06 36.07 Drive Output Overcurrent

08 PrcTimeout AW1.07 36.08 DC-Link Precharge Timeout

Off
Coast Stop External Fault.
09 ExtFault AW1.08 36.09 Off
Quick Stop If enabled the external fault is associated with DI3 digital input.
Ramp Stop
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
10 -- AW1.09 36.10 Reserved

11 VdcUV AW1.10 36.11 DC-bus undervoltage

Chapter 11 P. 128
12 VminSupply AW1.11 36.12 Minimum supply at power cards
I/0 Configuration Coast Stop
Coast
13 POKFail AW1.12 36.13 Power Card Failure
Chapter 12 P. 145 Stop (type of action is
Protections and troubleshooting
not configurable)
instruments 14 -- AW1.13 36.14 Reserved

Annex P. 156 15 -- AW1.14 36.15 Reserved

16 LinePhase AW1.15 36.16 Line Phase Loss or measurement error

1/4 36
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Configuration Default
Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
parameter Id action
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Off
Coast Stop
Chapter 3 P. 8 17 MotorOL AW2.00 36.17 Coast Stop Quick Stop Motor overload limit exceeded
Programming overview Ramp Stop
Warning
Chapter 4 P. 9
Coast Stop
Programming tools
Quick Stop
18 ConvOL AW2.01 36.18 Coast Stop Drive overload limit exceeded
Ramp Stop
Warning
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 19 -- AW2.02 36.19 Off Reserved
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure 20 -- AW2.03 36.20 Off Reserved

Chapter 7

8.4.3 ALARMS WORDS

P. 21 21 Underload AW2.04 36.21 Warning Reserved
Control mode selection and settings Off
22 NoFlux AW2.05 36.22 Warning Coast Stop Motor flux-up exceeded configured timeout (see par. 9.17)
Chapter 8 P. 22 Quick Stop
States machine and process data 23 MaxCurLim AW2.06 36.23 Off Ramp Stop Motor current exceeded configured threshold (*)
Warning
24 SpeedDev AW2.07 36.24 Warning Motor speed error between ref. and fdb. is out of tolerance (see. par. 9.19) (*)
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
25 OverSpeed AW2.08 36.25 Coast Stop Motor Overspeed (*)

26 -- AW2.09 36.26 Off Reserved

Coast Stop
27 DSPInitEr AW2.10 36.27 Coast Stop Data configuration error during initialization
(type of action is
not configurable)

Chapter 10 P. 104 28 DSPParEr AW2.11 36.28 Warning Data configuration error during parameter change
Fieldbus
29 UVCtrlLim AW2.12 36.29 Off Off DC-bus voltage < UV Control Limit
Coast Stop
30 OVCtrlLim AW2.13 36.30 Warning Quick Stop DC-bus voltage > OV Control Limit (*)
Chapter 11 P. 128 Ramp Stop
31 -- AW2.14 36.31 Off Warning Reserved
I/0 Configuration

32 ADCAutoCal AW2.15 36.32 Coast Stop ADC auto-calibration error

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/4 37
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Configuration Default
Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
parameter Id action
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Off
33 FlyStartEr AW3.00 36.33 Coast Stop Coast Stop FlyStart search failed
Chapter 3 P. 8
Warning
Programming overview

34 -- AW3.01 36.34 Off Reserved

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 35 -- AW3.02 36.35 Off Reserved

36 -- AW3.03 36.36 Off Reserved

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 37 -- AW3.04 36.37 Off Reserved
Chapter 6 P. 18
38 -- AW3.05 36.38 Off Reserved
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 Analog Monitor, compare analog input with a threshold

8.4.3 ALARMS WORDS

P. 21 39 Mon1Alarm AW3.06 36.39 Off
and a configurable logic
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 40 Mon2Alarm AW3.07 36.40 Off Off Analog Monitor, compare analog input with a threshold
States machine and process data Coast Stop and a configurable logic
Quick Stop
41 AI Loss AW3.08 36.41 Warning Ramp Stop Analog Command Loss
Chapter 9 P. 55 Warning
Functions 42 LogicAlarm AW3.09 36.42 Off Logic, one of the three possible configurable logic function is active

43 GWMaxTime AW3.09 36.43 Coast Stop Bus Drop and Grid Waiting

44 -- AW3.11 36.44 Off Reserved

45 -- AW3.12 36.45 Off Reserved

46 PrPidFdbLs AW3.13 36.46 Warning Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss, monitor process feedback
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 47 SfFillTime AW3.14 36.47 Warning Soft Fill, sequence timeout

48 -- AW3.15 (36.48) Off Reserved

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/4 38
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Configuration Default
Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
parameter Id action
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety 49 ProfiEr AW4.00 36.49 Coast Stop Profibus error
Off
Coast Stop
Chapter 3 P. 8
50 ModbusEr AW4.01 36.50 Coast Stop Quick Stop Modbus slave error
Programming overview
Ramp Stop
51 BadPar AW4.02 36.51 Off Warning Bad parameter (out of range)
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Coast Stop
Quick Stop
52 MCUDSPTout AW4.03 36.52 Coast Stop MCU ➡ DSP Timout fail (from ETH-PROFI board)
Ramp Stop
Chapter 5 P. 16 Warning
Programming levels
and control modes
53 MCUDSPSync AW4.04 36.53 Warning MCU ➡ DSP Synchronization fail (from ETH-PROFI board)
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure 54 FrostProt AW4.05 36.54 Warning Frost Protection, monitor temperature

Chapter 7

8.4.3 ALARMS WORDS

P. 21
55 WDDSleepMd AW4.06 36.55 Warning Well Draw Down Sleep Mode
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 56 LwCityPres AW4.07 36.56 Warning Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure, monitor inlet pressure switch
States machine and process data
57 MotrSwitch AW4.08 36.57 Warning Motor Switch, monitor status of the switch between Drive and motor
Off
Chapter 9 P. 55 58 FdbMonitor AW4.09 36.58 Warning Coast Stop Process PID: Feedback Supervision, monitor process feedback threshold
Functions Quick Stop
59 inPresMon1 AW4.10 36.59 Warning Ramp Stop Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision, monitor inlet pressure threshold 1
Warning
60 inPresMon2 AW4.11 36.60 Coast Stop Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision, monitor inlet pressure threshold 2

61 AutoClnCur AW4.12 36.61 Warning Auto-Cleaning Current Threshold

62 -- AW4.13 36.62 Off Reserved

Chapter 10 P. 104 63 -- AW4.14 36.63 Off Reserved

Fieldbus
64 -- AW4.15 36.64 Off Reserved

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/4 39
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.4 PROCESS DATA FOR SPEED /

Scope
FREQUENCY CONTROL
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Table 8.11
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview 60 - SPEED REF

8.4.4 PROCESS DATA FOR SPEED/FREQUENCY CONTROL

Chapter 4 P. 9 Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Programming tools
60.01 Ext Main Speed Ref External main speed reference pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write

Chapter 5 P. 16 60.02 Ext Aux Speed Ref External auxiliary speed reference pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write
Programming levels
and control modes
60.03 Speed Reference Speed reference pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
60.04 Add Speed Reference Additional speed reference pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
60.05 Speed Feedforward Speed feedforward pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
Table 8.12

Chapter 9 P. 55
61 - SPEED FDB
Functions

Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type

61.01 Speed Ref Used Actual speed reference pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only

61.02 Speed Fdb Speed feedback pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only

61.03 Speed Ctrl Output Speed controller output pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
61.04 Speed Ctrl Integral Speed controller integral pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Speed reference correction used with

61.07 Follower Speed Corr pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
speed controller Follower Drive
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
Speed/freq reference demand from all
61.08 Speed Ref Demand pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
external sources used by the Drive
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

40
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.5 PROCESS DATA FOR CURRENT CONTROL

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.13

Safety
53 - CURRENT REF
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type

Chapter 4 P. 9 53.02 Torque Ref Torque reference pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Write
Programming tools
53.03 Pos Torque Lim Ref Positive limit of torque reference pu 0 @ 0.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Write

8.4.5 PROCESS DATA FOR CURRENT CONTROL

Chapter 5 P. 16 53.04 Neg Torque Lim Ref Negative limit of torque reference pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 0 @ 0.0 pu Read Write
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

41
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 8.14

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 54 - CURRENT FDB

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Programming overview
54.01 Torque Ref Demand Actual torque demand pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Chapter 4 P. 9 54.02 Torque Ref Used Torque reference used pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Programming tools

8.4.5 PROCESS DATA FOR CURRENT CONTROL

54.05 Iq Ref Iq reference pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Chapter 5 P. 16
54.06 Id Ref Id reference (Vector control only) pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 54.07 Iq Fdb Iq feedback pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Quick start-up procedure
54.08 Id Fdb Id feedback pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 54.09 Actual Current Actual output current pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Chapter 8 P. 22 54.10 Actual Voltage Actual output voltage pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
States machine and process data
54.11 Vsq Vsq pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only

Chapter 9 P. 55
54.12 Vsd Vsd pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
Functions

54.13 Vu Vu pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only

54.14 Vv Vv pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only

54.15 Vw Vw pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only

54.16 Iu Iu pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104 54.17 Iv Iv pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Fieldbus
54.18 Iw Iw pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Actual limit for the absolute value

Chapter 11 P. 128 54.19 Iq Current Lim
of Iq current
pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
I/0 Configuration

Measured output AC phase current

Chapter 12 P. 145 54.20 Current Fdb
(without filtering)
pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156 54.22 Flux Flux pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only

1/2 42
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 54 - CURRENT FDB
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type

Chapter 3 P. 8 54.23 Pos Torque Lim Positive torque limit pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Programming overview
54.24 Neg Torque Lim Negative torque limit pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 4 P. 9
54.25 Electrical Angle Electrical phase angle pu 0 @ 0.0 pu 32767 @ 1.0 pu Read Only
Programming tools

8.4.5 PROCESS DATA FOR CURRENT CONTROL

Actual Iq current reference relative
Chapter 5 P. 16 54.26 Iq Ref Norm Iqn
to nominal torque current Iqn
pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Actual Id current reference relative

54.27 Id Ref Norm Idn pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Quick start-up procedure to nominal torque current Idn

Chapter 7 P. 21
54.28 Inv Overload Inv Overload pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 54.29 Motor Overload Motor Overload pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 43
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.6 PROCESS DATA FOR DC-BUS CONTROL

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.15

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
56 - DCBUS FDB
Programming overview
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Chapter 4 P. 9

8.4.6 PROCESS DATA FOR DC-BUS CONTROL - 8.4.7

56.01 Vdc Fdb DC-Bus voltage pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
Programming tools

56.03 Active Power Active power pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 56.06 Idc Estimated Estimated DC-Bus current pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 56.07 DC Power Measured DC-Bus power pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Only
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
8.4.7 DIGITAL I/O’S
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data Table 8.16

Chapter 9 P. 55 57 - DIGITAL
Functions
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type

57.01 DI W1 DI W1 status # - - Read Only

57.02 DI W2 DI W2 status # - - Read Only

57.03 DO W1 DO W1 status # - - Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104 57.04 DO W2 DO W2 status # - - Read Only

Fieldbus
57.05 SW1.12 Status for cfg output bit 12 in SW1 # - - Read Only

57.06 SW1.13 Status for cfg output bit 13 in SW1 # - - Read Only
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
57.07 SW1.14 Status for cfg output bit 14 in SW1 # - - Read Only

57.08 SW1.15 Status for cfg output bit 15 in SW1 # - - Read Only
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments 57.10 Logic function OW1 Logic function output W1 status # - - Read Only

Annex P. 156

44
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.8 ANALOG INPUTS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.17

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
58 - ANALOG
Programming overview
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Chapter 4 P. 9
58.01 AI1 Value AI1 value pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Programming tools

58.02 AI2 Value AI2 value pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 58.03 AI3 Value AI3 value pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 58.04 AI4 Value AI4 value pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Quick start-up procedure
58.09 AI1 Raw Value AI1 value before filtering pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 7 P. 21

8.4.8 ANALOG INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings
58.10 AI2 Raw Value AI2 value before filtering pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 8 P. 22
58.11 AI3 Raw Value AI3 value before filtering pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
States machine and process data

58.12 AI4 Raw Value AI4 value before filtering pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

45
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.9 DIAGNOSTICS PROCESS DATA

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.18

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
64 - DIAGNOSTIC
Programming overview
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Chapter 4 P. 9
Actual drive state
Programming tools
- ... [0]
- Init [1]
- Switch-On Inhibited [2]
Chapter 5 P. 16
- Not ready to SwitchOn [3]
Programming levels
and control modes - Ready to switch-on [4]

8.4.9 DIAGNOSTICS PROCESS DATA

- Ready to operate [5]
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Fluxup [6]
Quick start-up procedure - Operation enabled [7]
- Operation inhibited [8]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- Ramp stop [9]
Control mode selection and settings 64.04 Drive State # 0 20 Read Only
- Quick stop [10]
- Coast stop [11]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - Fault [12]
States machine and process data - OFF1 Fluxed [13]
- Bus Drop [14]
- ... [15]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - ... [16]
Functions - ... [17]
- ... [18]
- ... [19]
- ... [20]

Speed feedback settling time after the

64.05 Settling Time # 0 65535 Read Only
speed reference step

64.06 DSP Main Tick DSP main tick # 0 0 Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 64.07 DSP Bad Par Id DSP bad parameter ID # 0 0 Read Only

64.21 AO1 Actual value of the variable sent to AO1 # -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only

Chapter 11 P. 128 64.22 AO2 Actual value of the variable sent to AO2 # -32768 @ -4.0 pu 32767 @ 4.0 pu Read Only
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

46
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.10 LOGS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.19

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
50 - ALARM BUFFER
Programming overview
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Chapter 4 P. 9
50.01 Log 1 Log 1 # 0 30 Read Only
Programming tools

50.02 Log 2 Log 2 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 50.03 Log 3 Log 3 # 0 30 Read Only
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure 50.04 Log 4 Log 4 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 7 P. 21 50.05 Log 5 Log 5 # 0 30 Read Only

Control mode selection and settings
50.06 Log 6 Log 6 # 0 30 Read Only
Chapter 8 P. 22

8.4.10 LOGS
States machine and process data 50.07 Log 7 Log 7 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 9 P. 55
50.08 Log 8 Log 8 # 0 30 Read Only
Functions
50.09 Log 9 Log 9 # 0 30 Read Only

50.10 Log 10 Log 10 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

47
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 8.20

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 59 - FAULT HISTORY

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Programming overview
59.01 Fault History 1 Fault History 1 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 4 P. 9 59.02 Fault History 2 Fault History 2 # 0 30 Read Only

Programming tools
59.03 Fault History 3 Fault History 3 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 5 P. 16
59.04 Fault History 4 Fault History 4 # 0 30 Read Only
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 59.05 Fault History 5 Fault History 5 # 0 30 Read Only

Quick start-up procedure
59.06 Fault History 6 Fault History 6 # 0 30 Read Only
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 59.07 Fault History 7 Fault History 7 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 8 P. 22 59.08 Fault History 8 Fault History 8 # 0 30 Read Only

8.4.10 LOGS
States machine and process data
59.09 Fault History 9 Fault History 9 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 9 P. 55
59.10 Fault History 10 Fault History 10 # 0 30 Read Only
Functions

59.11 Fault History 11 Fault History 11 # 0 30 Read Only

59.12 Fault History 12 Fault History 12 # 0 30 Read Only

59.13 Fault History 13 Fault History 13 # 0 30 Read Only

59.14 Fault History 14 Fault History 14 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104 59.15 Fault History 15 Fault History 15 # 0 30 Read Only

Fieldbus
59.16 Fault History 16 Fault History 16 # 0 30 Read Only

59.17 Fault History 17 Fault History 17 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 59.18 Fault History 18 Fault History 18 # 0 30 Read Only

59.19 Fault History 19 Fault History 19 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 48
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 59 - FAULT HISTORY
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Chapter 3 P. 8 59.20 Fault History 20 Fault History 20 # 0 30 Read Only
Programming overview

59.21 Fault History 21 Fault History 21 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 59.22 Fault History 22 Fault History 22 # 0 30 Read Only

59.23 Fault History 23 Fault History 23 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 59.24 Fault History 24 Fault History 24 # 0 30 Read Only
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 59.25 Fault History 25 Fault History 25 # 0 30 Read Only

Quick start-up procedure

59.26 Fault History 26 Fault History 26 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
59.27 Fault History 27 Fault History 27 # 0 30 Read Only
Chapter 8 P. 22

8.4.10 LOGS
States machine and process data 59.28 Fault History 28 Fault History 28 # 0 30 Read Only

59.29 Fault History 29 Fault History 29 # 0 30 Read Only

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 59.30 Fault History 30 Fault History 30 # 0 30 Read Only

59.66 Fault Log Current Index Fault Log Current Index # 0 29 Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 49
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 8.21

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 65 - TIME - RTC SETTINGS

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Programming overview
65.01 Time Time # 0 48 Read and Write

Chapter 4 P. 9 65.02 Time Setting - Year Time Setting - Year # 2000 2999 Read and Write
Programming tools

65.03 Time Setting - Month Time Setting - Month # 1 12 Read and Write
Chapter 5 P. 16
65.04 Time Setting - Day Time Setting - Day # 1 31 Read and Write
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 65.05 Time Setting - Hour Time Setting - Hour # 0 23 Read and Write
Quick start-up procedure
65.06 Time Setting - Min Time Setting - Minute # 0 59 Read and Write
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 65.07 Time Setting - Sec Time Setting - Second # 0 59 Read and Write

Chapter 8 P. 22 65.08 Time Setting – Week Day Time Setting – Day of week # 1 7 Read and Write

8.4.10 LOGS
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

50
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.11 PROCESS DATA EXPRESSED

Scope
IN ENGINEERING UNITS
Chapter 2 P. 7 For the selection of IEC or NEMA units of measure refer to paragraph 5.5
Safety
Table 8.22
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

8.4.11 PROCESS DATA EXPRESSED IN ENGINEERING UNITS

75 - ELECTRICAL DATA
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type

75.01 Actual Current [A] Actual current A - - Read Only

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 75.02 Speed Ref [rpm] Speed reference rpm - - Read Only

Chapter 6 P. 18
75.03 DC Voltage [V] DC voltage V - - Read Only
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 75.04 DC Current [A] Measured DC-Bus current A - - Read Only

Control mode selection and settings
75.05 Actual Voltage [V] Actual voltage V - - Read Only
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 75.06 DC Curr Estim [A] Estimated DC-Bus current A - - Read Only

75.07 Speed Ref Used [rpm} Speed reference used rpm - - Read Only
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 75.13 Active Power [kW] Active power kW - - Read Only

75.91 Active Power [HP} Active power HP - - Read Only

75.14 Actual Freq [Hz] Actual frequency Hz - - Read Only

75.15 Freq Ref [Hz] Frequency reference Hz - - Read Only

75.16 Actual Speed [rpm] Actual speed rpm - - Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Reference source in use
- Off [0]
- Fixed [1]
- AI1 [2]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - AI2 [3]
I/0 Configuration - AI3 [4]
75.21 Actual Ref Source # 0 10 Read Only
- AI4 [5]
- Profibus [6]
Chapter 12 P. 145
- Modbus [7]
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments - Digital Pot [9]
- PrsPID [10]
Annex P. 156 - Keypad [11]

1/2 51
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 65 - ELECTRICAL
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type

Chapter 3 P. 8 75.22 Active Curr [A] Active current [A] A - - Read Only
Programming overview

8.4.11 PROCESS DATA EXPRESSED IN ENGINEERING UNITS

75.23 React Curr [A] Reactive current [A] A - - Read Only
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 2/2

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels For the selection of IEC or NEMA units of measure refer to paragraph 5.5
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Table 8.23

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 76 - HYDRAULIC
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
States machine and process data
76.01 Press. of Prs PID Ref 1 Pressure of Process PID Reference 1 [bar] bar - - Read Only

Chapter 9 P. 55 76.41 Press. of Prs PID Ref 1 Pressure of Process PID Reference 1 [PSI] PSI - - Read Only
Functions
76.02 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 1 Pressure of Process PID Feedback 1 [bar] bar - - Read Only

76.42 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 1 Pressure of Process PID Feedback 1 [PSI] PSI - - Read Only

76.03 Flow of Prs PID Ref 1 Flow of Process PID Reference 1 [m^3/h] m^3/h - - Read Only

76.43 Flow of Prs PID Ref 1 Flow of Process PID Reference 1 [GPM] GPM - - Read Only

Chapter 10 P. 104 76.04 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 1 Flow of Process PID Feedback 1 [m^3/h] m^3/h - - Read Only
Fieldbus
76.44 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 1 Flow of Process PID Feedback 1 [GPM] GPM - - Read Only

76.05 Level of Prs PID Ref 1 Level of Process PID Reference 1 [m] m - - Read Only

Chapter 11 P. 128
76.45 Level of Prs PID Ref 1 Level of Process PID Reference 1 [ft] ft - - Read Only
I/0 Configuration

76.06 Level of Prs PID Fdb 1 Level of Process PID Feedback 1 [m] m - - Read Only
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting 76.46 Level of Prs PID Fdb 1 Level of Process PID Feedback 1 [ft] ft - - Read Only
instruments

Annex P. 156 76.07 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 1 Temperature of Process PID Reference 1 [°C] C - - Read Only

76.47 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 1 Temperature of Process PID Reference 1 [°F] F - - Read Only

1/2 52
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 76 - HYDRAULIC
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
Chapter 3 P. 8 76.08 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 1 Temperature of Process PID Feedback 1 [°C] C - - Read Only
Programming overview

8.4.11 PROCESS DATA EXPRESSED IN ENGINEERING UNITS

76.48 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 1 Temperature of Process PID Feedback 1 [°F] F - - Read Only
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
76.21 Press. of Prs PID Ref 2 Pressure of Process PID Reference 2 [bar] bar - - Read Only

76.61 Press. of Prs PID Ref 2 Pressure of Process PID Reference 2 [PSI] PSI - - Read Only
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 76.22 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 2 Pressure of Process PID Feedback 2 [bar] bar - - Read Only
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 76.62 Press. of Prs PID Fdb 2 Pressure of Process PID Feedback 2 [PSI] PSI - - Read Only
Quick start-up procedure

76.23 Flow of Prs PID Ref 2 Flow of Process PID Reference 2 [m^3/h] m^3/h - - Read Only
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
76.63 Flow of Prs PID Ref 2 Flow of Process PID Reference 2 [GPM] GPM - - Read Only
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
76.24 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 2 Flow of Process PID Feedback 2 [m^3/h] m^3/h - - Read Only

76.64 Flow of Prs PID Fdb 2 Flow of Process PID Feedback 2 [GPM] GPM - - Read Only
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 76.25 Level of Prs PID Ref 2 Level of Process PID Reference 2 [m] m - - Read Only

76.65 Level of Prs PID Ref 2 Level of Process PID Reference 2 [ft] ft - - Read Only

76.26 Level of Prs PID Fdb 2 Level of Process PID Feedback 2 [m] m - - Read Only

76.66 Level of Prs PID Fdb 2 Level of Process PID Feedback 2 [ft] ft - - Read Only

76.27 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 2 Temperature of Process PID Reference 2 [°C] C - - Read Only
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 76.67 Temp. of Prs PID Ref 2 Temperature of Process PID Reference 2 [°F] F - - Read Only

76.28 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 2 Temperature of Process PID Feedback 2 [°C] C - - Read Only

76.68 Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 2 Temperature of Process PID Feedback 2 [°F] F - - Read Only
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 53
 Answer Drives 1000 8
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 8.4.12 COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSTICS PROCESS DATA

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 8.24

Safety
67 - COMMUNICATIONS
Chapter 3 P. 8

8.4.12 COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSTICS PROCESS DATA - 8.4.13

Programming overview
Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type
67.01 Profibus error counter Profibus error counter # - - Read Only
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 67.02 Modbus PKW1 In Modbus PKW1 In # -32768 32767 Read Only

67.03 Modbus PKW2 In Modbus PKW2 In # -32768 32767 Read Only

Chapter 5 P. 16
67.04 Modbus PKW3 In Modbus PKW3 In # -32768 32767 Read Only
Programming levels
and control modes
67.05 Modbus PKW4 In Modbus PKW4 In # -32768 32767 Read Only
Chapter 6 P. 18
67.06 Modbus PKW1 Out Modbus PKW1 Out # -32768 32767 Read Only
Quick start-up procedure
67.07 Modbus PKW2 Out Modbus PKW2 Out # -32768 32767 Read Only
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 67.08 Modbus PKW3 Out Modbus PKW3 Out # -32768 32767 Read Only

Chapter 8 P. 22 67.09 Modbus PKW4 Out Modbus PKW4 Out # -32768 32767 Read Only
States machine and process data 67.11 1 Data Exchange Area 1 Data Exchange Area # 0 16 Read Only

67.12 2 Data Exchange Area 2 Data Exchange Area # 0 16 Read Only

Chapter 9 P. 55
67.25 Profibus State Profibus State # - - Read Only
Functions
67.26 Ethernet State Ethernet State # - - Read Only

67.30 Profibus IPZ Profibus IPZ # 0 10 Read Only

8.4.13 AUX PROCESS DATA

Table 8.25
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
63 - AUX

Id Name Description Unit Min Value Max Value Access Type

Chapter 11 P. 128 63.16 Prs PID Ref 1 Process PID Reference 1 pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write
I/0 Configuration
63.17 Prs PID Fdb 1 Process PID Feedback 1 pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write

Chapter 12 P. 145 63.18 Prs PID Ref 2 Process PID Reference 2 pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments 63.19 Prs PID Fdb 2 Process PID Feedback 2 pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu Read Write

Annex P. 156

54
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9 FUNCTIONS
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 The following functions and macros are available:

Safety

9.1 HOA – Hand/off/auto 9.14 Bus drop and grid waiting 9.26 Precharge management 9.39 Process PID: analog feedback loss
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview 9.2 Stop mode 9.15 Fly start 9.27 Auto on/off 9.40 Process PID: auxiliary pumps
9.3 Speed demand 9.16 Loss of output phase/output 9.28 Auto reset and restart 9.41 Process PID: pressure, flow
Chapter 4 P. 9 9.4 Ramps short circuit 9.29 Motor switch and level view
Programming tools 9.5 S-ramp 9.17 Flux up 9.30 Jog (flushing) 9.42 Soft fill
9.6 2-Ramps vs. Threshold frequencies 9.18 Torque limits control 9.31 Anti-blocking 9.43 Motor pause
Chapter 5 P. 16 9.7 Preset speed 9.19 Speed deviation 9.32 Auto-cleaning 9.44 Well draw down control
Programming levels
and control modes
9.8 Digital potentiometer 9.20 Underload 9.33 Frost protection (suction control via constant pressure)
Chapter 6 P. 18
9.9 Critical speeds avoidance 9.21 Energy optimization 9.34 Process PID 9.45 Low city or low suction inlet pressure
Quick start-up procedure 9.10 Analog monitor 9.22 Voltage boost 9.35 Process PID: dead band delay 9.46 Logic
9.11 Analog command loss 9.23 Motor ID 9.36 Process PID: feedforward
Chapter 7 P. 21
9.12 VDC undervoltage control 9.24 Multiple gains 9.37 Process PID: feedback supervision
Control mode selection and settings
9.13 VDC overvoltage control 9.25 Regulator autotuning 9.38 Process PID: input pressure supervision
Chapter 8

9 FUNCTIONS
P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

55
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.1 HOA – HAND/OFF/AUTO 9.1.1 MAN/AUTO MODE

Scope
HOA Hand/Off/Auto function parameters are available in the family The parameter HOA Man/Auto Cmd Sel [33.17] allows the operator
Chapter 2 P. 7 START/STOP MODE [33.00]. to select the source of the command to switch from Man mode to Auto
Safety mode and vice versa; it allows also the operator to disable Man mode, that
HOA – Hand/Off/Auto function allows to manage the following options: means there isn’t any Man mode command source that can be enabled.
Chapter 3 P. 8
• Man mode vs. Auto mode command source selection The default value is Keypad Auto/Man: it is possible to switch from Man
Programming overview
• Man mode command and reference source mode to Auto mode and vice versa using MAN key and AUTO key or using
• Start/Stop command management selection active on edge, level or pulse the virtual keypad on DVM (Drive Manager). It is necessary a confirmation
Chapter 4 P. 9
from keypad.
Programming tools
Parameters: In case the source of the command to switch from Man mode to Auto
• HOA Start/Stop type [33.12]: pick list to select how to manage the Start mode and vice versa is set to DIx or others, the switch from Man mode to
Chapter 5 P. 16 and Stop command (active on edge if set to Edge Start/Stop, active on Auto mode must be performed using the active selection (that is DIx or
Programming levels
and control modes
level if set to Level Start/Stop or active on pulse if set to Pulse Start/Stop) others). It is not necessary any confirmation from keypad.

9.1 HOA – HAND/OFF/AUTO - 9.1.1

• HOA Man/Auto OnFly Cmd [33.13]: enables the possibility to switch If the parameter HOA Man/Auto OnFly Cmd [33.21] is set to Disable,
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
from Man mode to Auto mode and vice versa also in Run state, without then switch from Man mode to Auto mode and vice versa causes the Drive
stopping the Drive, but keeping it in Run state to stop. It is necessary a new edge start command even if the parameter
Chapter 7 P. 21 • HOA Man Ref Src Sel [33.16]: pick list to select the source of the speed HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Level Start/Stop.
Control mode selection and settings reference in Man mode
Chapter 8 P. 22
• HOA Man/Auto Cmd Sel [33.17]: pick list to select the source of the The virtual keypad on DVM (Drive Manager) can be enabled only if:
States machine and process data
command to switch from Man mode to Auto mode and vice versa • Parameter HOA Man Ref Src Sel [33.16] is set to Keypad
• HOA Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18]: pick list to select the source • Parameter HOA Man/Auto Cmd Sel [33.17] is set to Keypad Auto/Man
of the start command in Man mode • Parameter HOA Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] is set to Keypad Start
Chapter 9 P. 55
• HOA Man P Stop Cmd Sel [33.19]: pick list to select the source of the • Parameter HOA Man P Stop Cmd Sel [33.19] is set to Keypad Stop
Functions
stop command in Man mode, when the parameter HOA Start/Stop
type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop If the parameter HOA Man Ref Src Sel [33.16] is set to Keypad, it is
• HOA Auto P Stop Cmd Sel [33.20]: pick list to select the source of the possible to modify the speed reference using the up and down arrow keys
stop command in Auto mode, when the parameter HOA Start/Stop of the keypad and also of the virtual keypad on DVM (Drive Manager).
type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop Note that in Man mode, it is not possible to select the reference source
selection for speed PI controller from Process PID regulator; in Man mode,
Process PID and related functions are not active.

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

56
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.1.2 START/STOP COMMANDS 9.1.3 EDGE START/STOP

Scope
In Man mode, the Start command is active on edge with the parameter The parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Edge Start/Stop.
Chapter 2 P. 7 HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] set both to Edge Start/Stop and to Level
Safety Start/Stop. Man mode:
In Man mode, the Start command is active on pulse with the parameter • Start command: press MAN key on keypad or positive edge on the HOA
Chapter 3 P. 8
HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] set to Pulse Start/Stop. Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] selected value; Start command is on
Programming overview
In Auto mode, the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is active only the edge, but it must remain set to 1 to keep the Drive in Run state,
with command source selection from terminal strip; in particular, with otherwise the Drive stops (see the first condition of the following points
Chapter 4 P. 9
Start command from DI1. for the Stop command)
Programming tools
In Auto mode, with command source selection from Profibus or Modbus, • Stop command (at least one of the following conditions):
the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is not active. In Auto mode, - HOA Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] set to 0
Chapter 5 P. 16 with command source selection from Profibus or Modbus, commands are - press STOP key on keypad

9.1.2 START/STOP COMMANDS - 9.1.3

Programming levels
and control modes
always active on the edge; in case, it is the upper level logic (for example, - Coast command
Automation) that must manage the commands in a different desired mode. - Quick Stop command
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
- Fault
In brief, for Auto mode: - DE (Drive Enable) set to 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 • Edge Start/Stop: - Switch from Man mode to Auto mode (if the parameter HOA Man/
Control mode selection and settings - Start command is active on positive edge of DI1 Auto OnFly Cmd [33.13] set to Off)
Chapter 8 P. 22
- it is necessary to keep DI1 set to 1, otherwise the Drive stops
States machine and process data
- once stopped, it is necessary a new positive edge of DI1 When stop command is no more active (none of the previous points), it is
- only one command for Start and Stop necessary a new pressure of MAN key on keypad or a new positive edge
• Level Start/Stop: on the HOA Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] selected value to start again
Chapter 9 P. 55
- Start command is active when DI1 is set to 1 (to go in RUN state).
Functions
- it is necessary to keep DI1 set to 1, otherwise the Drive stops
- once stopped, it is not strictly necessary a new positive edge of DI1: if Auto mode:
DI1 is still set to 1, the Drive starts again • Start command: positive edge of DI1; Start command is on the edge,
- only one command for Start and Stop but DI1 must remain set to 1 to keep the Drive in Run state, otherwise
• Pulse Start/Stop: the Drive stops (see the first condition of the following points for the
- Start command is active on positive edge of DI1 Stop command)
- it is not necessary to keep DI1 set to 1: the Drive is still in Run state also • Stop command (at least one of the following conditions):
if DI1 is set to 0 - DI1 set to 0
Chapter 10 P. 104 - once stopped, it is necessary a new positive edge of DI1 - Coast command
Fieldbus - one command for Start and one command for Stop - Quick Stop command
- Fault
The previous points summarize the main difference between the 3 mode - DE (Drive Enable) set to 0
(Edge Start/Stop, Level Start/Stop and Pulse Start/Stop) of Start and Stop - CW1.03 (Enable Operation) set to 0
Chapter 11 P. 128
management. In the following paragraphs, more detailed descriptions - Switch from Auto mode to Man mode (if the parameter HOA Man/
I/0 Configuration
of the 3 mode (Edge Start/Stop, Level Start/Stop and Pulse Start/Stop), in Auto OnFly Cmd [33.13] set to Off)
Man mode and Auto mode, are reported.
Chapter 12 P. 145
When Stop command is no more active (none of the previous points), it is
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
necessary a new positive edge of DI1 to start again and go in Run state.
Annex P. 156

57
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.1.4 LEVEL START/STOP 9.1.5 PULSE START/STOP

Scope
The parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Level Start/Stop. The parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop.
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Man mode: NOTE
• Start command: press MAN key on keypad or positive edge on the HOA It is not possible set the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] to Pulse
Chapter 3 P. 8
Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] selected value; Start command is on Start/Stop if at least one of the following function is enabled: Auto On/
Programming overview
the edge, but it must remain set to 1 to keep the Drive in Run state, Off, Auto Reset and Restart, Motor Switch, Motor Pause, Well Draw Down
otherwise the Drive stops (see the first condition of the following points Control and/or Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure.
Chapter 4 P. 9
for the Stop command) In case the operator tries to set the parameter HOA Start/Stop type
Programming tools
• Stop command (at least one of the following conditions): [33.12] to Pulse Start/Stop when at least one of the previous functions are
- HOA Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] set to 0 enabled, the error DSPParEr is generated and the parameter HOA Start/
Chapter 5 P. 16 - press STOP key on keypad Stop type [33.12] is set to the last value.
Programming levels
and control modes
- Coast command
- Quick Stop command Man mode:
Chapter 6 P. 18

9.1.4 LEVEL START/STOP - 9.1.5

- Fault • Start command: press MAN key on keypad or positive edge on the HOA
Quick start-up procedure
- DE (Drive Enable) set to 0 Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] selected value; Start command is on the
Chapter 7 P. 21 - Switch from Man mode to Auto mode (if the parameter HOA Man/ edge and can go to 0 still keeping the Drive in RUN state
Control mode selection and settings Auto OnFly Cmd [33.13] set to Off) • Stop command (at least one of the following conditions):
Chapter 8 P. 22
- HOA Man Stop Cmd Sel [33.19] set to 0
States machine and process data
When stop command is no more active (none of the previous points), it is - press STOP key on keypad
necessary a new pressure of MAN key on keypad or a new positive edge - Coast command
on the HOA Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18] selected value to start again - Quick Stop command
Chapter 9 P. 55
(to go in RUN state). - Fault
Functions
- DE (Drive Enable) set to 0
Auto mode: - switch from Man mode to Auto mode (if the parameter HOA Man/
• Start command: DI1 set to 1; DI1 must remain set to 1 to keep the Auto OnFly Cmd [33.13] set to Off)
Drive in Run state, otherwise the Drive stops (see the first condition of
the following points for the stop command) When stop command is no more active, it is necessary a new pressure of
• Stop command (at least one of the following conditions): MAN key on keypad or a new positive edge on the HOA Man Start Cmd
- DI1 set to 0 Sel [33.18] value to start again and go in Run state.
- Coast command HOA Man stop cmd sel [33.19] set to 0 has higher priority than a positive
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Quick Stop command edge of HOA Man Start Cmd Sel [33.18]: the Drive stops or remain
Fieldbus - Fault stopped.
- DE (Drive Enable) set to 0
- CW1.03 (Enable Operation) set to 0 Auto mode:
- Switch from Auto mode to Man mode (if the parameter HOA Man/ • Start command: positive edge of DI1; Start command is on the edge and
Chapter 11 P. 128
Auto OnFly Cmd [33.13] set to Off) can go to 0 still keeping the Drive in Run state
I/0 Configuration
• Stop command (at least one of the following conditions):
When Stop command is no more active, if the DI1 is still set to 1, the Drive - HOA Auto Stop Cmd Sel [33.20] set to 0
Chapter 12 P. 145
starts again and to go in Run state. - Coast command
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Instead, after a switch from Man mode to Auto mode and vice versa, it is - Quick Stop command
Annex P. 156 necessary a new positive edge of DI1 to start again and go in RUN state. - Fault

58
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 - DE (Drive Enable) set to 0 9.2.1 RAMP STOP

Scope - CW1.03 (Enable Operation) set to 0 This mode provides motor stop according to the deceleration ramp set in the
Chapter 2 P. 7 - Switch from Auto mode to Man mode parameter Ramp Stop Time [33.10]. The default value set is 15 seconds.
Safety When the Zero Speed [32.21] has been reached the AD1000 switches

9.1.6 RUN/FORWARD/REVERSE COMMAND - 9.2 - 9.2.1 - 9.2.2 - 9.2.3

When Stop command is no more active, it is necessary a new positive over to status READY TO SWITCH ON.
Chapter 3 P. 8 edge of DI1 to start again and go in Run state. To activate this stop mode, it is necessary to set to Off the bit 0 of
Programming overview
Command Word 1.

Chapter 4 P. 9 9.1.6 RUN/FORWARD/REVERSE COMMAND As specified in the states machine (Figure 9.1) this stop mode can be
Programming tools The parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv connect [31.10] allows to select the interrupted by a run command; if the run command is given again the
following options: AD1000 switches over to status READY TO OPERATE, both in case the
Chapter 5 P. 16 • Parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv connect [31.10] set to DI1: Run: DI1 is the command is given with motor already stopped and in case the motor is
Programming levels start command; speed direction depends only on speed reference sign still decelerating.
and control modes
• Parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv connect [31.10] set to DI1: Run – DI2: Fw/Rv:
Chapter 6 P. 18 DI1 is the start command; DI2 set the negative of the speed reference
Quick start-up procedure
• Parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv connect [31.10] set to DI1: RunFw – DI2: 9.2.2 QUICK STOP
Chapter 7 P. 21 RunRv: DI1 is the start command with unmodified speed reference sign This mode is used when the motor needs to be stopped in the shortest
Control mode selection and settings (forward); DI2 is the start command with modified speed reference sign
possible time and provides motor stop according to the deceleration ramp set
(reverse)
Chapter 8 P. 22 in parameter Quick Stop Time [33.11]. The default value set is 5 seconds.
States machine and process data Only when the Zero Speed [32.21] has been reached the AD1000
If the parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv connect [31.10] is set to DI1: Run – DI2: Fw/
switches over to status SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Rv, then also DI2 behavior is set by parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12].
To activate this stop mode, it is necessary to set to Off the bit 2 of
Chapter 9 P. 55 If parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse, the Drive reacts
Command Word 1.
Functions also to DI2 pulse. If DI2 pulse occurs when the Drive is in RUN state in
forward direction, then a reverse direction command becomes active; and
As specified in the states machine (Figure 9.1) this stop mode cannot be
vice versa.
interrupted by a run command.
If no alarms are present, machine restart can take place only after a new
start command (set CW1.2 to On, then set CW1.0 to Off and then to On).
9.2 STOP MODE
Three different stop modes are available:
• Ramp Stop
9.2.3 COAST STOP
Chapter 10 P. 104 • Quick Stop
This mode provides motor stop inhibiting the start pulses sent to the
Fieldbus • Coast Stop
Drive. The motor shall therefore continue to turn due to inertia. Stop time
depends on the motor and load mechanical time constant.
The three stop modes are also associated to the different types of alarms
The AD1000 switches over to status SWITCH-ON INHIBITED even if the
according to what is specified in the parameters of family ALARM
Chapter 11 P. 128 motor has not stopped yet.
SETTINGS [36.00] and discussed in the chapter 12.
I/0 Configuration To activate it, it is necessary to set to Off bit 1 of Command Word 1.
The command is implemented based on what is imposed in the bit 0, 1, 2
of Command Word 1 (for the explanation of this refer to chapter 8).
Chapter 12 P. 145 As specified in the states machine (Figure 9.1) this stop mode cannot be
Protections and troubleshooting interrupted by a run command.
instruments
If no alarms are present, machine restart can take place only after a new
Annex P. 156 start command (set CW1.1 to On, then set CW1.0 to Off and then to On).

59
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.3 SPEED DEMAND • Profibus, Modbus: the reference comes from the selected fieldbus; after
Scope
Speed Demand function parameters are available in the family SPEED choosing this option, it is necessary to enable the desired fieldbus (see
Chapter 2 P. 7 REFERENCE [32.00]. This parameters family allows setting functions the parameters of family Profibus [81.00] or Modbus [82.00]).
Safety relevant to speed control (references, limits, acceleration or deceleration • Digital Potentiometer: the reference comes from the digital
times, pre-set references or special functions). potentiometer; after selecting this option, it is necessary to enable the
Chapter 3 P. 8 digital potentiometer and set it following the indications given in
Programming overview
Four different speed references are defined: table 10.4; this option is available only for parameters Main Speed Ref
• Main Speed Ref: the main reference Sel [32.01] and for parameter Aux Speed Ref Sel [32.02].
Chapter 4 P. 9
• Aux Speed Ref: the auxiliary reference used as an alternative to the main one • Prs PID: the reference comes from Process PID controller; after selecting
Programming tools
• Add Speed Ref: the additional reference added upstream the ramp this option, it is necessary to enable the Process PID function; this option
• Speed Feedforward: the additional reference added downstream the ramp is available only for parameter Main Speed Ref Sel [32.01] and for
Chapter 5 P. 16 parameter Aux Speed Ref Sel [32.02].
Programming levels
and control modes
For all four references the source can be chosen from which to obtain the
value to be applied. The parameters allowing this selection are: The selection between main (Main Speed Ref) or auxiliary (Aux Speed Ref)
Chapter 6 P. 18
reference is implemented by digital signals that can be selected through
Quick start-up procedure
• Main Speed Ref Sel [32.01]: main speed reference source selection
• Aux Speed Ref Sel [32.02]: auxiliary speed reference source selection the parameter Aux Speed Ref Cmd [32.03]. As default setting, the main
Chapter 7 P. 21 • Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]: additional speed reference source selection reference is selected.

9.3 SPEED DEMAND

Control mode selection and settings • Speed Feedforward Sel [32.05]: speed feedforward source selection
The additional speed reference and speed feedforward must be enabled
Chapter 8 P. 22
with parameters Enable Add Speed Cmd [32.32] and Enable Ffw
States machine and process data
The possibilities of choice are:
• Off: reference deactivated (default value) Speed Cmd [32.33].
• Fixed: the reference corresponds to a constant value set in one of
Chapter 9 P. 55
parameters Fixed Speed Ref 1 [32.06], Fixed Speed Ref 2 [32.07], Figure 9
 .1 - Speed Demand
Functions
Fixed Speed Ref 3 [32.08] and Fixed Speed Ref 4 [32.09], whose
choice is made through parameters Cmd 1 Sel Fixed Speed Ref
[32.10] and Cmd 2 Sel Fixed Speed Ref [32.11] (see table 10.3).
• AI1, AI2 (AI3 Option, AI4 Option): the reference is the signal at analog
input selected (AI1: terminals 33 - 34; AI2: terminals 35 - 36); after
choosing this option, it is necessary to properly set, based on the
type of signal available (+/- 0-10V, +/- 0-20mA, +/- 4-20mA, etc.), the
parameters family ANALOG INPUTS [17.00] relevant to such input.
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting Process PID
instruments

Annex P. 156

60
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.3.1 REVERSAL OF ROTATION DIRECTION Figure 9

 .2 - Acceleration and deceleration times
Scope
The user has the possibility to choose three different modes for reversal of
Chapter 2 P. 7 the motor rotation direction based on the value of the parameter DI Run/
Safety Fw/Rv Connections [31.10]:
• Parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv Connections [31.10] set to DI1: Run: the Run
Chapter 3 P. 8
command is provided through digital input 1 (DI1 - terminal 48) and the
Programming overview
speed reference is allowed to reverse the run direction based on the sign
of the reference itself
Chapter 4 P. 9
• Parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv Connections [31.10] set to DI1: Run – DI2:
Programming tools
Fw/Rv: the Run command is provided through digital input 1 (DI1 -

9.3.1 REVERSAL OF ROTATION DIRECTION - 9.4

terminal 48) and the reversal of the rotation direction can be actuated
Chapter 5 P. 16 bringing to 1 (On) digital input 2 (DI2 - terminal 49)
Programming levels
and control modes
• Parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv Connections [31.10] set to DI1: RunFw –
DI2:RunRv: the forward Run command is provided through digital input
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
1 (DI1 - terminal 48), while the backward Run command is provided
through digital input 2 (DI2 - terminal 49); in this case any simultaneous
Chapter 7 P. 21 activation of digital inputs DI1 and DI2 imposes a null speed reference to
Control mode selection and settings the motor that therefore stops in ramp
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

9.4 RAMPS
Chapter 9 P. 55 The main and auxiliary speed references (added to any upstream addition
Functions reference) pass to a ramp-generating function that allows avoiding sudden The choice between the first ramp set (parameters Ramp Acc Time 1
variations of the reference itself, having the variation follow the trend of a [32.12] and [Ramp Dec Time 1 [32.13]) and the second (parameters
fixed slope ramp. Ramp Acc Time 2 [32.14] and Ramp Dec Time 2 [32.15]) takes place
In the AD1000 it is possible to choose between two sets of accelerating through digital signals that can be selected through the parameter Ramp
and decelerating ramps with the slope described by the following Rate Sel [32.16]. When the selected signal (for instance a digital input)
parameters: has got 0 value (Off) the first set is selected, otherwise the second. It
• Ramp Acc Time 1 [32.12]: standard acceleration time, set 1; is also possible to constantly select the first or second set through the
this parameter represents the time necessary for the speed reference to parameter Ramp Rate Sel [32.16].
Chapter 10 P. 104 go from 0 to 1 pu and it is expressed in seconds
Fieldbus • Ramp Dec Time 1 [32.13]: standard deceleration time, set 1; Besides the usual “constant slope” ramps, also “constant time” ramps are
this parameter represents the time necessary for the speed reference to managed, which are especially useful if trajectories need to be generated
go from 1 to 0 pu and it is expressed in seconds synchronized with other events or with machines that are working at
• Ramp Acc Time 2 [32.14]: standard acceleration time, set 2; different speeds.
Chapter 11 P. 128 this parameter represents the time necessary for the speed reference to To activate the fixed time ramp, it is necessary:
I/0 Configuration
go from 0 to 1 pu and it is expressed in seconds • current ramp operation finished
• Ramp Dec Time 2 [32.15]: standard deceleration time, set 2; • set bit 9 of Cmd Wd 2
Chapter 12 P. 145 this parameter represents the time necessary for the speed reference to • set a speed reference requiring a variation greater than 3% of the last
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments go from 1 to 0 pu and it is expressed in seconds requested reference
Annex P. 156
It is possible to cancel the effect of acceleration and deceleration ramps In this way, the new reference shall be reached exactly in the time defined
bringing the value of the four parameters to 0 seconds. by the current set of acceleration/deceleration times and with a variable
The meaning of such parameters is illustrated in the following figure. slope based on the last reference reached.

61
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.4.1 SPEED REFERENCE LIMITS 9.5 S-RAMP

Scope
The speed reference limitation is performed both before and after the S-Ramp function is enabled if parameter Jerk Rate [32.34] is set different
Chapter 2 P. 7 application of the ramp function and is defined by the parameters Max Pos from 0. This parameter is settable only when the Drive is stopped. S-Ramp
Safety Ref [32.22] (positive limit) and Max Neg Ref [32.23] (negative limit). The function parameter is available in the family SPEED REFERENCE [32.00].
values of such parameters, expressed in pu, represent the values beyond
Chapter 3 P. 8
which the speed reference cannot go. The parameter Jerk Rate [32.34] allows the speed profile become
Programming overview
smoothly linked at speed changes.
The parameter Overspeed Threshold [32.18] expresses the pu value of
Chapter 4 P. 9
the speed feedback beyond which alarm OverSpeed (code 25, bit 8 of Figure 9
 .4 - S-Ramp
Programming tools
Alarm Word 2, AW2.08) becomes active. The operation to be performed if
this threshold is exceeded is set by parameter Overspeed [36.25] of family
Chapter 5 P. 16 ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between the following
Programming levels control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp

9.4.1 SPEED REFERENCE LIMITS - 9.5

and control modes
Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
The parameter Zero Speed [32.21] establishes a window around the
Chapter 7 P. 21 null speed inside which bit 8 of Status Word 2 is set to On. The value is
Control mode selection and settings expressed in pu.
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
The parameter Min Speed [32.19] establishes the pu value below which
bit 7 of Status Word 2 is set to On. To prevent the minimum speed signaling
to be too sensitive to the feedback signal, it is possible to set a hysteresis
Chapter 9 P. 55
band through the parameter Min Speed Hysteresis [32.20]. The minimum
Functions
speed bit is set to On when speed goes below the value (Min Speed
[32.19] - Min Speed Hysteresis [32.20]) and is set to Off if the speed goes
above the value (Min Speed [32.19] + Min Speed Hysteresis [32.20]).

Figure 9
 .3 - Min Speed and Zero Speed
The parameter Jerk Rate [32.34] represents a percent of the smallest
value between all ramp time parameters (both enabled or disabled):
Chapter 10 P. 104 • Ramp Acc Time 1 [32.12]: standard acceleration time, set 1
Fieldbus • Ramp Dec Time 1 [32.13]: standard deceleration time, set 1
• Ramp Acc Time 2 [32.14]: standard acceleration time, set 2
• Ramp Dec Time 2 [32.15]: standard deceleration time, set 2
• TB Ramp Acc Time 1 [32.41]: Thrust Bearing acceleration time, set 1
Chapter 11 P. 128
• TB Ramp Dec Time 1 [32.42]: Thrust Bearing deceleration time, set 1
I/0 Configuration
• TB Ramp Acc Time 2 [32.44]: Thrust Bearing acceleration time, set 2
• TB Ramp Dec Time 2 [32.45]: Thrust Bearing deceleration time, set 2
Chapter 12 P. 145
• Ramp Stop Time [33.10]: deceleration time in ramp stop
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments • Quick Stop Time [33.11]: deceleration time in quick stop
Annex P. 156
For example, the parameter Jerk Rate [32.34] set to 10% means that the
time of the smoothly profile is calculated based on the smallest value of
the above mentioned parameters.
62
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 S-Ramp function extends the ramp up time or the ramp down time of a - TB Ramp Acc Time 1 [32.41]: thrust bearing acceleration time, set 1
Scope time proportional to the parameter Jerk Rate [32.34] and to the smallest - TB Ramp Dec Time 1 [32.42]: thrust bearing deceleration time, set 1
Chapter 2 P. 7 value between all the ramp time parameters. From practical point of • When speed reference is between TB Thresh Speed 1 [32.43] and TB
Safety view, S-Ramp function inserts an additional delay. For this reason, it is Thresh Speed 2 [32.46], then Drive is inside second speed zone and
recommended not to use S-Ramp function (or to set a small value of the active ramp is defined by the following second set of acceleration/
Chapter 3 P. 8 parameter Jerk Rate [32.34]) when Process PID function is used, so to deceleration time:
Programming overview
avoid the insertion of an additional delay between Process PID regulator - TB Ramp Acc Time 2 [32.44]: thrust bearing acceleration time, set 2
and speed PID regulator, avoiding possible instability; anyway, the Process - TB Ramp Dec Time 2 [32.45]: thrust bearing deceleration time, set 2
Chapter 4 P. 9 PID regulator itself, when well tuned, has a similar effect to the speed • When speed reference is between 0 and TB Thresh Speed 1 [32.43],
Programming tools reference as the S-Ramp function. then Drive is inside standard speed zone and active ramp is defined by
the standard acceleration and deceleration time:

9.6 2-RAMPS VS. THRESHOLD FREQUENCIES

Chapter 5 P. 16 The guidelines for the settings of this parameter are: - Ramp Acc Time 1 [32.12]: standard acceleration time, set 1
Programming levels • If the speed reference varies slowly over time, parameter Jerk Rate - Ramp Dec Time 1 [32.13]: standard deceleration time, set 1
and control modes
[32.34] can be set to a greater value (anyway lower than 10%, that is - Ramp Acc Time 2 [32.14]: standard acceleration time, set 2
Chapter 6 P. 18
the maximum accepted value for this parameter) - Ramp Dec Time 2 [32.15]: standard deceleration time, set 2
Quick start-up procedure
• If the speed reference varies rapidly over time, parameter Jerk Rate - Ramp Rate Selection [32.16]: switch to select between standard set 1
Chapter 7 P. 21 [32.34] must be set to a smaller value and standard set 2 (0 = standard set 1, 1 = standard set 2)
Control mode selection and settings
Analog speed reference varying with continuity has a similar effect to the 2-Ramps vs. Threshold Frequency function can be enabled setting at least
Chapter 8 P. 22
speed reference as the S-Ramp function; so, in that case, S-Ramp function one of the following parameters different from zero:
States machine and process data
can be not so necessary (parameter Jerk Rate [32.34] set to 0 or to a • TB Thresh Speed 1 [32.43]: thrust bearing first threshold speed,
small value). speed zone 1
Chapter 9 P. 55 • TB Thresh Speed 2 [32.46]: thrust bearing second threshold speed,
Functions NOTE speed zone 2
The value of parameter Jerk Rate [32.34] must be smaller than the 10%
of between all ramp time parameters (both enabled or disabled). 2-Ramps vs. Threshold Frequency function can be disabled setting to 0
both previous parameters.
NOTE
S-Ramp function is not active with at least one of the following functions NOTE
enabled and active: Jog (Flushing), Auto-Cleaning, Anti-Blocking and/or The value of parameter TB Thresh Speed 1 [32.43] must be smaller than
Frost Protection functions. the value of parameter TB Thresh Speed 2 [32.46], otherwise second
Chapter 10 P. 104 zone is skipped.
Fieldbus

9.6 2-RAMPS VS. THRESHOLD FREQUENCIES NOTE

2-Ramps vs. Threshold Frequency function can be used in applications Ramp generator works on speed reference; so, the switch from one speed
where faster ramp times are needed when the pump is starting or zone to another speed zone is detected using speed reference (not speed
Chapter 11 P. 128
stopping (running below a threshold speed) in order to prevent excess feedbacks).
I/0 Configuration
motor wear, in particular of the bearing; for this reason, this function is
also called Thrust Bearing function. NOTE
Chapter 12 P. 145
2-Ramps vs. Threshold Frequencies (Thrust Bearing) ramps, as standard
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments 2-Ramps vs. Threshold Frequency function (Thrust Bearing function) is ramps, do not affect the behavior of the Drive during Ramp Stop and
Annex P. 156 configured setting the following parameters: Quick Stop: in case a stop command or an alarm condition occur, than
• When speed reference is between 0 and TB Thresh Speed 1 [32.43], Ramp Stop ramp or Quick Stop ramp override the 2-Ramps vs. Threshold
then Drive is inside first speed zone and active ramp is defined by the Frequencies (Thrust Bearing) ramps and standard ramps.
following first set of acceleration/deceleration time:
63
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.7 PRESET SPEED Enable cannot be implemented on more than one reference at the same
Scope
The AD1000 makes four different fixed speed values available, time. The selection on the additional speed reference set by parameter
Chapter 2 P. 7 corresponding to parameters Fixed Speed Ref 1 [32.06], Fixed Speed Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04] or on the speed feedforward reference set by
Safety Ref 2 [32.07], Fixed Speed Ref 3 [32.08] and Fixed Speed Ref 4 parameter Speed Feedforward Sel [32.05] is not possible.
[32.09] whose values are expressed in pu.
Chapter 3 P. 8 Digital Potentiometer function modifies the speed reference with increase
Programming overview
The choice of which of the four to apply is made through digital signals (up) or decrease (down) commands. The up and down commands
that can be configured through parameters Cmd 1 Sel Fixed Speed Ref are provided through digital signal. The source of the up command is
Chapter 4 P. 9
[32.10] and Cmd 2 Sel Fixed Speed Ref [32.11] according to the binary determined through parameter DigPot Up Cmd Sel [42.07]; the source
Programming tools
combination contained in Table 9.1. of the down command is determined through parameter DigPot Down
Cmd Sel [42.08].
Chapter 5 P. 16 Table 9
 .1 - Selection of fixed references At every up/down pulse the reference value is increased/decreased by
Programming levels the delta respectively set in parameters DigPot Step Up [42.03] and
and control modes
Status of digital signal selected DigPot Step Down [42.04]. If the up/down commands are maintained
Chapter 6 P. 18
for a period of time longer than the one defined by parameter DigPot
Quick start-up procedure
by parameter Selected value Cmd Delay [42.09], the speed reference, after the first step, is increased/
Chapter 7 decreased following a slope ramp determined by parameter DigPot Up/

9.7 PRESET SPEED - 9.8

P. 21 [32.10] [32.11]
Control mode selection and settings Dw Ramp Time [42.10].
0 0 Fixed Speed Ref 1 [32.06] If up/down commands are simultaneous, reference coming from the
Chapter 8 P. 22
digital potentiometer remain fixed (doesn’t change, not increase and not
States machine and process data
1 0 Fixed Speed Ref 2 [32.07] decrease).
When the up/down command is released, the reference coming from the
Chapter 9 P. 55 1 1 Fixed Speed Ref 3 [32.08] digital potentiometer shall be equal to the current reference value after
Functions the ramp (see item (a) in Figure 9.5), which means that the motor remains
0 1 Fixed Speed Ref 4 [32.09]
at the speed reached when the pushbutton is released.
The reference coming from the digital potentiometer is up limited by the
The status of parameters [32.10] and [32.11] is Off (0) by default, and parameter DigPot Pos Lim [42.05] and down limited by the parameter
choosing the Fixed source the speed reference obtained is the value set in DigPot Neg Lim [42.06].
parameter [32.06]. As default, the function adjusts the speed reference between 0 and 100%
To apply to one of the for speed references (Main, Aux, Add Speed Ref of the maximum speed. It is possible to extend the speed range also to
or Speed Feedforward) a fixed speed reference it is necessary to set the negative values, setting parameter DigPot Neg Range En [42.02] to On.
Chapter 10 P. 104 reference source selection parameters as indicated in paragraph 10.1. Therefore the regulation ranges in the two cases are:
Fieldbus • Speed range 0 ± 100%, if parameter DigPot Neg Range En [42.02]
is set to Off (default value);
9.8 DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER • Speed field ± 100%, if parameter DigPot Neg Range En [42.02]
Digital Potentiometer function is enabled if parameter DigPot Enable is set to On.
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
[42.01] is set to On. This parameter is settable only when the Drive is
stopped. Digital Potentiometer function parameters are available in the
family DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER [42.00].
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Digital Potentiometer function can be enabled on the main speed
Annex P. 156 reference with parameter Main Speed Ref Sel [32.01] set to Digital Pot
or on the auxiliary speed reference with parameter Aux Speed Ref Sel
[32.02] set to Digital Pot.

64
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.8.1 SPEED REFERENCE MEMORIZATION 9.8.2 SPEED REFERENCE TRACKING

Scope
The last speed reference set with the digital potentiometer can be stored. To If the digital potentiometer is enabled on auxiliary speed reference
Chapter 2 P. 7 do this, it is necessary to set parameter DigPot Mem Ref En [42.13] to On. (parameter Aux Speed Ref Sel [32.02]) and the parameter DigPot
Safety When the Stop command reaches the AD1000, the value is stored in Aux-Main Track [42.12] is set to On, it is possible to have the digital
parameter DigPot Mem Ref Value [42.14] (read only) and actuated at potentiometer reference follows the value of main reference.
Chapter 3 P. 8
the following restart. Therefore if the reference source switch over from main reference to
Programming overview
At any time it is possible to set to zero the stored reference from the auxiliary reference, the value of auxiliary reference is the same as the main
digital potentiometer through a digital signal (edge from 0 to 1), that can reference and there are no sharp variations of used reference.
Chapter 4 P. 9
be selected through parameter DigPot Clear Cmd Sel [42.11].
Programming tools

9.8.1 SPEED REFERENCE MEMORIZATION - 9.8.2

Chapter 5 P. 16 Figure 9
 .5 - Connections between commands and feedback for digital
Programming levels
and control modes potentiometer with parameter DigPot Mem Ref En [42.13] set to On
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

65
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure 9
 .6 - Connections between commands and feedback for digital
Scope potentiometer with parameter DigPot Mem Ref En [42.13] set to Off
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

9.8.2 SPEED REFERENCE TRACKING

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

66
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.9 CRITICAL SPEEDS AVOIDANCE 9.10 ANALOG MONITOR

Scope
In some cases it can happen that certain motor rotation speeds bring Analog Monitor function enables to compare up to two analog inputs at
Chapter 2 P. 7 about mechanical resonances that are unpleasant for the user and/or the same time with a settable threshold and a configurable logic.
Safety harmful for the motor and system.
The AD1000 makes a critical speed avoidance function available that prevents Each analog input can be choose between all four analog input available
Chapter 3 P. 8
the upstream ramp speed reference to stop in a band around these. (AI1 and AI2 standard on BASIS board, AI3 and AI4 with optional board)
Programming overview
Please consider that the Speed Feedforward reference is not influenced by this. using respectively the parameter Monitor 1 AI Sel [17.29] and the
parameter Monitor 2 AI Sel [17.30]. The thresholds are set using the
Chapter 4 P. 9
Two different frequencies with the relevant bands can be set. The set parameter Monitor Level 1 [17.31] and the parameter Monitor Level
Programming tools
frequency is avoided in both “forward” and “backward” rotation. 2 [17.32]. The logic used to compare the analog input selected with the
The two parameters Skip Freq 1 [32.29] and Skip Freq 2 [32.31] establish threshold level set is defined using the parameters Monitor 1 Alarm En
Chapter 5 P. 16 the band center frequency expressed in Hz. If set to 0, the function Critical [17.33] and the parameters Monitor 2 Alarm En [17.34].

9.9 CRITICAL SPEEDS AVOIDANCE - 9.10

Programming levels
and control modes
Speed Avoidance associated to the parameter is disabled.
The two parameters Skip Freq Band 1 [32.28] and Skip Freq Band 2 When comparison is true, that means analog input compare with
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
[32.30] establish the respective half-band relevant to avoidance amplitude, threshold respect the logic set, then alarm Mon1Alarm (code 39, bit 6 of
as illustrated in Figure 9.7. Alarm Word 3, AW3.06) and Mon2Alarm (code 40, bit 7 of Alarm Word
Chapter 7 P. 21 If, for instance, parameter Skip Freq 1 [32.29] is set to 40 Hz and 3, AW3.07) become active respectively. The operation to be performed if
Control mode selection and settings parameter Skip Freq Band 1 [32.28] to 5 Hz, any increasing speed these events occur are set by parameter AI Monitor 1 Alarm [36.39] and
Chapter 8 P. 22
reference stops at 35 Hz and would then skip to 45 Hz (vice versa in case parameter AI Monitor 2 Alarm [36.40]. of the family ALARM SETTINGS
States machine and process data
of decreasing reference). Since the avoidance takes place before the ramp, [36.00]. It is possible to select between the following control system
the downstream ramp reference can anyway pass through 40 Hz, but behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also
cannot stop there. possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
Chapter 9 P. 55
In case of band overlapping, the greater of the upper limits and the
Functions
smaller of the lower limits are considered.

Figure 9
 .7 - Critical speeds avoidance function

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

67
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.11 ANALOG COMMAND LOSS Note for the calculation of the following parameters expressed in [%]:
Scope
Analog Command Loss function can be used for all the available analog • AI1 Threshold [17.51], AI2 Threshold [17.52], AI3 Threshold [17.53]
Chapter 2 P. 7 inputs: AI1 and AI2 on BASIS board (±10V, ±20mA), AI3 and AI4 on and AI4 Threshold [17.54]
Safety GIABA input expansion board (±10V, ±20mA). • AI1 Preset Value [17.59], AI2 Preset Value [17.60], AI3 Preset Value
Analog Command Loss function works on analog input, regardless of [17.61] and AI4 Preset Value [17.62]
Chapter 3 P. 8
the fact that the analog input is used as a reference for a regulator (for
Programming overview
example, Process PID or speed PID) or as a feedback of a regulator (for Remember that analog inputs are set using the following [%] parameters:
example, Process PID or speed PID) or as a monitor only. • AI1 Value for 1 pu [17.05], AI2 Value for 1 pu [17.06], AI3 Value for
Chapter 4 P. 9
This function can be used, for example, in order to manage the speed 1 pu [17.07] and AI4 Value for 1 pu [17.08]
Programming tools
command loss when the speed reference comes from an analog input. • AI1 Value for 0 pu [17.09], AI2 Value for 0 pu [17.10], AI3 Value for
Note that this is only a possible use: Analog Command Loss is a general 0 pu [17.11] and AI4 Value for 0 pu [17.12]
Chapter 5 P. 16 purpose function that works on analog inputs, regardless of the use made
Programming levels by other control functions. with particular attention to the type of analog input (for example, 4÷20
and control modes
This function is enabled individually on every analog input, using the [mA] or 0÷10 [V])
Chapter 6

9.11 ANALOG COMMAND LOSS

P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
parameters AI1 Loss [17.43], AI2 Loss [17.44], AI3 Loss [17.45] and AI1
Loss [17.46].
Chapter 7 P. 21 The analog command loss condition occurs when the analog input value
Control mode selection and settings decreases below the corresponding parameter AI1 Threshold [17.51], AI2
Chapter 8 P. 22
Threshold [17.52], AI3 Threshold [17.53] or AI4 Threshold [17.54].
States machine and process data
If an analog command loss condition occurs (for example due to a broken
wire), then the control system reacts with one of three possible response
as defined in parameters AI1 Loss [17.43], AI2 Loss [17.44], AI3 Loss
Chapter 9 P. 55
[17.45] and AI1 Loss [17.46]:
Functions
• No Action: the Analog Command Loss function is not enabled
• Freeze to Last Value: control system elaborates the latest analog
command before loss
• Freeze to Preset Value: control system elaborates the preset analog
command in AI1 Preset Value [17.59], AI2 Preset Value [17.60], AI3
Preset Value [17.61] and AI4 Preset Value [17.62] For example, for an analog input 4÷20 [mA], it is necessary to set
• Prs PID Disable: pick-up value not related to this function • AI1 Value for 1 pu [17.05] set to 100 [%]
(see Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function) • AI1 Value for 0 pu [17.09] set to 20 [%]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Parameters related to Analog Command Loss function are present in in order to have:
family ANALOG INPUTS [17.00]. • 4 [mA] = 20 [%] = 0 [pu]
• 20 [mA] = 100 [%] = 1 [pu]
When analog command loss occurs, then alarm then alarm AI Loss (code
Chapter 11 P. 128
with the consequence that:
41, bit 8 of Alarm Word 3, AW3.08) becomes active. The operation to
I/0 Configuration
be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter AI Loss [36.41] of • 0 [mA] = 0 [%] = -0.25 [pu]
the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between the
Chapter 12 P. 145
following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
Annex P. 156

68
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Same calculations are valid for the following parameters: Limit [36.29] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to
Scope • AI1 Threshold [17.51], AI2 Threshold [17.52], AI3 Threshold [17.53] select between the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning,
Chapter 2 P. 7 and AI4 Threshold [17.54] Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the
Safety • AI1 Preset Value [17.59], AI2 Preset Value [17.60], AI3 Preset Value alarm with a digital output. The alarm UvCtrlLimit is managed even if this
[17.61] and AI4 Preset Value [17.62] function is not enabled.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
So, both the threshold and preset values used in Analog Command Loss If the DC-bus voltage goes below the threshold set through parameter
functions are DC UV Trip Level [12.03], alarm VdcUV (code 11, bit 10 of Alarm Word
Chapter 4 P. 9 • 0 [%] = -0.25 [pu] = (if referred to an analog input 4÷20 [mA]) = 0 [mA] 1, AW1.10) becomes active. It is not possible to select the control system
Programming tools • 20 [%] = 0 [pu] = (if referred to an analog input 4÷20 [mA]) = 4 [mA] behavior: control system intervenes with a Coast stop. The parameter
• 100 [%] = 1 [pu] = (if referred to an analog input 4÷20 [mA]) = 20 [mA] Vdc UV [36.11] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00] is a read only

9.12 VDC UNDERVOLTAGE CONTROL - 9.13

Chapter 5 P. 16 parameter. It is possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
Programming levels Formula to convert per-unit value [pu] in per-cent [%] value with an
and control modes
analog input 4÷20 [mA] set as 4 [mA] = 0 [pu] and 20 [mA] = 1 [pu]: If the Undervoltage Control is active the bit 14 of Status Word 2 is On.
Chapter 6 P. 18
• per-cent value [%] = 80 [%/pu] * per-unit [pu] + 20 [%]
Quick start-up procedure
The Drive stand-by time with no protection intervention depends on the
Chapter 7 P. 21 Example to set a preset value equal to 0.3 [pu] in case of analog input kinetic energy stored by the load.
Control mode selection and settings 4÷20 [mA]:
• per-cent value [%] = 80 [%/pu] * 0.3 [pu] + 20 [%] = 24 [%] + 20 [%] = 44 [%]
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
9.13 VDC OVERVOLTAGE CONTROL
Example to set a threshold value equal to 0.0 [pu] in case of analog input The function keeps the DC-bus voltage below a certain threshold limiting
4÷20 [mA]: the braking torque and dissipating in the motor the power generated
Chapter 9 P. 55 • per-cent value [%] = 80 [%/pu] * 0.0 [pu] + 20 [%] = 20 [%] during braking.
Functions
This function can be enabled by parameter DC-Bus Overvolt Mng [12.01].
AI2 Threshold [17.52] value, for example, to trigger the Analog Command
Loss function active when analog input 2 falls to a value below of 0 [pu] The function regulator intervenes to maintain DC-bus voltage below the
• AI1 Threshold [17.51] set to 20 [%] threshold set through parameter DC OV Control Level [12.04].
If the factory threshold is lower than the threshold set by the user, the
AI2 Preset Value [17.60] value, for example, to preset the analog input 2 value factory threshold is used by the function.
to 0.3 [pu] when the Analog Command Loss function is enabled and active: When threshold has been exceeded, then alarm OVCtrlLim (code 30,
• AI1 Preset Value [17.60] set to 44 [%] bit 13 of Alarm Word 2, AW2.13) becomes active. The operation to be
Chapter 10 P. 104 performed if this event occurs is set by parameter DC OV Control Limit
Fieldbus [36.30] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select
9.12 VDC UNDERVOLTAGE CONTROL between the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast
If a supply voltage decrease occurs, the VDC Undervoltage Control Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm
function reduces the driving torque and therefore the motor speed in with a digital output.
Chapter 11 P. 128
order to maintain the DC-bus voltage constant, recovering energy for the
I/0 Configuration
DC-bus from the load kinetic energy (Ride Through). If the DC-bus voltage goes above the factory threshold, then alarm VdcOV
(code 03, bit 2 of Alarm Word 1, AW1.02) becomes active. It is not
Chapter 12 P. 145
The regulator of this function intervening when DC-bus voltage goes possible to select the control system behavior: control system intervenes
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments below the threshold set with the parameter DC UV Control Limit [12.15]. with a Coast stop. The parameter Vdc OV [36.03] of the family ALARM
Annex P. 156 When this threshold has been exceeded, then alarm UvCtrlLimit (code SETTINGS [36.00] is a read only parameter. It is possible to connect the
29, bit 12 of Alarm Word 2, AW2.12) becomes active. The operation to alarm with a digital output.
be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter DC UV Control

69
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.14 BUS DROP AND GRID WAITING Figure 9

 .8 - Bus Drop with Grid Waiting management
Scope
Bus Drop and Grid Waiting functions can be enabled setting parameter
Chapter 2 P. 7 BDrop GWait Sel [12.30] to Bus Drop or Grid Waiting.
Safety
These functions allow to manage DC-bus voltage drops by turning off the
Chapter 3 P. 8
firing pulses.
Programming overview

If Bus Drop and Grid Waiting functions are disabled (the parameter BDrop
Chapter 4 P. 9
GWait Sel [12.30] is set to Off) and if the DC-bus voltage goes below the

9.14 BUS DROP AND GRID WAITING - 9.14.1 - 9.14.2

Programming tools
threshold set through parameter DC UV Trip Level [12.03], alarm VdcUV
(code 11, bit 10 of Alarm Word 1, AW1.10) becomes active. It is not
Chapter 5 P. 16 possible to select the control system behavior: control system intervenes
Programming levels
and control modes
with a Coast stop. The parameter Vdc UV [36.11] of the family ALARM
SETTINGS [36.00] is a read only parameter. It is possible to connect the
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
alarm with a digital output.

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
9.14.1 BUS DROP
Chapter 8 P. 22 Bus Drop function can be enabled setting parameter BDrop GWait Sel
[12.30] to Bus Drop. If the voltage comes back (see trend a in Figure 9 .8), when its value
States machine and process data
reaches the threshold sum of the parameters VDC to shut-off [12.31] +
If the VDC-bus voltage goes below the parameter threshold VDC to Delta on Vdc Threshold [12.36], after the delay set through parameter
Chapter 9 P. 55
shut-off [12.31], the control turns off the firing pulses. Precharge Delay [12.08], the control disables the precharge circuit and
Functions
Then, if the DC-bus voltage goes above the threshold sum of the unmasks the undervoltage trip. After the time set through the parameter
parameters VDC to shut-off [12.31] + Delta on Vdc Threshold [12.36], Precharge Cont Delay [12.09], the control turns on the firing pulses.
after the delay set through parameter Precharge Cont Delay [12.09], If the voltage doesn’t come back (see trend b in ), after the time set
the control turns on the firing pulses. through the parameter WaitGrid Max Time [12.35], starting from
the instant when the firing pulses are turned off, then then alarm
If the DC-bus voltage goes below the threshold set through parameter GWMaxTime (code 43, bit 9 of Alarm Word 3, AW3.09) becomes active.
DC UV Trip Level [12.03], alarm VdcUV (code 11, bit 10 of Alarm Word The operation to be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter
1, AW1.10) becomes active. It is not possible to select the control system GWMaxTime [36.43] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is
Chapter 10 P. 104 behavior: control system intervenes with a Coast stop. The parameter possible to select between the following control system behaviors: Off,
Fieldbus
Vdc UV [36.11] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00] is a read only Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to
parameter. It is possible to connect the alarm with a digital output. connect the alarm with a digital output.

NOTE
Chapter 11 P. 128
In order to modify the parameter Precharge Delay [12.08] and Precharge
I/0 Configuration 9.14.2 GRID WAITING
Grid Waiting function can be enabled setting parameter BDrop GWait Cont Delay [12.09], the user must consider also the effect on the
Sel [12.30] to Grid Waiting. precharge circuit (see paragraph 9.26).
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting If the VDC-bus voltage goes below the parameter threshold VDC to shut-
instruments
off [12.31], the control turns off the firing pulses. If the DC-bus voltage
Annex P. 156 continues to decrease and goes below the parameter threshold UV-Off
Threshold [12.33], the control masks the undervoltage trip and closes the
precharge circuit.

70
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 NOTE 9.16 LOSS OF OUTPUT PHASE/OUTPUT

Scope The threshold set to the parameter VDC to shut-off [12.31] must be greater SHORT CIRCUIT
Chapter 2 P. 7 than the threshold set through parameter UV-Off Threshold [12.33]. The AD1000 provides two parameters for management the loss of an
Safety The threshold set to the parameter UV-Off Threshold [12.33] must be output phase or output short circuit:
greater than the undervoltage trip threshold.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Earth Fault Protection [06.29] to enable this function and
Programming overview
NOTE Earth Fault Threshold [06.30] to establish the threshold beyond which
If the DC-bus voltage drop happens with the Drive in Ready status, the the protection shall intervene.
Chapter 4 P. 9 Grid Waiting function doesn’t work; the undervoltage trip is anyway
Programming tools active. If loss of output phase or output short circuit occur, then alarm Earth (code
It is possible to have the signal of the software trip GWMaxTime on a 06, bit 5 of Alarm Word 1, AW1.05) becomes active. It is not possible to select
Chapter 5 P. 16 digital output through a proper selection. the control system behavior: control system intervenes with a Coast stop. The
Programming levels
and control modes parameter Earth [36.06] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00] is a read
Chapter 6 only parameter. It is possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
P. 18
9.15 FLY START
Quick start-up procedure
Fly Start function can be enabled setting the parameter FlyStart En
Chapter 7 P. 21 [24.05] to On.

9.15 FLY START - 9.16

Control mode selection and settings Fly Start function allows to restart the run of the motor that is yet not stopped.
Chapter 8 P. 22
When the motor start-up the control algorithm estimates the actual
States machine and process data
frequency of the load and then it switch over to OPERATION ENABLED
status and begins the tracking of speed reference.
Chapter 9 P. 55 The parameter FlyStart Current Error [24.06] represents the current error
Functions value below which the speed control is considered to be “On-hook”.

When threshold has been exceeded, then alarm FlyStartEr (code 33, bit 0
of Alarm Word 3, AW3.00) becomes active. The operation to be performed
if this event occurs is set by parameter Fly Start Error [36.33] of the family
ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between the following
control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp
Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

71
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.17 FLUX UP Figure 9

 .9 - Flux up
Scope
The AD1000 makes a function available for motor fluxing in order to obtain a
Chapter 2 P. 7 start with maximum torque available and/or simultaneously with other events
Safety (release of mechanical brake, etc.).
Chapter 3 P. 8
This function modifies the Drive Start mode and its operation is managed by
Programming overview
the parameters of family START MODE [33.00].

Chapter 4 P. 9
Parameter Flux-up Time [33.02] imposes a constant magnetization time
Programming tools
(with a current equal to rated magnetizing current) from the start command
if parameter Start mode [33.01] is set to Flux-Up Time. Through parameter
Chapter 5 P. 16 Flux-up Timeout [33.03] it is possible to set a maximum time expressed
Programming levels
and control modes
in seconds beyond which the AD1000 switches over to alarm if the fluxing
operation is not finished.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
When timeout has been exceeded, then alarm NoFlux (code 22, bit 5 of
Chapter 7 P. 21 Alarm Word 2, AW2.05) becomes active. The operation to be performed if
Control mode selection and settings this event occurs is set by parameter Fluxup Timeout [36.22] of the family
Chapter 8 P. 22
ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between the following

9.17 FLUX UP
States machine and process data
control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp
Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.

Chapter 9 P. 55
The parameter Flux Cmd Sel [33.04] offers the following possibilities for
Functions
the fluxing mode:
Off: fluxing function disabled. Fluxing operation starting from the Start
command with current equal to rated magnetizing current.
On: fluxing function enabled permanently. The fluxing command is
always active.
Digital Signals: the fluxing command is provided through the selected digital
signal (digital input, configurable bit of CW1, dedicated bit of CW2).
When the fluxing signal is On, at Run command arrival a current is applied
Chapter 10 P. 104 equal to the one expressed by parameter Flux Cmd Current [33.05] for
Fieldbus a time equal to fluxing command; if Start Mode [33.01] is set to Flux-Up
Time and fluxing command is released before Flux-up Time [33.02], then
after the fluxing command release the current is applied equal to the rated
magnetizing current up to Flux-up Tim [33.02]; if Start Mode [33.01] is
Chapter 11 P. 128
set to Flux-Up Time and if fluxing command is released after Flux-up Time
I/0 Configuration
[33.02], then Drive starts; if Start Mode [33.01] is set to Auto, then after the
fluxing command release the Drive starts.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments The function time chart is shown in Figure 9.9.
Annex P. 156

72
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.18 TORQUE LIMITS CONTROL Through the parameter Speed Deviation Time [32.25] is entered the
Scope
The AD1000 makes four set of fixed positive and negative torque limits minimum time for which the Speed Deviation condition shall last before a
Chapter 2 P. 7 available: Pos Torque Limit 1 [22.01], Neg Torque Limit 1 [22.02], signaling and/or intervention occurs.
Safety Pos Torque Limit 2 [22.03], Neg Torque Limit 2 [22.04], Pos Torque Limit
3 [22.22], Neg Torque Limit 3 [22.23], Pos Torque Limit 4 [22.24], Figure 9
 .10 - Speed Deviation
Chapter 3 P. 8
Neg Torque Limit 4 [22.25] that can be selected with bit 7 of Command
Programming overview
Word 2 and bit 8 of Command Word 4. The source of the selection signal
of the set of limits being used can be set from parameter Cmd 1 Torque
Chapter 4 P. 9
Limit Set [22.05] and Cmd 2 Torque Limit Set [22.26].
Programming tools

It is possible to impose dynamic torque limits. The source of this dynamic

Chapter 5 P. 16 limits must be set through parameters Pos Torque Limit Set [22.08] and
Neg Torque Limit Set [22.09].

9.18 TORQUE LIMITS CONTROL - 9.19

Programming levels
and control modes
This dynamic limit is anyway saturated with respect to the fixed positive and
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
negative torque limits chosen by the operator.

Chapter 7 P. 21 Parameter Torque Limit Type [22.06] allows choosing between:

Control mode selection and settings Pos/Neg: management of the current fixed torque limit set based only on
Chapter 8 P. 22
its sign (default);
States machine and process data
Motor/Gen: management of the current User torque limit set based on the
Drive operating quadrant.
The error threshold between speed feedback and speed reference to
Chapter 9 P. 55
With this latter selection and fixed limit sets being equal (for instance Set 1), establish if you are under Speed Deviation conditions is given by parameter
Functions
there are 2 possible situations, managed in an entirely automatic way: Settling Band [32.27]. When the error is within this threshold and
When the load operates from motor (working quadrants I and III) limits Pos remains there for a period of time longer than the one set in parameter
Torque Limit 1 [22.01] and Neg Torque Limit 1 [22.02] are applied, as Settling Time [32.26] you consider that the speed reached corresponds
entered by the user; to the one set by the reference. In this case bit 8 is set of Status Word 1.
When the load operates from generator (working quadrants II and IV) limits
Pos Torque Limit 1 [22.01] as absolute positive limit and Neg Torque Figure 9
 .11 - Settling Time
Limit 1 [22.02] as absolute negative limit are applied.
It is also possible to set a second order filter on the torque reference with a
Chapter 10 P. 104 bandwith that can be selected from parameter Torque Ref Filter BW [22.07].
Fieldbus

9.19 SPEED DEVIATION

Chapter 11 P. 128
It is possible to set a filter for management of the maximum speed error
I/0 Configuration
alarm. When speed error has been exceeded, then alarm SpeedDev (code
24, bit 7 of Alarm Word 2, AW2.07) becomes active. The operation to be
Chapter 12 P. 145
performed if this event occurs is set by parameter DC OV Speed Deviation
Protections and troubleshooting [36.24] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select
instruments
between the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop,
Annex P. 156 Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a
digital output.

73
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.20 UNDERLOAD If parameters Base Voltage [24.01] and Base Freq / Rated Freq [24.02]
Scope
Underload function can be enabled setting the parameter Underload are both greater than parameters Rated Voltage [02.03] and Rated Freq
Chapter 2 P. 7 Enable [35.10] to On. This parameter is settable only when the Drive [02.06] respectively, the characteristic corresponds to a polygonal chain
Safety is stopped. Underload function parameters are available in the family reaching point (Rated Freq [02.06], Rated Voltage [02.03]) and then
MOTOR UNDER/OVERLOAD [35.00]. point
Chapter 3 P. 8 (Base Freq / Rated Freq [24.02], Base Voltage [24.01]) as shown in the
Programming overview
Underload function permits to detect an underload condition. Typically, following figures.
this feature is used on pumps that are required to maintain a minimum
Chapter 4 P. 9
flow or load level for lubrication requirements. Figure 9
 .12 – Standard V/f characteristic
Programming tools

The parameter Underload Level [35.11] is used to set a percent of the

Chapter 5 P. 16 motor nominal current defined by the parameter Rated Current [02.04]
Programming levels
and control modes
in order to define a threshold for the underload condition detection.
The formula used :
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
• if (feedback stator current / Rated Current [02.04]) * 100 is lower than
the parameter Underload Level [35.11] for a time longer than the time
Chapter 7

9.20 UNDERLOAD - 9.21

P. 21 defined by the parameter Underload Time [35.12]
Control mode selection and settings • then an underload alarm is generated, defined by the parameter
Chapter 8 P. 22
Underload [36.21]
States machine and process data
When underload condition occurs, then alarm Underload (code 21,
bit 4 of Alarm Word 2, AW2.04) becomes active. The operation to be
Chapter 9 P. 55
performed if this event occurs is set by parameter Underload [36.21] of
Functions
the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between the
following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop
or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.

9.21 ENERGY OPTIMIZATION

Energy Optimization function can be enabled setting parameters V/f
Ratio 1/3 Point [24.09] and V/f Ratio 2/3 Point [24.10] to value
Chapter 10 P. 104 different from the default. Energy Optimization function parameter are
Fieldbus
available in the family V/f CONTROL [24.00].

Energy Optimization function ensures high operating efficiency by

Chapter 11 P. 128
reducing motor voltage when the load requirements are lower than the
I/0 Configuration
rated values (torque lower than 100%). Motor losses are minimized and
the power factor is maintained at optimal value.
Energy Optimization function is integrated inside the standard V/f
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting characteristic management: parameters Base Voltage [24.01] and Base
instruments Frequency [24.02] determine the slope of the V/Hz line.
Annex P. 156

74
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Energy Optimization parameters V/f Ratio 1/3 Point [24.09] and V/f Ratio
Scope 2/3 Point [24.10] work reducing the flux value in the polygonal chain.
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Figure 9
 .13 – V/f characteristic modified by Energy Optimization function

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

9.21 ENERGY OPTIMIZATION

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

75
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.22 VOLTAGE BOOST A calculation procedure of the three above mentioned parameters is also
Scope
The AD1000 allows setting a gain to be applied to the voltage reference available, starting from the motor nameplate data without the execution
Chapter 2 P. 7 of the Vector V/f control to compensate for the resistive drop on the motor of a real test on the motor. To activate such procedure set parameter
Safety stator at low speed. Such gain is expressed in percentage and corresponds Locked-Rotor ID [07.01] on “Preset from equivalent circuit data”. The
to parameter Boost Gain [24.03]. execution of the procedure shall take place immediately (with no need
Chapter 3 P. 8
The default value is 80% and allows the reference to pass unaltered for the Run command) and, also in this case, the existing values shall be
Programming overview
through this function. overwritten in parameters Voltage Drop Over Ls [07.02], Voltage Drop
Over Rs [07.03] and Dead Time Comp [07.04].
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
9.23 MOTOR ID
This is a procedure performed off-line by the operator for identifying the 9.23.2 INERTIA ID

9.22 VOLTAGE BOOST - 9.23 - 9.23.1 - 9.23.2

Chapter 5 P. 16 main parameters in motor. The Inertia ID test calculation of the time constant relevant to the motor
Programming levels
and control modes It consists of two tests that can be activated independently: Motor ID 1 moment of inertia. It is an acceleration test that can be performed off-
and Inertia ID. The first one is static, the second takes place with rotating line by the operator to estimate inertia of the whole motor+load system,
Chapter 6 P. 18
managed by the parameters of family INERTIA ID [10.00].
Quick start-up procedure
motor. It is possible to know the status of procedures through process
variable Test Status [75.20], common to all tests.
Chapter 7 P. 21 During the test external reference or additional torque should not be The enable parameter is Inertia Id Test [10.01]. It is necessary to set the
Control mode selection and settings
applied to the motor. start and stop speed of the test through parameter Test Start Speed
For more information see paragraph 6.2. [10.02] and parameter Test Stop Speed [10.03].
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
The value calculated at the end of the test is saved in parameter Inertia
9.23.1 MOTOR ID 1 Time Constant [10.03] and overwrites the previous datum.
Chapter 9 P. 55
Motor ID 1 is managed by the parameters of family Motor ID 1 [07.00].
Functions
Parameter Locked-Rotor ID [07.01] enables the procedure that is started
after the arrival of the Run command. Calculated data overwrite those
present in parameters Voltage Drop Over Ls [07.02], Voltage Drop
Over Rs [07.03] and Dead Time Comp [07.04].

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

76
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.24 MULTIPLE GAINS 9.25 REGULATOR AUTOTUNING

Scope
The AD1000 makes multiple sets of speed regulator gains and ramps This function exploits the parameters calculated in the Motor ID
Chapter 2 P. 7 available, in order to allow the user to select every time the one most procedures and present in the relevant families to automatically set the
Safety appropriate to the function to be achieved. gains of the speed regulator.
The parameters are used:
Chapter 3 P. 8
For the speed regulator four sets of proportional and integrative gains for speed regulator autotuning only if parameter Speed Ctrl Autotune
Programming overview
are available. The four gains of the proportional parts are stored in [21.01] is set to On.
parameters Proportional Gain 1 [21.05], Proportional Gain 2 [21.07],
Chapter 4 P. 9
Proportional Gain 3 [21.09] and Proportional Gain 4 [21.11], while the The desired band for the regulation loop is set in parameter Speed Ctrl
Programming tools
time constants of the integrative parts correspond to parameters Integral Bandwidth [21.02]. Calculated parameters do not overwrite the gains
Time 1 [21.06], Integral Time 2 [21.08], Integral Time 3 [21.10] and of the regulator set by the user, but replace them only when the relevant
Chapter 5 P. 16 Integral Time 4 [21.12]. enable parameter is set to On. Returning the latter to Off, the gains
Programming levels
and control modes
previously set by the user are available again.
The selection among these four sets comes from digital signals. The source
Chapter 6 P. 18
setting is delegated to parameters Cmd 1 Gain Set Sel [21.03] and Cmd

9.24 MULTIPLE GAINS - 9.25

Quick start-up procedure
2 Gain Set Sel [21.04].
Chapter 7 P. 21 The selection is performed as shown in the Table 9 .2.
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
Table 9
 .2 - Selection of the speed regulator gains set
States machine and process data
Status of digital signal selected
by parameter Selected value
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
[21.04] [21.03]

0 0 Set 1 [21.05-21.06]

0 1 Set 2 [21.07-21.08]

1 0 Set 3 [21.09-21.10]

1 1 Set 4 [21.11-21.12]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

77
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.26 PRECHARGE MANAGEMENT Figure 9

 .14 – Precharge sequence
Scope
The AD1000 allows managing the Drive precharge phase in case the latter
Chapter 2 P. 7 is performed internally.
Safety
The precharge is performed on READY TO SWITCH-ON status.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
After the precharge start command StartPrc, the AD1000 waits for a
time equal to the parameter Precharge Delay [12.08]. At the end, the
Chapter 4 P. 9
DC-bus voltage shall exceed the threshold defined by the parameter DC
Programming tools
Precharge Level [12.07], normally set to a value between 80% and 90%
of rated voltage (default value 80%).
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
If the condition is not met, then alarm PrcTimeout (code 08, bit 7 of Alarm
Word 1, AW1.07) becomes active. It is not possible to select the control

9.26 PRECHARGE MANAGEMENT

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
system behavior: control system intervenes with a Coast stop. The parameter
Prc Timeout [36.08] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00] is a read only
Chapter 7 P. 21 parameter. It is possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
Control mode selection and settings If after the Precharge Delay [12.08] the DC-bus voltage is higher than DC
Chapter 8 P. 22
Precharge Level [12.07] and lower than DC OV Control Limit [12.16], the
States machine and process data
AD1000 gives the precharge end command (bypass) and waits for a time
equal to the parameter Precharge Cont Delay [12.09]. When this period of NOTE
time has elapsed, the AD1000 checks that the bypass-accomplished feedback Parameters Precharge Delay [12.08] and Precharge Cont Delay [12.09] are
Chapter 9 P. 55
has arrived, to recognize that the precharge phase has terminated. also used in the functions Bus Drop and Grid Waiting (see paragraph 9.14).
Functions

The parameter DC UV Trip Level [12.03] defines a threshold, set to a

value below the threshold defined by the parameter DC Precharge Level
[12.07], used to generate the alarm VdcUV (code 11, bit 10 of Alarm
Word 1, AW1.10). It is not possible to select the control system behavior:
control system intervenes with a Coast stop. The parameter Vdc UV
[36.11] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00] is a read only parameter.
It is possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus The threshold defined by the parameter DC UV Trip Level [12.03] shall
be considered lower by at least 75% than the rated voltage value (default
value 70%).
Chapter 11 P. 128
Precharge start is done with contactor CTLRM.
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

78
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.27 AUTO ON/OFF After the speed reference becomes lower than the Auto OnOff Stop
Scope
Auto On/Off function can be enabled setting the parameter Auto OnOff Thresh [33.22], the stop of the Drive can be delayed by a time specified in
Chapter 2 P. 7 Enable [33.21] to On. This parameter is settable only when the Drive the parameter Auto OnOff Start Delay [33.25].
Safety is stopped. Auto On/Off function parameters are available in the family
START/STOP MODE [33.00]. NOTE
Chapter 3 P. 8 The parameter Auto OnOff Stop Thresh [33.22] must be lower than the
Programming overview
In order to use this function, an a­ nalog input must be set as the main speed set into the parameter Auto OnOff Start Thresh [33.23]. Trying to set
source for the speed reference. Auto On/Off function allows the Drive to the parameter Auto OnOff Stop Thresh [33.22] greater than the parameter
Chapter 4 P. 9
be started if the main speed reference from an analog input is greater Auto OnOff Start Thresh [33.23], than Auto OnOff Stop Thresh [33.22]
Programming tools
than a predefined threshold, set using the parameter Auto OnOff Start is automatically limited to Auto OnOff Start Thresh [33.23].
Thresh [33.23], and allows the Drive to be stopped if the main speed
Chapter 5 P. 16 reference is lower than a predefined threshold, set using the parameter WARNING
Programming levels Auto OnOff Stop Thresh [33.22]. With Auto On/Off function enabled and Start command active (set to On),
and control modes
the Drive can automatically restart the machine without the need of any
Chapter 6 P. 18 other command.
Quick start-up procedure
When the main speed reference becomes lower than the parameter Auto
OnOff Stop Thresh [33.22], the Drive is stopped and set in Sleep Mode.
Chapter 7 P. 21 The Drive restarts if the main speed reference becomes greater than the WARNING
If Auto On/Off function is disabled when Drive is in Sleep Mode, the Drive

9.27 AUTO ON/OFF

Control mode selection and settings parameter Auto OnOff Start Thresh [33.23] or if one of the following
can automatically restart the machine without the need of any other
Chapter 8 enabled functions become active: Frost Protection, Anti-Blocking and/or
P. 22 command.
States machine and process data
Jog (Flushing); the Drive resets Sleep Mode, restarts and sets Run state.
WARNING
Auto On/Off function operates in AND logic with the Start command used
Chapter 9 P. 55
for normal operation; Auto On/Off function is active only if the following
With Auto On/Off function enable and Drive is in Sleep Mode, if speed
Functions reference switch from main speed reference to auxiliary speed reference,
conditions are satisfied:
the Drive can automatically restart the machine without the need of any
• Auto On/Off function is enabled: the parameter Auto OnOff Enable
other command.
[33.21] is set to On
• Speed reference set from main speed reference WARNING
• Speed reference comes from an analog input The user is responsible for enabling of this function according to safety
rules according to safety rules. Nidec ASI S.p.A. declaims any liability due
Auto On/Off function doesn’t work on auxiliary speed reference; anyway, auxiliary to inappropriate use of this function. Make sure that the automatic restart
speed reference can still be connected and used with other speed reference. of the machine will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.
Chapter 10 P. 104 The values of parameters Auto OnOff Stop Thresh [33.22] and Auto OnOff Refer to standards IEC 60204-1.
Fieldbus Start Thresh [33.23] are entered in pu of the maximum input voltage (10 V)
or current (20 mA) accepted by analog input. The speed that corresponds to NOTE
parameters Auto OnOff Stop Thresh [33.22] and Auto OnOff Start Thresh It is not possible set the parameter Auto OnOff Enable [33.21] to On if
[33.23] must be read on the same scale defined for the analog input that the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop.
Chapter 11 P. 128
convert the input V or mA signal into a frequency or speed reference. In case the operator tries to set the parameter Auto OnOff Enable
I/0 Configuration
[33.21] to On when HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/
After the speed reference becomes greater than the Auto OnOff Start Stop, the error DSPParEr is generated and the Auto OnOff Enable
Chapter 12 P. 145
Thresh [33.23], the start of the Drive can be delayed by a time specified
Protections and troubleshooting [33.21] is automatically reset to Off.
instruments in the parameter Auto OnOff Start Delay [33.25].
Annex P. 156

79
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.28 AUTO RESET AND RESTART WARNING

Scope
Auto Reset and Restart function can be enabled setting the parameter With Auto Reset and Restart function enabled and Start command active
Chapter 2 P. 7 Auto Reset Enable [34.01] to On. This parameter is settable only when (set to On), the Drive can automatically restart the machine without the
Safety the Drive is stopped. Auto Reset and Restart function parameters are need of any other command (the Drive automatically attempts to reset,
available in the family AUTORESET [34.00]. precharge and restart trying to go in Run state).
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
When a fault occurs, if the Auto Reset and Restart function is enabled for WARNING
that fault, the Drive attempts to reset, precharge and start; Drive performs With Auto Reset and Restart function enabled and Start command active
Chapter 4 P. 9 all these actions after the time selected by means of the parameter Auto (set to On), if the operator resets a trip with manual command (for
Programming tools
Reset Time [34.02] has elapsed. example, by pressing the Reset button on the DVM tool or on the keypad),
If one of the following conditions occur (or a combination of them): the Drive immediately restarts the machine without the need of any other
Chapter 5 P. 16 • the attempt to reset the Drive fails command.
Programming levels
and control modes
• the attempt to reset the Drive successes but after that the same
or another fault occurs WARNING
Chapter 6

9.28 AUTO RESET AND RESTART

P. 18 With Auto Reset and Restart function set to On (enabled) when Drive
for a number of time equal to that specified by use of parameter Auto
Quick start-up procedure
Reset Attempt [34.03], the Drive is shut down and a manual reset is in Fault state and Start command active (set to On), the Drive can
Chapter 7 P. 21 required. automatically restart the machine without the need of any other command
Control mode selection and settings The Drive should operate at least for Reset Memory Time [34.04] (the Drive automatically attempts to reset, precharge and restart trying to
without a fault before the auto reset attempt counter is set back to 0. go in Run state).
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data WARNING
Auto Reset and Restart function allows automatic resetting of a trip and
The user is responsible for enabling of this function according to safety
restarting of the Drive. When this function is enabled, any type of trip
Chapter 9 P. 55 can be recovered, except some critical trips that must be selected by the
rules. Nidec ASI S.p.A. declaims any liability due to inappropriate use of
Functions this function. Make sure that the automatic restart of the machine will not
following parameters:
cause physical injury and/or damage equipment. Refer to standards IEC
• Reset Desaturation [34.05] (related to alarm IGBTDesat defined
60204-1.
by parameter IGBT Desat [36.04])
• Reset IOC [34.06] (related to alarm OverCur defined by parameter
NOTE
OverCur [36.07]) It is not possible set the parameter Auto Reset Enable [34.01] to On if
• Reset Overvoltage [34.07] (related to alarm VdcOV defined the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop.
by parameter Vdc OV [36.03]) In case the operator tries to set the parameter Auto Reset Enable [34.01]
• Reset Undervoltage [34.08] (related to alarm PrcTimeout defined to On when HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop,
Chapter 10 P. 104 by parameter Vdc UV [36.11]) the error DSPParEr is generated and the Auto Reset Enable [34.01] is
Fieldbus • Reset Therm. Ovld [34.09] (related to alarm OverHeat defined automatically reset to Off.
by parameter Overheat [36.05])
NOTE
NOTE Auto Reset and Restart function has a different behavior if Drive is in Man mode
Chapter 11 P. 128
The parameter Reset Memory Time [34.04] must be bigger than the (see HOA – Hand/Off/Auto function). Auto reset is still true, but not restart.
I/0 Configuration
parameter Auto Reset Time [34.02], otherwise the Drive doesn’t attempt
to reset, precharge and restart.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

80
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.29 MOTOR SWITCH 9.30 JOG (FLUSHING)

Scope
Motor Switch function can be enabled setting the parameter Motor Jog (Flushing) function can be enabled setting the parameter Jog En
Chapter 2 P. 7 Switch Enable [33.50]. This parameter is settable only when the Drive [41.01] to On. Jog (Flushing) function parameters are available in the
Safety is stopped. Motor Switch function parameters are available in the family family JOG [41.00].
START/STOP MODE [33.00].
Chapter 3 P. 8
The Jog (Flushing) function allows the user to start the motor with a pre-
Programming overview
Motor Switch function is typically used if there is a switch between the set speed reference. Two preset speeds are available; dedicated parameters
Drive and the motor. This switch is used to make sure that an electrical are available for each set:
Chapter 4 P. 9
circuit can be completely de-energized from the motor for service and/or • Jog 1 Cmd Sel [41.06]: digital signal to select Jog (Flushing) speed 1 preset
Programming tools
maintenance. • Jog 1 Speed Ref [41.02]: Jog (Flushing) speed 1 preset
• Jog Time 1 [41.04]: Jog (Flushing) ramp up and down time used
Chapter 5 P. 16 The Drive uses a dedicated digital input set using the parameter Motor for speed 1 preset, defined as the time to accelerate the Drive from 0 to
Programming levels
and control modes
Switch Cmd Sel [33.51]: an auxiliary contact of the switch is used as maximum speed and tom decelerate the Drive from maximum speed to 0
digital input of the Drive to monitor the state of the switch and perform • Jog 2 Cmd Sel [41.07]: digital signal to select Jog (Flushing) speed 2 preset
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
Motor Switch function. • Jog 2 Speed Ref [41.03]: Jog (Flushing) speed 2 preset

9.29 MOTOR SWITCH - 9.30

When Motor Switch function is enabled and the motor switch is open • Jog Time 2 [41.05]: Jog (Flushing) ramp up and down time used for
Chapter 7 P. 21 to disconnect the running motor, the Drive detects the loss of the motor speed 2 preset, defined as the time to accelerate the Drive from 0 to
Control mode selection and settings without tripping, is stopped and set in Hard Sleep Mode and alarm maximum speed and tom decelerate the Drive from maximum speed to 0
Chapter 8 P. 22
MotorSwitch (code 57, bit 8 of Alarm Word 4, AW4.08) becomes active.
States machine and process data
The operation to be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter The speed reached by the motor when commanded by a Jog (Flushing)
Motor Switch [36.57] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is function is set in parameters Jog 1 Speed Ref [41.02] and Jog 2 Speed
possible to select between the following control system behaviors: Off, Ref [41.03]. The reaching of this reference takes place with a ramp
Chapter 9 P. 55
Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to defined by parameters Jog Time 1 [41.04] and Jog Time 2 [41.05],
Functions
connect the alarm with a digital output. expressing the duration in seconds of the ramp from 0 to the maximum
speed. Such ramp is also used in the deceleration phase.
After motor service and/or maintenance is completed, the switch is
reclosed and the motor is reconnected: the Drive detects the motor The Jog command is activate with bit 8 (Jog 1) or bit 9 (Jog 2) of CW1.
connection and runs the motor in the same normal operation as before These bits are associated with digital signal set through parameters Jog
the service and/or maintenance operation. The Drive resets Hard Sleep 1 Cmd Sel [41.06] and Jog 2 Cmd Sel [41.07] respectively. When the
Mode, restarts and set Run state. selected signal is set to On, the Drive starts with the speed reference of
the selected Jog (Flushing).
Chapter 10 P. 104 WARNING If the two commands Jog 1 and Jog 2 are given simultaneously, both
Fieldbus Do not use Jog (Flushing) function with Motor Switch enabled and active, functions are inhibited until such situation has decayed.
otherwise the Drive can trip.
The Jog (Flushing) function is active only if the following conditions are
NOTE satisfied:
Chapter 11 P. 128
It is not possible set the parameter Motor Switch Enable [33.50] to On if • Jog (Flushing) function is enabled: the parameter Jog En [41.01] is set to On
I/0 Configuration
the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop. • The Drive is in Stop state or in Sleep Mode
In case the operator tries to set the parameter Motor Switch Enable • The two Jog (Flushing) commands are not activated simultaneously
Chapter 12 P. 145
[33.50] to On when HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Stop, the error DSPParEr is generated and the Motor Switch Enable
Annex P. 156 [33.50] is automatically reset to Off.

81
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 The Start command has no effect if applied during execution of the Jog WARNING
Scope (Flushing) functions. If during a Jog (Flushing) sequence the other Jog Do not use Jog (Flushing) function with Motor Switch enabled and active,
Chapter 2 P. 7 (Flushing) reference is commanded as well, the latter shall be ignored and otherwise the Drive can trip.
Safety the Drive shall maintain the first Jog reference activated.

Chapter 3 P. 8 The current Jog (Flushing) reference sign can be inverted with the usual 9.31 ANTI-BLOCKING
Programming overview
Reverse command (CW 2.03) applicable for instance through Digital Input 2 Anti-Blocking function can be enabled setting the parameter
(if parameter DI Run/Fw/Rv Connections [31.10] has been properly set). AntiBlocking Enable [33.60] to On. This parameter is settable only when
Chapter 4 P. 9 the Drive is stopped. Anti-Blocking function parameters are available in the
Programming tools During Jog (Flushing) operations, references, Aux and Add Speed Ref family START/STOP MODE [33.00].
(pre- and post-ramp) are not considered, and the same goes for any
Chapter 5 P. 16 modifications produced by macro-functions present and enabled before the Anti-Blocking function is designed to protect the pump from blocking:
Programming levels Ramp function (Critical Speed Avoidance, Digital Potentiometer, etc.). if the Drive is in Sleep Mode for too long, the Drive periodically and
and control modes
The macro-functions applied after ramp, if enabled, and torque additions, automatically starts the pump at a constant speed.
Chapter 6 P. 18
remain active and shall be suitably managed by plant automation during Jog.
Quick start-up procedure
If the Drive is in Sleep Mode for a time longer than the parameter
Chapter 7 P. 21 Figure 9
 .15 - Activation of Jog functions AntiBlocking Runtime [33.62], the Drive starts the pump at a constant

9.31 ANTI-BLOCKING
Control mode selection and settings speed defined by the parameter AntiBlocking Speed Ref [33.63] for a
time equal to the parameter AntiBlocking Interval [33.61]. When Anti-
Chapter 8 P. 22
Blocking function cycle is finished, the Drive automatically stops and set
States machine and process data
again in Sleep Mode.

Chapter 9 P. 55 WARNING
Functions With Anti-Blocking function active, the Drive resets Sleep Mode (due to
Motor Pause, Auto On/Off, Well Draw Down Control and/or Low City or
Low Suction Inlet pressure), restarts and set Run state.

WARNING
The user is responsible for enabling of this function according to safety
rules. Nidec ASI S.p.A. declaims any liability due to inappropriate use of
this function. Make sure that the automatic restart of the machine will not
Chapter 10 P. 104 cause physical injury and/or damage equipment. Refer to standards IEC
Fieldbus 60204-1.
WARNING
Jog (Flushing) function overrides command and reference; with Jog
(Flushing) function active, the Drive can start from Stop state and Sleep
Chapter 11 P. 128
Mode; once Drive is started (Run state), the other functions are locked,
I/0 Configuration
until Jog (Flushing) finishes (Stop state).

Chapter 12 P. 145
WARNING
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments With Jog (Flushing) function active, the Drive resets Sleep Mode (due to
Annex P. 156 Motor Pause, Auto On/Off, Well Draw Down Control and/or Low City or
Low Suction Inlet pressure), restarts and set Run state.

82
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.32 AUTO-CLEANING The number of cycles for Auto-Cleaning procedure is defined by the
Scope
Auto-Cleaning function can be enabled setting the parameter AutoClean parameter AutoClean Cycles Number [33.75].
Chapter 2 P. 7 Enable [33.70] to a value different from Off. This parameter is settable
Safety only when the Drive is stopped. Auto-Cleaning function parameters are NOTE
available in the family START/STOP MODE [33.00]. Parameter AutoClean Forward Speed [33.76] and parameter AutoClean
Chapter 3 P. 8
Auto-Cleaning function is designed to free the pump blade of debris in Reverse Time [33.79] must be lower in absolute value than parameter
Programming overview
waste water applications so that the pump do not risk to damage and can Max Pos Ref [32.22] and parameter Max Neg Ref [32.23] respectively.
work properly.
Chapter 4 P. 9
Auto-Cleaning function can be enabled in 4 different modes:
Programming tools
• Parameter AutoClean Enable [33.70] set to Digital Input: Auto-Cleaning 9.33 FROST PROTECTION
cycles activation comes from digital input defined using the parameter Frost Protection function can be enabled and configured (analog input
Chapter 5 P. 16 AutoClean Cmd Sel [33.71] selection) setting the parameter Frost Prot. Enable [33.30]. This parameter
Programming levels
and control modes
• Parameter AutoClean Enable [33.70] set to Current Threshold: is settable only when the Drive is stopped. Frost Protection function
Auto-Cleaning cycles activation is determined by the comparison of parameters are available in the family START/STOP MODE [33.00].
Chapter 6 P. 18
Frost Protection function is designed to protect the pump from frost damages:
the actual current with a threshold current defined by the parameter

9.32 AUTO-CLEANING - 9.33

Quick start-up procedure
AutoClean Curr Thres [33.72]; if actual current is bigger than if the Drive is in Sleep Mode and the measured temperature of the pump or
Chapter 7 P. 21 parameter AutoClean Curr Thres [33.72] for a time longer parameter of other monitored element of the hydraulic circuit is below a threshold, the
Control mode selection and settings AutoClean Curr Delay [33.73], then Auto-Clean cycles are activated Drive automatically starts the pump at a constant speed. If the Drive is in Sleep
and alarm AutoClnCur (code 61, bit 12 of Alarm Word 4, AW4.12) Mode and the measured temperature goes below the parameter Frost Prot.
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
become active; the operation to be performed if this event occurs is set Low Temp. [33.31], the Drive starts the pump at a constant speed defined by
by parameter AutoClean Curr Thres [36.61] of the family ALARM the parameter Frost Prot. Speed Ref [33.33] and alarm FrostProt (code 54,
SETTINGS [36.00]; it is possible to select between the following control bit 5 of Alarm Word 4, AW4.05) becomes active.
Chapter 9 P. 55
system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It The operation to be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter
Functions
is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output Frost Protection [36.54] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is
• Parameter AutoClean Enable [33.70] set to Time Interval: Auto-Cleaning possible to select between the following control system behaviors: Off,
cycles activation is periodic with a period defined by the parameter Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect
AutoClean Time Interval [33.74] the alarm with a digital output. It is suggested to set parameter Frost
• Parameter AutoClean Enable [33.70] set to Start Command: Protection [36.54] to Warning, otherwise the function behaviour will be
Auto-Cleaning cycles activation is simultaneous with Drive Start command different; anyway, if desired, it is possible to set the alarm behaviour also in a
Auto- Cleaning function is realized with a base cycle: different way, changing a different the Drive response. When the measured
• Drive runs in forward direction at speed defined by the parameter temperature goes above Frost Prot. High Temperature [33.32], the Drive
Chapter 10 P. 104 AutoClean Forward Speed [33.76], for a time defined by the automatically stops and set again in Sleep Mode.
Fieldbus parameter AutoClean Forward Time [33.77]
• Drives stands at zero speed for a time defined by the parameter WARNING
AutoClean OffDelay Time [33.82] With Frost Protection function active, the Drive resets Sleep Mode (due to
• Drive runs in reverse direction at speed defined by the parameter Motor Pause, Auto On/Off, Well Draw Down Control and/or Low City or
Chapter 11 P. 128
Low Suction Inlet pressure), restarts and set Run state.
AutoClean Reverse Speed [33.78], for a time defined by the
I/0 Configuration
parameter AutoClean Reverse Time [33.79]
• Drives stands at zero speed for a time defined by the parameter WARNING
Chapter 12 P. 145
AutoClean OffDelay Time [33.82] The user is responsible for enabling of this function according to safety
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments The Drive ramps the speed using the following parameter: rules. Nidec ASI S.p.A. declaims any liability due to inappropriate use of
Annex P. 156 • Parameter AutoClean Ramp Acc Time [33.80] defines the acceleration this function. Make sure that the automatic restart of the machine will not
time from 0 speed to maximum speed cause physical injury and/or damage equipment. Refer to standards IEC
• Parameter AutoClean Ramp Dec Time [33.81] defines the deceleration 60204-1.
time from maximum speed to 0 speed
83
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.34 PROCESS PID The other necessary (and sufficient) conditions to really enable Process PID
Scope
Process PID function can be enabled setting the parameter PID Enable function are:
Chapter 2 P. 7 [45.01] to On (necessary condition, but not sufficient). This parameter is • Auto mode (see HOA – Hand/Off/Auto function)
Safety settable only when the Drive is stopped. Process PID function parameters • Jog, Frost Protection, Anti-Blocking and Auto-Cleaning functions not
are available in the family PROCESS PID [45.00]. active; these functions can be enabled, but not running to have Process
Chapter 3 P. 8 PID really enabled
Programming overview
Process PID regulator allows the user to control in a closed loop a selected • at least Main Speed Ref Sel [32.01] or Aux Speed Ref Sel [32.02] set
variable of pump application. to Prs PID (see family SPEED REFERENCE [32.00]), that means that the
Chapter 4 P. 9
Typical application variables for pump application are: Process PID regulator output must be connected at least to one of the
Programming tools
• Pressure speed reference, main or auxiliary
• Flow
Chapter 5 P. 16 • Level If one or more of the previous conditions is not fulfilled, Process PID
Programming levels regulator is not active and the behavior of the Drive depends on other
and control modes
Anyway, it is possible to control with Process PID regulator any other parameter settings.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Example: with PID Enable [45.01] set to On and Main Speed Ref
Quick start-up procedure
application variable that in turn is directly controlled varying the speed of
the electric motor using electric Drive. In fact, the output of the Process Sel [32.01] set to Fixed and Aux Speed Ref Sel [32.02] set to Off,
Chapter 7 P. 21 PID regulator is used as the speed reference for the Drive. Process PID regulator is disabled and speed regulator is enabled with fixed
Control mode selection and settings reference (one between Fixed Speed Ref 1 [32.06], Fixed Speed Ref

9.34 PROCESS PID

Figure 9
 .16 - Process PID regulator 2 [32.07], Fixed Speed Ref 3 [32.08] or Fixed Speed Ref 4 [32.09],
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55 Prs PID

Functions

Prs PID

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Prs PID

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration Prs PID

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

84
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 depending on Cmd 1 Sel Fixed Speed Ref [32.10] and Cmd 2 Sel Fixed It is possible to monitor reference and feedback signals of Process PID
Scope Speed Ref [32.11]). regulator using process data HYDRAULIC [76.00].
Chapter 2 P. 7 Process PID regulator output can be connected to: Process data with suffix 1 refer to Process PID main process reference and
Safety • or main speed reference Main Speed Ref Sel [32.01] feedback:
• or to the auxiliary speed reference Aux Speed Ref Sel [32.02] • Main pressure reference of Process PID: Press. of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.01]
Chapter 3 P. 8 using Prs PID selection. • Main pressure feedback of Process PID: Press. of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.02]
Programming overview
Enable cannot be implemented on more than one reference at the • Main flow reference of Process PID: Flow of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.03]
same time. The choice between main and auxiliary reference takes place • Main flow feedback of Process PID: Flow of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.04]
Chapter 4 P. 9 through parameter Aux Speed Ref Cmd [32.03]. Process PID is not active • Main level reference of Process PID: Level of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.05]
Programming tools in Manual mode. • Main level feedback of Process PID: Level of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.06]
The sources for reference and feedback signals are selected using • Main temperature reference of Process PID: Temp. of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.07]
Chapter 5 P. 16 parameters PID Ref Src Sel 1 [45.11] and PID Fdb Src Sel 1 [45.12]. • Main temperature feedback of Process PID: Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.08]
Programming levels Reference of Process PID can be also fixed; in this case, it is necessary to Process data with suffix 2 refer to Process PID auxiliary process reference
and control modes
set parameter PID Fixed Ref 1 [45.10]. Feedback of Process PID is always and feedback; auxiliary process values refer to other more complicated
Chapter 6 P. 18
a measure acquired through analog input or fieldbus (not a fixed value). functions (PID: Input Pressure Supervision and Well Draw Down Control):
Quick start-up procedure
Process PID regulator has got a first set of reference and feedback signals, • Auxiliary pressure reference of Process PID: Press. of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.21]
Chapter 7 P. 21 called main: • Auxiliary pressure feedback of Process PID: Press. of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.22]
Control mode selection and settings • Selection of main source reference: PID Ref Src Sel 1 [45.11] • Auxiliary flow reference of Process PID: Flow of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.23]

9.34 PROCESS PID

• Selection of main source feedback: PID Fdb Src Sel 1 [45.12] • Auxiliary flow feedback of Process PID: Flow of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.24]
Chapter 8 P. 22
• Selection of main fixed reference: PID Fixed Ref 1 [45.10] • Auxiliary level reference of Process PID: Level of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.25]
States machine and process data
Process PID regulator foresees also a second set of reference and feedback • Auxiliary level feedback of Process PID: Level of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.26]
signals, called auxiliary: • Auxiliary temperature reference of Process PID: Temp. of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.27]
Chapter 9 P. 55 • Selection of auxiliary source reference: PID Ref Src Sel 2 [45.15] • Auxiliary temperature feedback of Process PID: Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.28]
Functions • Selection of auxiliary source feedback: PID Fdb Src Sel 2 [45.16] Note that process data (pressure, flow, level) are different from zero only
• Selection of auxiliary fixed reference: PID Fixed Ref 2 [45.14] if corresponding per-unit value is different from zero. It is necessary to set
This second set is called auxiliary and it is used in particular functions: a non null value only for the per-unit process value that it is necessary to
PID: Input Pressure Supervision and Well Draw Down Control. In these regulate (one for main and one for auxiliary, if present), in order to read
functions, Process PID regulator controls main process values monitoring at non null values in process data correctly referred to the right reference and
the same time auxiliary process values and, if particular conditions occur, process signals (main and auxiliary, if present).
Process PID regulator switches main with auxiliary and vice versa. Parameter PID Pump Type Sel 1 [45.09] defines how the error signal is
Reference and feedback signals refer to per-unit value that are converted built using the reference and feedback signals:
Chapter 10 P. 104 in engineering value with the following parameters, depending on process • Lift: error = reference – feedback; note: standard mode
Fieldbus regulated value: • Force: error = feedback – reference
• 1 pu equivalence to pressure [bar]: User Per-Unit Pressure [13.11] Process PID regulator is a standard PID regulator that requires to set 3 main
• 1 pu equivalence to flow [m^3/h]: User Per-Unit Flow [13.12] parameters:
• 1 pu equivalence to level [m]: User Per-Unit Level [13.13] • Proportional gain: PID Proportional Gain [45.02]
Chapter 11 P. 128
• 1 pu equivalence to temperature [°C]: User Per-Unit Temp. 1 [13.14] • Integral time constant: PID Integral Time [45.03]
I/0 Configuration
In this section only the parameters and process data with IEC units of • Derivative time constant: PID Derivative Time [45.04]
measure are shown. For the selection of the ones with NEMA units of If the value of the parameter PID Integral Time [45.03] is zero, then the
Chapter 12 P. 145
measure refer to paragraph 5.5. integral action is disabled.
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments For example, parameter PID Fixed Ref 1 [45.10] set to 0.4 [pu] means
Annex P. 156 that Process PID reference is set to 40 [%] of the per-unit value of the NOTE
process value that is equal to User Per-Unit Pressure [13.11], if for Setting a wrong value into the integral parameter PID Integral Time
example regulated application variable is pressure. [45.03], it may results in undesired overshoots; in this case, it is
recommended that the integral parameter is set to zero.

85
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 WARNING • Process PID upper limit: PID Upper Limit [45.05]
Scope In order to use the derivative parameter PID Derivative Time [45.04], • Maximum allowable positive speed command before and after ramp:
Chapter 2 P. 7 the user must consider the effect of the derivative action (for example: Max Pos Ref [32.22]
Safety the instability of the process). In general, it is better to let the default Active lower limit of speed reference is the smaller absolute value of the
value, that is 0; set a non null value only for specific and well known following speed limits:
Chapter 3 P. 8 applications. • Process PID lower limit: PID Lower Limit [45.06]
Programming overview
• Maximum allowable negative speed command before and after ramp:
As a standard PID regulator, Process PID regulator has got other 2 other Max Neg Ref [32.23]
Chapter 4 P. 9 important parameters:
Programming tools • Upper limit: PID Upper Limit [45.05] WARNING
• Lower Limit: PID Lower Limit [45.06] If reverse rotation of the motor must be prevented, then the lower limit
Chapter 5 P. 16 of Process PID regulator must be set to zero (parameter PID Lower Limit
Programming levels Note that the output of the Process PID regulator is the reference of the [45.06]), so to prevent negative speed reference.
and control modes
speed regulator; so, the upper limit of the Process PID regulator is one of
Chapter 6 P. 18
the upper limits of the speed reference and, in the same way, the lower By use of parameter PID Mode Sel [45.17], Process PID function can be
Quick start-up procedure
limit of the Process PID regulator is one of the lower limits of the speed used in 3 different modes:
Chapter 7 P. 21 reference: see family SPEED REFERENCE [32.00]. • Continuous: continuous reference control
Control mode selection and settings Active upper limit of speed reference is the smaller absolute value of the • On/Off: hysteresis control with fixed speed reference

9.34 PROCESS PID

following speed limits: • Both: hysteresis control with continuous reference control
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
Process PID mode selection, lift
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

PrsPID

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Process PID mode selection, force

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting PrsPID
instruments

Annex P. 156

86
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.34.1 CONTINUOUS SPEED REFERENCE CONTROL 9.34.3 BOTH: HYSTERESIS CONTROL
Scope
This operating mode is enabled setting the parameter PID Mode Sel WITH CONTINUOUS SPEED REFERENCE
Chapter 2 P. 7 [45.17] to Continuous. This operating mode is enabled setting the parameter PID Mode Sel
Safety This operating mode is the standard for Process PID functions. The [45.17] to Both.
operating principle of this operating mode is described in the previous In this operating mode, Process PID regulator is partially active: this

9.34.1 CONTINUOUS SPEED REFERENCE CONTROL - 9.34.2 - 9.34.3

Chapter 3 P. 8
paragraph. operating mode is a mix between a bang-bang control (On/Off control),
Programming overview
that switched between two states, and a PID regulator control. This
operating mode is a combination of the two operating modes descripted
Chapter 4 P. 9
9.34.2 ON/OFF: HYSTERESIS CONTROL in the previous paragraphs.
Programming tools
WITH FIXED SPEED REFERENCE The On/Off command is a logic AND between the two following
This operating mode is enabled setting the parameter PID Mode Sel conditions:
Chapter 5 P. 16 [45.17] to On/Off. • Start command of the Drive used for normal operation
Programming levels
and control modes In this operating mode, Process PID regulator is no more really active: this • Hysteresis control done by comparing Process PID regulator feedback
Chapter 6 P. 18 operating mode is more similar to a bang-bang control (On/Off control), with 2 thresholds that can be configured through parameters PID
Quick start-up procedure that switched between two states, than to a PID regulator control. Hysteresis Upper [45.07] and PID Hysteresis Lower [45.08]
The On/Off command is a logic AND between the two following
Chapter 7 P. 21
conditions: The operating principle of this operating mode can be summarized in
Control mode selection and settings
• Start command of the Drive used for normal operation these two conditions:
Chapter 8 P. 22 • Hysteresis control done by comparing Process PID regulator feedback • when feedback of Process PID regulator (pressure, flow, level) is lower
States machine and process data with 2 thresholds that can be configured through parameters PID than PID Hysteresis Lower [45.08], reference of speed regulator is set
Hysteresis Upper [45.07] and PID Hysteresis Lower [45.08] equal to the output of the Process PID regulator
• when feedback of Process PID regulator (pressure, flow, level) is greater
Chapter 9 P. 55
than PID Hysteresis Upper [45.07], reference of speed regulator is set to 0
The operating principle of this operating mode can be summarized in
Functions
these two conditions:
• when feedback of Process PID regulator (pressure, flow, level) is lower With respect to the continuous speed reference control mode, in this case
than PID Hysteresis Lower [45.08], reference of speed regulator is set the integral gain control can be used without significant restrictions.
to PID Upper Limit [45.05] In this operating mode, from the moment that the Process PID regulator
• when feedback of Process PID regulator (pressure, flow, level) is greater is again really active, in particular when feedback of Process PID regulator
than PID Hysteresis Upper [45.07], reference of speed regulator is set to 0 (pressure, flow, level) is lower than PID Hysteresis Lower [45.08], it is
necessary to set the reference, using main source reference (that can be
set to Fixed) or fixed source reference (that can be set to Fixed).
Chapter 10 P. 104 If reference of Process PID regulator is set to a value that is between
Fieldbus
PID Hysteresis Lower [45.08] and PID Hysteresis Upper [45.07], the
behavior become continuous (in practice, no more bang-bang control,
On/Off control).
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

87
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.35 PROCESS PID: DEAD BAND DELAY Process PID feedforward is implemented using the following variables:
Scope
Process PID: Dead Band Delay function is enabled if parameter Dead Band • signal source selected using parameter Speed Feedforward Sel [32.05]
Chapter 2 P. 7 Enable [45.80] is set to On. • gain set with parameter Speed Ffw Gain [32.38]
Safety The Process PID regulator output is locked if the feedback stays within the • offset set with parameter Speed Ffw Offset [32.39]
dead band area around the reference, defined by the parameters Dead Band
Chapter 3 P. 8
Low Lim [45.81] and Dead Band Up Lim [45.82], for a predefined time and the following rule:
Programming overview
delay, parameter Dead Band Time Delay [45.83]. The Process PID regulator • signal which source is selected using parameter Speed Feedforward
output locked value is the output value at the end of the time delay. Sel [32.05]* gain set with parameter Speed Ffw Gain [32.38] + offset
Chapter 4 P. 9
Process PID regulator output is unlocked as soon as the feedback goes set with parameter Speed Ffw Offset [32.39]
Programming tools
outside the dead band area around the reference, defined by the
Feedforward is implemented outside Process PID regulator. In this mode,

9.35 PROCESS PID: DEAD BAND DELAY - 9.36

parameters Dead Band Low Lim [45.81] and Dead Band Up Lim
Chapter 5 P. 16 [45.82]. Note that the hysteresis is managed by the time delay used to if for some reason the output of the Process PID regulator is set to 0, for
Programming levels enter the locked state. example due to an analog feedback loss, the Drive can still regulate the
and control modes
Note that parameters Dead Band Low Lim [45.81] and Dead Band process, in particular the application variable (pressure, flow, level), using
Chapter 6 P. 18
only the feedforward signal; this last condition is very similar to an open
Quick start-up procedure
Up Lim [45.82] must be set in pu values; these values are absolute and
not relative to reference value; this means that these parameters refer to loop control.
Chapter 7 P. 21 pu value and don’t change if reference value changes. Both values must A typical application for this function is a Drive with a pump used to
Control mode selection and settings be positive; data base settings automatically prevent the user to insert a control the water level in a tank or in well.
negative number. The feedback of the process is the level. The pump is used to supply water
Chapter 8 P. 22
to the tank or to the well in case water level decrease or vice versa to
States machine and process data
remove water from the tank or from the well in case water level increase.
9.36 PROCESS PID: FEEDFORWARD Pump control the input or the output of the water inside tank or well.
Chapter 9 P. 55
Process PID: Feedforward function is enabled if parameter Enable Ffw External users and/or suppliers remove or supply water from tank or well.
Functions
Speed Cmd [32.33] is set to On or set to a source bit (from terminal strip Using flow feedback from users and/or suppliers as signal for Process PID:
or command word) that is at high level. Process PID: Feedforward is not Feedforward function, it is possible to improve the time response of the
active in Manual mode. This parameter is settable only when the Drive is Process PID regulator used to control the water level.
stopped. Process PID: Feedforward function parameters are available in the From control system point of view, the water flow inside and/or outside
family SPEED REFERENCE [32.00]. the tank or the well can be considered as a disturbance on the system that
Process PID regulator tries to control: feedforward tries to compensate this
Usually in a standard PID regulator, as Process PID regulator is, the disturbance and Process PID regulator will react faster to the changes in
feedforward signal needs an accurate model of the controlled process. In water supply and consumption by supplier and user.
Chapter 10 P. 104 some particular simple case, it is possible to use a signal, a gain and an
Fieldbus
offset to create a useful feedforward signal to connect to PID regulator
feedforward.
In Process PID regulator, feedforward can be implemented starting from a
Chapter 11 P. 128
signal that is indirectly related to the application variable to be controlled:
I/0 Configuration
• feedback of the application variable (pressure, flow, level) remains the
main signal used to control the process
• an additional signal (pressure, flow, level) that indirectly affect the
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting application variable to be controlled (feedback of Process PID regulator)
instruments can be used to speed up the Process PID regulator response
Annex P. 156

88
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.37 PROCESS PID: FEEDBACK SUPERVISION Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision function uses Process PID controller.
Scope
Process PID: Feedback Supervision function is enabled if parameter Fdb In normal operation, when there is enough pressure in the inlet of the
Chapter 2 P. 7 Mon Enable [45.60] is set to On. Process PID function must also enabled pump, Process PID controller regulates the main process variables (for
Safety and active. This parameter is settable only when the Drive is stopped. example: pressure, flow or level), typically on the output of the pump.
Process PID: Feedback Supervision function parameters are available in the In case there isn’t enough pressure in the inlet of the pump, Process PID
Chapter 3 P. 8
family PROCESS PID [45.00]. controller reduces the main process reference of a value defined by the
Programming overview
Process PID: Feedback Supervision function is used to be sure that the parameter In Press Mon Ref Delta [45.73], in order to re-establish the
feedback process value (for example: pressure, flow or level) remains correct water pressure at the input of the pump).
Chapter 4 P. 9
between predefined limits. This function is used to detect pump

9.37 PROCESS PID: FEEDBACK SUPERVISION - 9.38

Programming tools
malfunctioning or circuit problems (leakage, broken pipe, rubbles that Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision function configuration:
block the water flow in the pipe or something else.) • Main process variable (for example: pressure, flow or level), typically on
Chapter 5 P. 16 Upper and lower limits around the reference are set using the following the output of the pump set using parameter PID Fdb Src Sel 1 [45.12]
Programming levels parameters: • Inlet pressure of the pump (auxiliary process variable) set using
and control modes
• lower tolerance with respect to the reference: parameter Fdb Mon parameter PID Fdb Src Sel 2 [45.16]
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
Low Lim [45.61]
• upper tolerance with respect to the reference: parameter Fdb Mon Inside AD1000 there are 3 functions very similar:
Chapter 7 P. 21 Up Lim [45.62] • Well Draw Down Control function
Control mode selection and settings • Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure
When the feedback of the process value (feedback of Process PID regulator) • PID: Input Pressure Supervision
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
goes above or below the limits set with parameters Fdb Mon Low Lim
[45.61] and Fdb Mon Up Lim [45.62], a counter starts counting up towards In all above mentioned functions, the scope is to supervise that there is
a timeout, parameter Fdb Mon Timeout [45.63]. When the actual value is enough water in the inlet of the pump, to prevent the pump from sucking
Chapter 9 P. 55
within the allowed area, the same counter counts down instead. air or causing suction cavitation or to prevent the complete consumption
Functions
Whenever the counter is higher than the timeout, then alarm FdbMonitor of a resource:
(code 58, bit 9 of Alarm Word 4, AW4.09) becomes active. The operation • Well Draw Down Control uses a dedicated auxiliary analog input
to be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter Fdb Monitor (typically water level or water pressure) with a complex logic (pressure
[36.58] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select control mode, level control mode and Sleep Mode)
between the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast • Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure function uses a dedicated digital
Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm input (water pressure) with a simplified logic (pressure control mode and
with a digital output. Sleep Mode)
• PID: Input Pressure Supervision uses a dedicated analog input (water
Chapter 10 P. 104 pressure) with an average complex logic (pressure control mode, reduced
Fieldbus
9.38 PROCESS PID: INPUT PRESSURE SUPERVISION pressure control mode and stop mode)
Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision function is enabled if parameter
In Press Mon Enable [45.70] is set to On. Process PID function must From the moment that these functions are very similar, only one function
also enabled and active. This parameter is settable only when the Drive at a time can be enabled. The user is responsible to select the more
Chapter 11 P. 128
appropriate for the application.
I/0 Configuration
is stopped. Process PID: Feedback Supervision function parameters are
available in the family PROCESS PID [45.00].
NOTE
Chapter 12 P. 145
It is not possible set the parameter In Press Mon Enable [45.70] to On if the
Protections and troubleshooting Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision function is used to supervise that
instruments
there is enough pressure in the inlet of the pump, in order to: parameter Low City Press. Enable [33.40] or the parameter WDD Enable
Annex P. 156 • prevent the pump from sucking air or causing suction cavitation, [45.50] are set to On. In case the operator tries to set the parameter In Press
avoiding damages of the pump Mon Enable [45.70] to On when the parameter Low City Press. Enable [33.40]
• prevent the complete consumption of a resource, for example the water or the parameter WDD Enable [45.50] are set to On, the error DSPParEr is
in a well or in a tank, trying to save it generated and the In Press Mon Enable [45.70] is automatically reset to Off.

89
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Example: 9.39 PROCESS PID: ANALOG FEEDBACK LOSS

Scope • Main process variable: water pressure at the output of the pump Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function can be used to control analog
Chapter 2 P. 7 • Auxiliary process variable: water pressure at the input of the pump input, used as feedback of the Process PID regulator (for more details, see
Safety Process PID function). This function is active only if Process PID regulator is
In normal operation, when water pressure at the input of the pump is active.
Chapter 3 P. 8 upper the threshold defined by parameter In Press Mon Alm Thres The analog inputs available are: AI1 and AI2 on BASIS board (±10V,
Programming overview
[45.71], Process PID controller regulates the main process variable, that in ±20mA), AI3 and AI4 on GIABA input expansion board (±10V, ±20mA).
this example is the output pressure of the pump. This operation mode is If an analog feedback loss condition occurs (for example due to a broken
Chapter 4 P. 9 called: pressure control mode. wire), then the control system allows to diagnose the malfunctioning
Programming tools In abnormal operation, when water pressure is lower the threshold assuring in any case the continuity of the plant operation.
defined by parameter In Press Mon Alm Thres [45.71], Process PID

9.39 PROCESS PID: ANALOG FEEDBACK LOSS

Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function is enabled if parameters AI1
Chapter 5 P. 16 controller reduces the main process reference of a value defined by the Loss [17.43], AI2 Loss [17.44], AI3 Loss [17.45] and AI1 Loss [17.46]
Programming levels parameter In Press Mon Ref Delta [45.73]. This operation mode is called: are set to Prs PID Disable:
and control modes
reduced pressure control mode. An alarm InPresMon1 (code 59, bit 10 of • Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function is enabled on analog input
Chapter 6 P. 18
Alarm Word 4, AW4.10) becomes active. The operation to be performed
Quick start-up procedure
1 setting parameter AI1 Loss [17.43] to Prs PID Disable; note that the
if this event occurs is set by parameter In Press Monitor Thres1 [36.59] other values in the pick list are used by Analog Command loss function.
Chapter 7 P. 21 of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between • Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function is enabled on analog input
Control mode selection and settings the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick 2 setting parameter AI2 Loss [17.44] to Prs PID Disable; note that the
Stop or Ramp Stop. Anyway, it is suggested to let the default value, that is other values in the pick list are used by Analog Command loss function.
Chapter 8 P. 22
Warning. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
States machine and process data
• Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function is enabled on analog input
3 setting parameter AI3 Loss [17.45] to Prs PID Disable; note that the
The transition from pressure control mode to reduced control mode and other values in the pick list are used by Analog Command loss function.
Chapter 9 P. 55 vice versa is immediate. • Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function is enabled on analog input
Functions In case, in abnormal operation, that means in reduced pressure control 4 setting parameter AI4 Loss [17.46] to Prs PID Disable; note that the
mode, water pressure at the input of the pump continues to decrease other values in the pick list are used by Analog Command loss function.
and goes below the threshold defined by the parameter In Press Mon
Trip Thres [45.72], a second An alarm InPresMon2 (code 60, bit 11 of It is possible to enable Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss function on
Alarm Word 4, AW4.11) becomes active. The operation to be performed more than one analog input at the same time. For example, it is possible
if this event occurs is set by parameter In Press Monitor Thres2 [36.60] to enable the function on analog input 1, for example used as main
of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between process feedback, and on analog input 2, for example used as auxiliary
the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick process feedback. Note that the auxiliary process feedback is used in
Chapter 10 P. 104 Stop or Ramp Stop. Anyway, it is suggested to let the default value, that is particular functions: PID: Input Pressure Supervision and Well Draw
Fieldbus Coast Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output. Down Control. In these functions, Process PID regulator controls main
process values monitoring at the same time auxiliary process values and,
if particular conditions occur, Process PID regulator switches main with
auxiliary and vice versa. Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss can be enabled
Chapter 11 P. 128
on both analog inputs, but it is active only on the active process feedback,
I/0 Configuration
that is the one used as feedback by Process PID at the moment.
The analog feedback loss condition occurs when the analog input value
Chapter 12 P. 145
decreases below the corresponding parameter AI1 Loss Threshold
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments [17.51], AI2 Loss Threshold [17.52], AI3 Loss Threshold [17.53] or AI4
Annex P. 156 Loss Threshold [17.54].

90
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 If parameters AI1 Loss [17.43], AI2 Loss [17.44], AI3 Loss [17.45] and with particular attention to the type of analog input (for example, 4÷20
Scope AI1 Loss [17.46] are set to Prs PID Disable and the feedback loss condition [mA] or 0÷10 [V])
Chapter 2 P. 7 occurs, then the control system disables the Process PID regulator. In
Safety particular, the output and the state (memory) of the Process PID regulator Figure 9
 .24 – Analog feedback management
are fixed to zero, avoiding the saturation of the regulator itself and the
Chapter 3 P. 8 racing of the pump to maximum speed.
Programming overview
The motor reaches the speed set by the additional speed reference term,
that is usually summed to the term generated by the output of Process PID
Chapter 4 P. 9 regulator; the source of additional speed reference is set using parameter
Programming tools Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]. If additional speed reference value is null,
then motor stops.

9.39 PROCESS PID: ANALOG FEEDBACK LOSS

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels When the analog feedback loss condition occurs, then alarm PrPidFdbLs
and control modes
(code 46, bit 13 of Alarm Word 3, AW3.13) becomes active. The operation
Chapter 6 P. 18
to be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter Prs PID Fdb Loss
Quick start-up procedure
[36.46] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select
Chapter 7 P. 21 between the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast For example, for an analog input 4÷20 [mA], it is necessary to set
Control mode selection and settings Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm • AI1 Value for 1 pu [17.05] set to 100 [%]
with a digital output. • AI1 Value for 0 pu [17.09] set to 20 [%]
Chapter 8 P. 22
in order to have:
States machine and process data
Figure 9
 .23 – Analog feedback loss (t0 = AI Loss detection) • 4 [mA] = 20 [%] = 0 [pu]
• 20 [mA] = 100 [%] = 1 [pu]
Chapter 9 P. 55 with the consequence that:
Functions • 0 [mA] = 0 [%] = -0.25 [pu]
Same calculations are valid for the following parameters:
• AI1 Threshold [17.51], AI2 Threshold [17.52], AI3 Threshold [17.53]
and AI4 Threshold [17.54]
So, the threshold values used in Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss
functions are
• 0 [%] = -0.25 [pu] = (if referred to an analog input 4÷20 [mA]) = 0 [mA]
• 20 [%] = 0 [pu] = (if referred to an analog input 4÷20 [mA]) = 4 [mA]
Chapter 10 P. 104 • 100 [%] = 1 [pu] = (if referred to an analog input 4÷20 [mA]) = 20 [mA]
Fieldbus Formula to convert per-unit value [pu] in per-cent [%] value with an
analog input 4÷20 [mA] set as 4 [mA] = 0 [pu] and 20 [mA] = 1 [pu]:
• per-cent value [%] = 80 [%/pu] * per-unit [pu] + 20 [%]
Note for the calculation of the following parameters expressed in [%]: Example to set a threshold value equal to 0.0 [pu] in case of analog input
Chapter 11 P. 128
• AI1 Threshold [17.51], AI2 Threshold [17.52], AI3 Threshold [17.53] 4÷20 [mA]:
I/0 Configuration
and AI4 Threshold [17.54] • per-cent value [%] = 80 [%/pu] * 0.0 [pu] + 20 [%] = 20 [%]
AI2 Threshold [17.52] value, for example, to trigger the Process PID:
Chapter 12 P. 145
Remember that analog inputs are set using the following [%] parameters: Analog Feedback Loss function active when analog input 2 falls to a value
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments • AI1 Value for 1 pu [17.05], AI2 Value for 1 pu [17.06], AI3 Value for below of 0 [pu]
Annex P. 156 1 pu [17.07] and AI4 Value for 1 pu [17.08] • AI1 Threshold [17.51] set to 20 [%]
• AI1 Value for 0 pu [17.09], AI2 Value for 0 pu [17.10], AI3 Value for
0 pu [17.11] and AI4 Value for 0 pu [17.12]

91
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.40 PROCESS PID: AUXILIARY PUMPS The start of the first auxiliary pump occurs once that the plant process
Scope
Auxiliary Pumps function must be enabled setting the parameter Aux feedback (that is Process PID regulator feedback) falls below Aux Pumps
Chapter 2 P. 7 Pumps Enable [45.30] to On. Auxiliary Pumps function works only when On Thres [45.32].
Safety Process PID function is enabled. If the auxiliary pumps are running, Motor In Figure 9.26, the start of the auxiliary pump has brought the process
Pause function doesn’t work. feedback above the threshold Aux Pumps On Thres [45.32] within the
Chapter 3 P. 8
The parameters are available in the family PROCESS PID [45.00]. time set by Aux Pumps On Wait [45.34]. The plant process feedback is
Programming overview
The parameter Aux Pumps Enable [45.30] works together with the process inside band tolerance around reference: it isn’t necessary to start another
feedback (for example: pressure, flow or level) of the Process PID function. (second) auxiliary pump and the system remains in run with an auxiliary
Chapter 4 P. 9
Auxiliary Pumps function helps the Process PID regulator to keep the plant (first) pump on and the main pump regulating.
Programming tools
process feedback (for example: pressure, flow or level) on the set point In Figure 9.27, that is case of high process demand, the start of the first
within a tolerance band by starting and stopping the auxiliary pumps auxiliary pump does not succeed in bringing the process feedback above
Chapter 5 P. 16 according to the required pressure, flow or level rate. the lower threshold and so, after the time set by Aux Pumps On Wait
[45.34], the start of the second auxiliary pump is commanded. After the

9.40 PROCESS PID: AUXILIARY PUMPS

Programming levels
and control modes
It’s necessary to set the parameter Aux Pumps Number [45.35] in order
to define the number of auxiliary pumps present in the system. At least second pump start, if the plant process feedback is inside band tolerance
Chapter 6 P. 18
around reference, it isn’t necessary to start another (third) auxiliary pump
Quick start-up procedure
one auxiliary pump must be present; otherwise, it is necessary to set the
parameter Aux Pumps Enable [45.30] to Off. Maximum auxiliary pumps and the system remains in run with two auxiliary (first and second) pumps
Chapter 7 P. 21 is 6: 3 auxiliary pumps with BASIS card and other 3 auxiliary pumps with on and the main pump regulating.
Control mode selection and settings GIABB optional card. Configure the digital output used to command Same logic for other auxiliary pumps (if present).
Chapter 8 P. 22
start/stop of the auxiliary pumps using parameters in the family DIGITAL
OUTPUTS [16.00]. Figure 9
 .26 - Start of the first auxiliary pump
States machine and process data
PrsPID
Figure 9
 .25 - Auxiliary Pumps function, main diagram
Chapter 9 P. 55
PrsPID Reference
Functions

Process PID feedback

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Figure 9
 .27 - Start of the first auxiliary pump and of the second auxiliary pump
PrsPID

Chapter 11 P. 128 PrsPID Reference

I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

92
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 The stop of the pumps occurs when the process feedback increases above The parameter Number of Aux Pumps [45.26] sets the number of
Scope the parameter Aux Pumps Off Thres [45.31]. If this situation occurs auxiliary pumps: if one, the start and stop occurs without waiting time.
Chapter 2 P. 7 while more than one auxiliary pumps are running, then the stop of the last In order to select the digital outputs to connect with the start/stop
Safety auxiliary pumps previously started is immediate, while the stop of the next command of the auxiliary pumps, it is necessary to set the parameter in
auxiliary pump depends on the value reached by the process feedback the family DIGITAL OUTPUTS [16.00].
Chapter 3 P. 8 after a the time set in the parameter Aux Pumps Off Wait [45.33]. The start/stop command of the first auxiliary pump is in bit 4 of status
Programming overview
After this time has elapsed, if the process feedback falls under the stop word 4 (ID.bit 520404). The start/stop command of the second auxiliary
threshold, that is comes back into the tolerance band, the system remains pump is in bit 5 of status word 4 (ID.bit 520405). And so up to the start/
Chapter 4 P. 9 running with only one pump less (Figure 9 .28), otherwise also the next stop command of the sixth auxiliary pump is in bit 9 of status word 4 (ID.
Programming tools auxiliary pump is stopped (Figure 9 .29). bit 520404).
Auxiliary pumps are stopped in the reverse order used to start them, that Example: to connect the first auxiliary pump to DO1, then set DO1 Select
Chapter 5 P. 16 for example means: auxiliary pump 1 start auxiliary pump 2 start [16.01] to SW4.04-Aux Pump 1 and to connect the second auxiliary pump
auxiliary pump 3 start auxiliary pump 3 stop auxiliary pump 2 stop di DO2, then set DO2 Select [16.03] to SW4.05-Aux Pump 2.

9.40 PROCESS PID: AUXILIARY PUMPS

Programming levels
and control modes
auxiliary pump 1 stop.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
Figure 9
 .28 - Stop of the first auxiliary pump
Chapter 7 P. 21 PrsPID PrsPID
Control mode selection and settings
PrsPID Reference
Chapter 8 P. 22
PrsPID Reference
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Figure 9
 .29 - Stop of the first auxiliary pump
and of the second auxiliary pump
Chapter 10 P. 104 PrsPID
Fieldbus

PrsPID Reference

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

93
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.41 PROCESS PID: PRESSURE, FLOW Reference and feedback signals are converted in engineering values, that
Scope
AND LEVEL VIEW are [bar], [m^3/h] and [m], using the per-unit value and the following
Chapter 2 P. 7 This function converts in engineering values the per-unit values of the parameters, process values corresponding to 1 pu (full scale value).
Safety reference and feedback signals for Process PID function. Process reference The parameters are available in family PER-UNIT BASE DATA [13.00]:
and feedback for Process PID comes from two different sources: • 1 pu equivalence to pressure [bar]: User Per-Unit Press. 1 [13.11]
Chapter 3 P. 8 • 1 pu equivalence to flow [m^3/h]: User Per-Unit Flow 1 [13.12]
• First set: main process
Programming overview
• Second set: auxiliary process • 1 pu equivalence to level [m]: User Per-Unit Level 1 [13.13]
• 1 pu equivalence to temperature [°C]: User Per-Unit Temp. 1 [13.14]

9.41 PROCESS PID: PRESSURE, FLOW AND LEVEL VIEW

Chapter 4 P. 9
This second set is called auxiliary and it is used in particular functions: • 1 pu equivalence to pressure [bar]: User Per-Unit Press. 2 [13.21]
Programming tools
PID: Input Pressure Supervision and Well Draw Down Control. In these • 1 pu equivalence to flow [m^3/h]: User Per-Unit Flow 2 [13.22]
functions, Process PID regulator controls main process values monitoring at • 1 pu equivalence to level [m]: User Per-Unit Level 2 [13.23]
Chapter 5 P. 16 the same time auxiliary process values and, if particular conditions occur, • 1 pu equivalence to temperature [°C]: User Per-Unit Temp. 2 [13.24]
Programming levels
and control modes Process PID regulator switches main with auxiliary and vice versa.
It is possible to read directly the transducer signals in [bar], [m^3/h] [m] WARNING
Chapter 6 P. 18
There are two set of process values corresponding to 1 pu (full scale
Quick start-up procedure
and [°C] displaying them on the process data, family HYDRAULIC [76.00].
In this section only the parameters and process data with IEC units of value): User Per-Unit Press. 1 [13.11], User Per-Unit Flow 1 [13.12],
Chapter 7 P. 21 measure are shown. For the selection of the ones with NEMA units of User Per-Unit Level 1 [13.13], User Per-Unit Temp. 1 [13.14] and User
Control mode selection and settings
measure refer to paragraph 5.5 Per-Unit Press. 2 [13.21], User Per-Unit Flow 2 [13.22], User Per-Unit
• Pressure reference for Process PID, set 1: Press. of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.01] Level 2 [13.23], User Per-Unit Temp. 2 [13.24]. First set is used for main
Chapter 8 P. 22
process values (reference and feedback). Second set is used for auxiliary
States machine and process data • Pressure feedback for Process PID, set 1: Press. of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.02]
• Flow reference for Process PID, set 1: Flow of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.03] process values (reference and feedback).
• Flow feedback for Process PID, set 1: Flow of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.04] So, if for example, main process values (reference and feedback) are
Chapter 9 P. 55
• Level reference for Process PID, set 1: Level of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.05] pressures and auxiliary process values (reference and feedback) are levels,
Functions
• Level feedback for Process PID, set 1: Level of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.06] then it is necessary to set parameter User Per-Unit Press. 1 [13.11] and
• Temperature reference for Process PID, set 1: Temp. of Prs PID Ref 1 [76.07] User Per-Unit Level 2 [13.23] different from zero.
• Temperature feedback for Process PID, set 1: Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 1 [76.08]
WARNING
• Pressure reference for Process PID, set 2: Press. of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.21]
The user is responsible to correctly set the parameters related to this
• Pressure feedback for Process PID, set 2: Press. of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.22]
function and to correctly read the data process. It is necessary to set
• Flow reference for Process PID, set 2: Flow of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.23]
different from zero only one value for each set, corresponding to the type of
• Flow feedback for Process PID, set 2: Flow of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.24]
process variable (pressure, flow or level). If more than one value is different
• Level reference for Process PID, set 2: Level of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.25]
Chapter 10 P. 104 from zero, one or more value do not correspond to a real process value.
• Level feedback for Process PID, set 2: Level of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.26]
Fieldbus If auxiliary process value is not used, it is necessary to set to zero all values
• Temperature reference for Process PID, set 2: Temp. of Prs PID Ref 2 [76.27]
of the related set (second set).
• Temperature feedback for Process PID, set 2: Temp. of Prs PID Fdb 2 [76.28]

Chapter 11 P. 128
It is possible also to read directly the transducer signals in [pu] displaying
I/0 Configuration
them on the process data, family AUX [63.00]:
• Reference for Process PID, set 1: Prs PID Ref 1 [63.16]
Chapter 12 P. 145
• Feedback for Process PID, set 1: Prs PID Fdb 1 [63.17]
Protections and troubleshooting • Reference for Process PID, set 2: Prs PID Ref 2 [63.18]
instruments
• Feedback for Process PID, set 2: Prs PID Fdb 2 [63.19]
Annex P. 156

94
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.42 SOFT FILL The parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04] is set to Fixed and the fixed
Scope
Soft Fill function can be enabled setting the parameter Soft Fill Mode speed reference is set using one of the following parameters:
Chapter 2 P. 7 [45.40] to a value different from Off (Horizontal mode, Vertical simple • Fixed Speed Ref 1 [32.06]
Safety mode or Vertical complex mode). This parameter is settable only when the • Fixed Speed Ref 2 [32.07]
Drive is stopped. Soft Fill function parameters are available in the family • Fixed Speed Ref 3 [32.08]
Chapter 3 P. 8
PROCESS PID [45.00]. • Fixed Speed Ref 4 [32.09]
Programming overview

Soft Fill function is designed to start a pumping system in a controlled The selection between fixed speed reference is done using the following
Chapter 4 P. 9
manner. Rather than turning on the Process PID to control the process parameters:
Programming tools
immediately at start up, Soft Fill function operates at a fixed speed to • Cmd 1 Sel Fix Speed Ref [32.10]
pre-fill the piping or the storage tank before switching to Process PID to • Cmd 2 Sel Fix Speed Ref [32.11]
Chapter 5 P. 16 control. Soft Fill function avoids water hammers and sudden pressure
Programming levels peaks that could otherwise break the pipes and/or cause other possible The speed reference is actuated through a speed ramp, that is the
and control modes
malfunctioning or damage to the pump or the system in general. standard speed ramp already present in the control system.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Once reached the fixed speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel
Quick start-up procedure
Depending on Soft Fill function mode selected, after the initial fixed speed
reference, Soft Fill function can use the Process PID with a fixed reference [32.04]), the system remains in stand still condition until a timeout set
Chapter 7 P. 21 and ramp before to switch to control the process in normal operation. using the parameter Soft Fill Timeout [45.41] is elapsed.

9.42 SOFT FILL - 9.42.1

Control mode selection and settings Soft Fill function is designed to work with Process PID function: enable After that, Process PID controlled is enabled: soft fill procedure is
Process PID function is a necessary condition to enable Soft Fill function. concluded and normal operation for Process PID controller started.
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
Soft Fill function controls the same process value that is controlled by
Process PID function. Possible process values controlled: pressure, flow, In normal operation, additional speed reference is still linked to fixed speed
level. The most common process value is pressure. reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]), but main or auxiliary
Chapter 9 P. 55 speed reference is no more null and is now linked to the output of the
Functions
Soft Fill function is designed for different piping systems: horizontal and activated Process PID controller (main or auxiliary depend from dedicated
vertical piping systems. Using the parameter Soft Fill Mode [45.40], it is parameters values); this guarantees that there aren’t jumps on speed
possible to select three different operating modes: reference, switching from soft fill procedure to normal operation; at the
• Parameter Soft Fill Mode [45.40] set to Horizontal mode enables Soft same time, this solution forces the output of the Process PID controller to
Fill function for horizontal piping systems negative values in case normal process demands for a speed lower than the
• Parameter Soft Fill Mode [45.40] set to Vertical simple mode enable fixed speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]). Particular
Soft Fill function for vertical piping systems, simple solution attention must be dedicated to the Process PID controller saturation
• Parameter Soft Fill Mode [45.40] set to Vertical complex mode management due to the additional speed reference always active.
Chapter 10 P. 104 enable Soft Fill function for vertical piping systems, complex solution
Fieldbus Time sequence:
• t0: soft fill procedure starts
9.42.1 HORIZONTAL PIPING SYSTEMS • t0 ÷ t1: motor ramps from null speed to fixed speed, linked to additional
The parameter Soft Fill Mode [45.40] is set to Horizontal mode. speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04])
Chapter 11 P. 128
• t1 ÷ t2: motor remains at fixed speed, linked to additional speed
I/0 Configuration
The electric motor starts with a fixed speed reference and the Process PID reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04])
controller disabled. The speed reference is the sum of main or auxiliary • (t2 – t1) = timeout (set using the parameter Soft Fill Timeout [45.41])
Chapter 12 P. 145
• t2: soft fill procedure stops, normal operation starts (Process PID
Protections and troubleshooting speed reference (main or auxiliary depends where the output of the
instruments
Process PID controller is connected; the configuration is done using controller); the system follows the pressure reference desired from the
Annex P. 156 dedicated parameters) and additional speed reference. Main or auxiliary process, that can be fixed or variable (for example, from analog input
speed reference is null in this first period. Additional speed reference is or from fixed value or from fieldbus)
linked to fixed speed reference.

95
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.42.2 VERTICAL PIPING SYSTEMS, SIMPLE SOLUTION In normal operation, additional speed reference is still linked to fixed speed
Scope
The parameter Soft Fill Mode [45.40] is set to Vertical simple mode. reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]), but main or auxiliary
Chapter 2 P. 7 speed reference is no more null and is now linked to the output of the
Safety The electric motor starts with a fixed speed reference and the Process activated Process PID controller (main or auxiliary depend from dedicated
PID controller disabled. The speed reference is the sum of main or parameters values); this guarantees that there aren’t jumps on speed
Chapter 3 P. 8
auxiliary speed reference (main or auxiliary depends where the output of reference, switching from soft fill procedure to normal operation; at the

9.42.2 VERTICAL PIPING SYSTEMS, SIMPLE SOLUTION - 9.42.3

Programming overview
the Process PID controller is connected; the configuration is done using same time, this solution forces the output of the Process PID controller to
dedicated parameters) and additional speed reference. Main or auxiliary negative values in case normal process demands for a speed lower than the
Chapter 4 P. 9
speed reference is null in this first period. Additional speed reference is fixed speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]). Particular
Programming tools
linked to fixed speed reference. attention must be dedicated to the Process PID controller saturation
management due to the additional speed reference always active.
Chapter 5 P. 16 The parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04] is set to Fixed and the fixed
Programming levels speed reference is set using one of the following parameters: Time sequence:
and control modes
• Fixed Speed Ref 1 [32.06] • t0: soft fill procedure starts
Chapter 6 P. 18
• t0 ÷ t1: motor ramps from null speed to fixed speed, linked to additional
Quick start-up procedure
• Fixed Speed Ref 2 [32.07]
• Fixed Speed Ref 3 [32.08] speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04])
Chapter 7 P. 21 • Fixed Speed Ref 4 [32.09] • t1 ÷ t2: motor remains at fixed speed, waiting until a fixed pressure
Control mode selection and settings (or any other process value, for example flow or level) is reached (Soft
The selection between fixed speed reference is done using the following Fill Threshold [45.42])
Chapter 8 P. 22
• if (t2 – t1) < parameter Soft Fill Timeout [45.41], then soft fill procedure
States machine and process data
parameters:
• Cmd 1 Sel Fix Speed Ref [32.10] stops, normal operation starts (Process PID controller); the system follows
• Cmd 2 Sel Fix Speed Ref [32.11] the pressure reference (or any other process value) desired from the
Chapter 9 P. 55 process, that can be fixed or variable (for example, from analog input or
Functions
The speed reference is actuated through a speed ramp, that is the from fixed value or from fieldbus)
standard speed ramp already present in the control system. • else alarm SfFillTime active (parameter Soft Fill Timeout [36.47])
Once reached the fixed speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel
[32.04]), the system remains in stand still condition until a pressure (or any
other process value, for example flow or level) reference (parameter Soft 9.42.3 VERTICAL PIPING SYSTEMS,
Fill Threshold [45.42]) is reached (control system checks the Process PID COMPLEX SOLUTION
controller feedback). The parameter Soft Fill Mode [45.40] is set to Vertical complex mode.
After that, Process PID controlled is enabled: soft fill procedure is
Chapter 10 P. 104 concluded and normal operation for Process PID controller started. The electric motor starts with a fixed speed reference and the Process
Fieldbus
PID controller disabled. The speed reference is the sum of main or
In case the system doesn’t reach the pressure (or any other process auxiliary speed reference (main or auxiliary depends where the output of
value, for example flow or level) reference (Soft Fill Threshold [45.42]) the Process PID controller is connected; the configuration is done using
in a timeout set using the parameter Soft Fill Timeout [45.41], alarm dedicated parameters) and additional speed reference. Main or auxiliary
Chapter 11 P. 128
SfFillTime (code 47, bit 14 of Alarm Word 3, AW3.14) becomes active. The speed reference is null in this first period. Additional speed reference is
I/0 Configuration
operation to be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter Soft Fill linked to fixed speed reference.
Timeout [36.47] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible
Chapter 12 P. 145
to select between the following control system behaviors: Off, Warning,
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to connect the
Annex P. 156 alarm with a digital output.

96
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 The parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04] is set to Fixed and the fixed In normal operation, additional speed reference is still linked to fixed speed
Scope speed reference is set using one of the following parameters: reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]), but main or auxiliary
Chapter 2 P. 7 • Fixed Speed Ref 1 [32.06] speed reference is no more null and is now linked to the output of the
Safety • Fixed Speed Ref 2 [32.07] activated Process PID controller (main or auxiliary depend from dedicated
• Fixed Speed Ref 3 [32.08] parameters values); this guarantees that there aren’t jumps on speed
Chapter 3 P. 8 • Fixed Speed Ref 4 [32.09] reference, switching from soft fill procedure to normal operation; at the
Programming overview
same time, this solution forces the output of the Process PID controller to
The selection between fixed speed reference is done using the following negative values in case normal process demands for a speed lower than the

9.42.3 VERTICAL PIPING SYSTEMS, COMPLEX SOLUTION

Chapter 4 P. 9 parameters: fixed speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]). Particular
Programming tools • Cmd 1 Sel Fix Speed Ref [32.10] attention must be dedicated to the Process PID controller saturation
• Cmd 2 Sel Fix Speed Ref [32.11] management due to the additional speed reference always active.
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels The speed reference is actuated through a ramp, that is the standard Time sequence:
and control modes
speed ramp already present in the control system. • t0: soft fill procedure starts
Chapter 6 P. 18
Once reached the fixed speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel • t0 ÷ t1: motor ramps from null speed to fixed speed, linked to additional
Quick start-up procedure
[32.04]), the Process PID controller is enabled. speed reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04])
Chapter 7 P. 21 Process PID controller is at the beginning activated with a pressure (or any • t1 ÷ t2: the system ramps the pressure (or any other process value,
Control mode selection and settings other process value, for example flow or level) reference (parameter Soft for example flow or level) (Process PID controller) with a fixed pressure
Fill Threshold [45.42]), that is usually lower than the final pressure (or (or any other process value, for example flow or level) ramp (parameter
Chapter 8 P. 22
any other process value, for example flow or level) reference (desired for Soft Fill Ramp Time [45.44]) until a fixed pressure (parameter Soft Fill
States machine and process data
the process). Control system set the Process PID controller reference. This Threshold [45.42]) is reached; the fixed pressure (or any other process
pressure (or any other process value, for example flow or level) reference value, for example flow or level) ramp starts from the pressure (or any other
Chapter 9 P. 55 (parameter Soft Fill Threshold [45.42]) is actuated through a pressure process value, for example flow or level) feedback, that is the pressure
Functions ramp (parameter Soft Fill Ramp Time [45.44]). that the system reaches at t1 when fixed speed, linked to additional speed
Once the pressure (or any other process value, for example flow or level) reference (parameter Add Speed Ref Sel [32.04]), is reached
feedback (control system checks the Process PID controller feedback) • if fixed pressure (or any other process value, for example flow or level)
reaches the pressure (or any other process value, for example flow or level) reference (parameter Soft Fill Threshold [45.42]) plus or minus a band
reference (parameter Soft Fill Threshold [45.42]) plus or minus a band defined by the parameter Soft Fill Band [45.43] is reached at (t2 – t1) <
defined by the parameter Soft Fill Band [45.43], the pressure set point parameter Soft Fill Timeout [45.41], then soft fill procedure stops and
switches to final pressure (or any other process value, for example flow or normal operation starts (Process PID controller); the system follows the
level) set point (desired for the process), in this case without a pressure (or pressure (or any other process value, for example flow or level) reference
Chapter 10 P. 104 any other process value, for example flow or level) ramp: soft fill procedure desired from the process, that can be fixed or variable (for example, from
Fieldbus is concluded and normal operation for Process PID controller started. analog input or from fixed value or from fieldbus)
• else alarm SfFillTime active (parameter Soft Fill Timeout [36.47])
In case the systems doesn’t reach the pressure (or any other process
value, for example flow or level) reference (parameter Soft Fill Threshold
Chapter 11 P. 128
[45.42]) in a timeout set using the parameter Soft Fill Timeout [45.41],
I/0 Configuration
an alarm SfFillTime (code 47, bit 14 of Alarm Word 3, AW3.14) becomes
active. The operation to be performed if this event occurs is set by
Chapter 12 P. 145
parameter Soft Fill Timeout [36.47] of the family ALARM SETTINGS
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments [36.00]. It is possible to select between the following control system
Annex P. 156 behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also
possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.

97
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.43 MOTOR PAUSE If Motor Pause function is enabled, when motor speed reference goes
Scope
Motor Pause function can be enabled setting the parameter Motor Pause below Min Speed [32.19] or when motor current goes below Motor
Chapter 2 P. 7 Enable [45.20] to On. This parameter is settable only when the Drive Pause Curr Limit [45.21] and this condition persists continuously for
Safety is stopped. Motor Pause function parameters are available in the family a time longer than Motor Pause Time Limit [45.22], then the Drive is
PROCESS PID [45.00]. Motor Pause function allows to automatically stops stopped and set in Sleep Mode. The parameter Motor Pause Curr Limit
Chapter 3 P. 8
the motor if the selected application variable (for example: pressure, flow [45.21] is used to set a percent of Rated Current [02.04] in order to define a
Programming overview
or level) is near a specific value or if the motor speed is under a threshold. threshold for the motor pause action:
When the selected application variable (for example: pressure, flow or level) • if (feedback stator current / Rated Current [02.04])* 100 < Motor Pause
Chapter 4 P. 9
drops, the motor is automatically restarted. This operation allows saving Curr Limit [45.21]
Programming tools
energy, by starting the pump only when this is required by the selected • then motor stops (the Drive is stopped and set in Sleep Mode)
application variable. When the selected application variable goes below the level established
Chapter 5 P. 16 Motor Pause function is managed by the following parameters: with parameter Motor Pause Fdb Thres [45.23], then the Drive resets
Programming levels • Motor Pause Enable [45.20] Sleep Mode, restarts and sets Run state. The following diagram shows a
and control modes
• Motor Pause Curr Limit [45.21] sequence of the operation of the function pressure control (Process PID
Chapter 6 P. 18
used to regulate pressure value) with Motor Pause function.
Quick start-up procedure
• Motor Pause Time Limit [45.22]
• Motor Pause Fdb Thres [45.23]
Chapter 7 P. 21 Motor Pause function can work also when Process PID function is not Figure 9
 .30 – Sequence of the operation of the Motor Pause function

9.43 MOTOR PAUSE

Control mode selection and settings enabled, but anyway it is necessary a process feedback (for example: pressure,
PrsPID
Chapter 8 P. 22
flow or level) connected to the feedback of the Process PID regulator:
States machine and process data
regulator PID Fdb Src Sel 1 [45.12] must be set different to Off (or PID Fdb
Src Sel 2 [45.16] must be set different to Off), for example connected to an
analog input. Note that the second feedback source selection, the auxiliary
Chapter 9 P. 55
one, is used in particular functions: PID: Input Pressure Supervision and Well
Functions
Draw Down Control; in these functions, Process PID regulator controls main
process values monitoring at the same time auxiliary process values and, if
particular conditions occur, Process PID regulator switches main with auxiliary
and vice versa; anyway, in this functions, Process PID regulator is enabled and
so it is no more the case previously descripted in which Motor Pause function
is enabled with Process PID function disabled.
Motor Pause function is active only if the following conditions are satisfied:
• Motor Pause function is enabled: the parameter Motor Pause Enable
Chapter 10 P. 104 [45.20] is set to On PrsPID
Fieldbus • Process PID function disabled or not active
• Process PID function enabled and active and parameter PID Mode Sel
[45.17] set to On/Off or set to Both
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

98
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 If parameter PID Mode Sel [45.17] is set to Continuous, then the Drive the inlet of the pump, Process PID controller switches and starts to regulate an
Scope Start/Stop command depends on the Start/Stop command only. auxiliary process variable (typically pressure or level) in order to re-establish the
Chapter 2 P. 7 correct water pressure at the input of the pump and so to prevent damages to
Safety WARNING the pump itself (due to air suction or cavitation).
With Motor Pause function enabled and Start command active (set to On),
Chapter 3 P. 8 the Drive can automatically restart the machine without the need of any Example:
Programming overview
other command. • Main process variable: water pressure at the output of the pump
• Auxiliary process variable: water level of a tank that supplies the input
Chapter 4 P. 9 WARNING of the pump
Programming tools The user is responsible for enabling this function. Nidec ASI S.p.A.
declaims any liability due to inappropriate use of this function, Make sure In normal operation, when water level is enough, that means water level
Chapter 5 P. 16 that the automatic restart of the machine will not cause physical injury is upper the threshold defined by parameter WDD Threshold 1 [45.51],
Programming levels and/or equipment damage. Process PID controller regulates the main process variable, that in this
and control modes
example is the output pressure of the pump. This operation mode is called:
Chapter 6 P. 18
NOTE pressure control mode.
Quick start-up procedure
It is not possible set the parameter Motor Pause Enable [45.20] to On if In abnormal operation, when water level is not enough, that means

9.43 MOTOR PAUSE - 9.44

Chapter 7 P. 21 the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop. In water level is lower the threshold defined by parameter WDD Threshold
Control mode selection and settings case the operator tries to set the parameter Motor Pause Enable [45.20] 1 [45.51] for a time longer than parameter WDD Timeout 1 [45.52],
to On when HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop, the Process PID controller regulates the auxiliary process variable, that in this
Chapter 8 P. 22
error DSPParEr is generated and the parameter Motor Pause Enable example is the water level, for example of a well or of a tank that supplies
States machine and process data
[45.20] is automatically reset to Off. the input of the pump. This operation mode is called: level control mode.
The transition from pressure control mode to level control is delayed by
Chapter 9 P. 55 parameter WDD Timeout 1 [45.52]; same for the transition from level
Functions 9.44 WELL DRAW DOWN CONTROL (SUCTION control mode to pressure control mode.
CONTROL VIA CONSTANT PRESSURE) In case, in abnormal operation, that means in level control mode, water
Well Draw Down Control function can be enabled setting the parameter level continues to decrease and goes below the threshold defined by the
WDD Enable [45.50] to On. This parameter is settable only when the parameter WDD Threshold 2 [45.53] for a time longer than parameter
Drive is stopped. Well Draw Down Control function parameters are WDD Timeout 2 [45.54], the Drive is stopped and set in Sleep Mode.
available in the family PROCESS PID [45.00]. Alarm WDDSleepMd (code 55, bit 6 of Alarm Word 4, AW4.06) becomes
active. The operation to be performed if this event occurs is set by
Well Draw Down Control function is used to supervise that there is parameter WDD Sleep Mode [36.55] of the family ALARM SETTINGS
Chapter 10 P. 104 enough water in the inlet of the pump, in order to: [36.00]. It is possible to select between the following control system
Fieldbus • prevent the pump from sucking air or causing suction cavitation, behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also
avoiding damages of the pump possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.
• prevent the complete consumption of a resource, for example the water
in a well or in a tank, trying to save it The Drive resets Sleep Mode, restarts and sets Run state in normal
Chapter 11 P. 128
operation, that means in pressure control mode, only if water level is
I/0 Configuration
Enough water in the inlet of the pump means that there is enough upper the threshold defined by parameter WDD Threshold 3 [45.55] for
pressure; pressure can be obtained from a water column (for example in a time longer than parameter WDD Timeout 3 [45.56].
Chapter 12 P. 145
case of a well or of a tank).
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Well Draw Down Control function uses Process PID controller. In normal Well Draw Down Control function is realized with a Finite State Machine,
Annex P. 156 operation, when there is enough water in the inlet of the pump, Process PID with relative states and transitions, explained in the previous example and
controller regulates the main process variables (for example: pressure, flow or summarized in the following table.
level), typically on the output of the pump. In case there isn’t enough water in

99
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

9.44 WELL DRAW DOWN CONTROL (SUCTION CONTROL VIA CONSTANT PRESSURE)
Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 1: Finite State Machine for Well Down Draw Control function In all above mentioned functions, the scope is to supervise that there is
Scope enough water in the inlet of the pump, to prevent the pump from sucking
Chapter 2 P. 7 Pressure air or causing suction cavitation or to prevent the complete consumption
from to Level control mode Sleep Mode of a resource:
Safety control mode
• Well Draw Down Control uses a dedicated auxiliary analog input
Chapter 3 P. 8 (typically water level or water pressure) with a complex logic (pressure
Programming overview
Pressure control mode X Threshold 1 Threshold 3
control mode, level control mode and Sleep Mode)
Level control mode Threshold 1 X / • Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure function uses a dedicated digital
Chapter 4 P. 9 input (water pressure) with a simplified logic (pressure control mode and
Programming tools Sleep Mode / Threshold 2 X Sleep Mode)
• PID: Input Pressure Supervision uses a dedicated analog input (water
Chapter 5 P. 16 In most of the case, pressure control mode means constant pressure pressure) with an average complex logic (pressure control mode, reduced
Programming levels control at the output of the pump; flow is an independent variable, that pressure control mode and stop mode)
and control modes
depends only on utilities’ request.
Chapter 6 P. 18
It is possible that the flow request from the utilities is higher than the From the moment that these functions are very similar, only one function
Quick start-up procedure
filling rate of the well or of the tank and so water level decreases, until it at a time can be enabled. The user is responsible to select the more
Chapter 7 P. 21 goes below a goes below the threshold defined by the parameter WDD appropriate for the application.
Control mode selection and settings Threshold 1 [45.51].
After a time defined by the parameter WDD Timeout 1 [45.52], the Drive NOTE
Chapter 8 P. 22
switches from pressure control mode to level control mode. It is not possible set the parameter WDD Enable [45.50] to On if the
States machine and process data
Once in level control mode, the Drive starts to regulate water level to parameter Low City Press. Enable [33.40] or the parameter In Press
water level reference, defined by the parameter PID Ref Src Sel 2 [45.15], Mon Enable [45.70] are set to On.
Chapter 9 P. 55 that can be set to a fixed value, defined by the parameter PID Fixed Ref In case the operator tries to set the parameter WDD Enable [45.50] to On
Functions 2 [45.14]. The water level feedback is configured using the dedicated when the parameter Low City Press. Enable [33.40] or the parameter In
parameter PID Fdb Src Sel 2 [45.16]. Press Mon Enable [45.70] are set to On, the error DSPParEr is generated
If water demand from utilities decreases, than Drive needs less speed to and the WDD Enable [45.50] is automatically reset to Off.
control water level; more water demand from utilities decreases, more Well Draw Down Control function is not active during soft fill procedure.
motor speed decreases, until motor reaches zero speed; at that point,
Drive cannot contrast the increase of water level in the tank, although Attention:
level control mode is active: in level control mode, in this condition (low • Well Draw Down Control function can be enabled and disabled only
water demand from utilities), output of the Process PID controller will when the Drive is stopped
Chapter 10 P. 104 saturate due to the negative speed limit set to zero (pump cannot run • in Sleep Mode, the Drive is equivalent to Drive stopped
Fieldbus reverse); water level starts to increases until it goes above the threshold • this means that enabling/disabling parameter can be changed in Sleep Mode
defined by the parameter WDD Threshold 1 [45.51] for a time defined • if Well Draw Down Control function is disabled during Sleep Mode, the
by the parameter WDD Timeout 1 [45.52]. motor immediately restart from the moment that Drive Enable and Start
The Drive switches from level control mode to pressure control mode. command are still active
Chapter 11 P. 128
Operative setting parameter procedure to run Well Drawn Down function
I/0 Configuration
Inside AD1000 there are 3 functions very similar: as in the previous example:
• Well Draw Down Control function • Enable Process PID function: set parameter PID Enable [45.01] to On
Chapter 12 P. 145
• Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure and active (see Process PID function)
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments • PID: Input Pressure Supervision • Configure reference source selection for speed controller: set parameter
Annex P. 156 Main Speed Ref Sel [32.01] to Prs PID
• Set minimum pump speed to zero (if pump cannot rotate in reverse
direction): set parameter Max Neg Ref [32.23] to 0

100
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

9.44 WELL DRAW DOWN CONTROL (SUCTION CONTROL VIA CONSTANT PRESSURE)
Chapter 1 P. 6 • Set Process PID output minimum value (that is minimum pump speed) to the desired value, for example 60 [s]
Scope to zero (if pump cannot rotate in reverse direction): set parameter PID • Set threshold to switch from Sleep Mode to normal operation, in this
Chapter 2 P. 7 Lower Limit [46.06] to 0 example pressure control mode: set parameter WDD Threshold 3
Safety • Enable Well Draw Down Function: set parameter WDD Enable [45.50] to On [45.55] to the desired value, for example 0.30 [pu]
• Set 1 pu equivalence of the main process variable; in the case of the • Set timeout to switch from Sleep Mode to normal operation, in this
Chapter 3 P. 8 previous example, set parameter User Per-Unit Press. 1 [13.11] to the example pressure control mode: set parameter WDD Timeout 2 [45.54]
Programming overview
full-scale value expressed in [bar] to the desired value, for example 60 [s]
• Set 1 pu equivalence of the auxiliary process variable; in the case of the
Chapter 4 P. 9 previous example, set parameter User Per-Unit Level. 2 [13.23] to the WARNING
Programming tools full-scale value expressed in [m] With Well Draw Down Control (Suction Control via Constant Pressure)
• Configure feedback source selection for main process variable: function enabled and Start command active (set to On), the Drive
Chapter 5 P. 16 set parameter PID Fdb Src Sel 1 [45.12] for example to AI1 can automatically restart the machine without the need of any other
Programming levels • Configure feedback source selection for auxiliary process variable: command.
and control modes
set parameter PID Fdb Src Sel 2 [45.16] for example to AI2
Chapter 6 P. 18
• Configure reference source selection for main process variable: WARNING
Quick start-up procedure
set parameter PID Ref Src Sel 1 [45.11] for example to Fixed The user is responsible for enabling of this function according to safety
Chapter 7 P. 21 • Configure reference source selection for auxiliary process variable: rules. Nidec ASI S.p.A. declaims any liability due to inappropriate use of
Control mode selection and settings set parameter PID Ref Src Sel 2 [45.15] for example to Fixed this function. Make sure that the automatic restart of the machine will not
• Set fixed reference value for main process variable: set parameter PID cause physical injury and/or damage equipment. Refer to standards IEC
Chapter 8 P. 22
Fixed Ref 1 [45.10] to the desired value, for example 0.2 [pu], that in 60204-1.
States machine and process data
this example means 20 [%] of the full-scale value of pressure set with
parameter User Per-Unit Press. 1 [13.11] NOTE
Chapter 9 P. 55 • Configure how error signal is built using the reference and the feedback: It is not possible set the parameter WDD Enable [45.50] to On if the
Functions set parameter PID Pump Type Sel 1 [45.09] to the desired value, for parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop.
example Lift (typically for regulation at the output of the pump) In case the operator tries to set the parameter WDD Enable [45.50] to
• Configure how error signal is built using the reference and the feedback: On when HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop, the
set parameter PID Pump Type Sel 2 [45.13] to the desired value, for error DSPParEr is generated and the WDD Enable [45.50] is automatically
example Force (typically for regulation at the input of the pump) reset to Off.
• Set fixed reference value for auxiliary process variable: set parameter
PID Fixed Ref 2 [45.14] to the desired value, for example 0.2 [pu], that
in this example means 20 [%] of the full-scale value of pressure set with
Chapter 10 P. 104 parameter User Per-Unit Level 2 [13.23]
Fieldbus • Set threshold to switch from normal operation, in this example pressure
control mode, to abnormal operation, in this example level control
mode: set parameter WDD Threshold 1 [45.51] to the desired value,
for example 0.25 [pu]
Chapter 11 P. 128
• Set timeout to switch from normal operation, in this example pressure
I/0 Configuration
control mode, to abnormal operation, in this example level control
mode: set parameter WDD Timeout 1 [45.52] to the desired value, for
Chapter 12 P. 145
example 60 [s]
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments • Set threshold to switch from abnormal operation, in this example level
Annex P. 156 control mode, to Sleep Mode: set parameter WDD Threshold 2 [45.53]
to the desired value, for example 0.20 [pu]
• Set timeout to switch from abnormal operation, in this example level
control mode, to Sleep Mode: set parameter WDD Timeout 2 [45.54]

101
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.45 LOW CITY OR LOW SUCTION INLET PRESSURE The pressure switch is wired directly into the Drive using one of the digital input
Scope
Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure function can be enabled setting the terminals, selected using the parameter Low City Press. Cmd Sel [33.41].
Chapter 2 P. 7 parameter Low City Press. Enable [33.40] to On. This parameter is settable If the pressure switch is active, the inlet pressure is too low and the Drive is
Safety only when the Drive is stopped. Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure stopped and set in Sleep Mode. Alarm LwCityPres (code 56, bit 7 of Alarm
function parameters are available in the family START/STOP MODE [33.00]. Word 4, AW4.07) becomes active. The operation to be performed if this
Chapter 3 P. 8 event occurs is set by parameter Low City Pressure [36.56] of the family
Programming overview
Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure function is used with low suction ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is possible to select between the following
inlet pressure. An inlet pressure switch enables and disables the pump control system behaviors: Off, Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp
Chapter 4 P. 9
system when the inlet supply is at a low demand and when running the Stop. It is also possible to connect the alarm with a digital output.

9.45 LOW CITY OR LOW SUCTION INLET PRESSURE

Programming tools
pump system in this condition will cause damage.
If the pressure switch is not active for a time longer than the parameter
Chapter 5 P. 16 Inside AD1000 there are 3 functions very similar: Low City Press. Timeout [33.42], a sufficient inlet pressure is available
Programming levels • Well Draw Down Control function and so the Drive will operate normally; if the Drive was previously in Sleep
and control modes
• Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure Mode, the Drive resets Sleep Mode, restarts and sets Run state.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
• PID: Input Pressure Supervision
WARNING
Chapter 7 P. 21 In all above mentioned functions, the scope is to supervise that there is With Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure function enabled and Start
Control mode selection and settings enough water in the inlet of the pump, to prevent the pump from sucking command active (set to On), the Drive can automatically restart the
air or causing suction cavitation or to prevent the complete consumption machine without the need of any other command.
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
of a resource:
• Well Draw Down Control uses a dedicated auxiliary analog input WARNING
(typically water level or water pressure) with a complex logic (pressure The user is responsible for enabling of this function according to safety
Chapter 9 P. 55
control mode, level control mode and Sleep Mode) rules. Nidec ASI S.p.A. declaims any liability due to inappropriate use of
Functions
• Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure function uses a dedicated digital this function. Make sure that the automatic restart of the machine will not
input (water pressure) with a simplified logic (pressure control mode and cause physical injury and/or damage equipment. Refer to standards IEC
Sleep Mode) 60204-1.
• PID: Input Pressure Supervision uses a dedicated analog input (water
pressure) with an average complex logic (pressure control mode, reduced NOTE
pressure control mode and stop mode) It is not possible set the parameter Low City Press. Enable [33.40] to On
if the parameter HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/Stop.
From the moment that these functions are very similar, only one function In case the operator tries to set the parameter Low City Press. Enable
Chapter 10 P. 104 at a time can be enabled. The user is responsible to select the more [33.40] to On when HOA Start/Stop type [33.12] is set to Pulse Start/
Fieldbus appropriate for the application. Stop, the error DSPParEr is generated and the parameter Low City Press.
Enable [33.40] is automatically reset to Off.
NOTE
It is not possible set the parameter Low City Press. Enable [33.40] to On
Chapter 11 P. 128
if the parameter WDD Enable [45.50] or the parameter In Press Mon
I/0 Configuration
Enable [45.70] are set to On.
In case the operator tries to set the parameter Low City Press. Enable
Chapter 12 P. 145
[33.40] to On when the parameter WDD Enable [45.50] or the
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments parameter In Press Mon Enable [45.70] are set to On, the error DSPParEr
Annex P. 156 is generated and the Low City Press. Enable [33.40] is automatically
reset to Off.

102
 Answer Drives 1000 9
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 9.46 LOGIC

Scope
Logic function enable to configure up to 3 logic functions that work on 2
Chapter 2 P. 7 digital signals each.
Safety • Logic function 1 defined by parameter Logic function 1 [16.40] uses
digital signal A and digital signal B
Chapter 3 P. 8
• Logic function 2 defined by parameter Logic function 2 [16.41] uses
Programming overview
digital signal C and digital signal D
• Logic function 3 defined by parameter Logic function 3 [16.42] uses
Chapter 4 P. 9
digital signal E and digital signal F
Programming tools

Each logic function foreseen the following options that can be used:
Chapter 5 P. 16 • (first digital signal) AND (second digital signal)
Programming levels
and control modes
• (first digital signal) OR (second digital signal)
• (first digital signal) XOR (second digital signal)
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
• NOT (first digital signal)
• positive edge on (first digital signal)
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Note: first signal is A, C and E respectively for each functions; second
Chapter 8 P. 22
signal is B, D and F respectively for each functions.
The source of the digital signals must be set using the following

9.46 LOGIC
States machine and process data
parameters: Signal A from ID.bit [16.45], Signal B from ID.bit [16.47],
Signal C from ID.bit [16.49], Signal D from ID.bit [16.51], Signal E
Chapter 9 P. 55
from ID.bit [16.53] and Signal F from ID.bit [16.55].
Functions
Each digital inputs can be Drive using the following parameters: Invert
signal A [14.46], Invert signal B [14.48], Invert signal C [14.50],
Invert signal D [14.52], Invert signal E [14.54] and Invert signal F
[14.56].

Using parameter Logic function alarm [16.60], it is possible to select

which of the 3 available functions (or none of them) connect to the
dedicated alarm LogicAlarm (code 42, bit 9 of Alarm Word 3, AW3.09).
Chapter 10 P. 104 The operation to be performed if this event occurs is set by parameter
Fieldbus Logic Alarm [36.42] of the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]. It is
possible to select between the following control system behaviors: Off,
Warning, Coast Stop, Quick Stop or Ramp Stop. It is also possible to
connect the alarm with a digital output.
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

103
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10 FIELDBUS It makes a wide range of communication technologies, protocols and

Scope profiles available. Among them, communication protocol Profibus DP
Chapter 2 P. 7 10.1 PROFIBUS (OPTIONAL CARD) implements a simple, quick, cyclic and deterministic data exchange
Safety between a master device and one or more slave devices.

Chapter 3 P. 8
10.1.1 INTRODUCTION
Profibus is a fieldbus initially defined by standard DIN 19245, later The AD1000 is equipped with a Profibus interface based on the PROFIDrive
Programming overview
incorporated in EN 50170. From 1999 it is standardized in standards IEC communication profile for class 1 applications (“Standard Drive”).
61158 (“Digital data communications for measurement and control -
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
Fieldbus for use in industrial control systems”) and IEC 61784 (“Digital
data communications for measurement and control”). 10.1.2 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Profibus enjoys a wide range of applicability, especially in factory and Table 10.1 sums up the main characteristics of the AD1000 Profibus
Chapter 5 P. 16 process automation, and can be used when high speed communications interface available with the optional card Eth-Profi.
Programming levels
and control modes and/or complex applications are required. Refer to AD1000 User and Maintenance Manual for further information.

10 FIELDBUS - 10.1 - 10.1.1 - 10.1.2

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
Table 10.1 - Main characteristics of the Profibus interface
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Connector Sub D 9-pin female

Chapter 8 P. 22 Transmission technology RS 485 Cable Shielded pair

States machine and process data
Transmission speed From 9.6 kBit/s to 12 Mb/s
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
Communication protocol Profibus DP Managed PPO’s 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Table 10.2 contains the main characteristics of a Profibus DP network with Table 10.3 contains the parameters of the cables used for communication.
RS485 physical interface. For the choice of the connectors to be used refer to Table 10.4.

Table 10.2 - Main characteristics of Profibus DP

Chapter 10 P. 104
Topology Linear with termination resistances at the ends
Fieldbus

Access control to the bus Token passing between master, polling between a master and its slaves

Chapter 11 P. 128
Transmission speed From 9.6 kBit/s to 12 Mb/s

I/0 Configuration
Maximum length of a segment From 100 to 1,200 m, based on the transmission speed adopted

Chapter 12 P. 145
Cable Twisted pair
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156
Maximum number of devices 32 per segment with no repeater, 126 with repeater (maximum 9 repeaters)

104
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 10.3 - Electric parameters of Profibus cables Table 10.4 - Profibus cables and connectors
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Parameter Type A cable Type B cable Type Order Code
Safety
Impedance 135 ... 165  (3 to 20 Mhz) 100 ... 130  ( f > 100kHz) 9P connector for networks ELC226056
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Capacity < 30 pF/m < 60 pF/m Cable ELC226058 o 229306

Resistance < 110 / km - Belden Profibus Data Cable 3079A

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
Ex. The following cables can be used
Conductor diameter > 0,64 mm > 0,53 mm Siemens SINEC L2 LAN cable for Profibus
6XV1 830-0AH10
Conductor cross-section > 0,34 mm2 > 0,22 mm2
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
NOTE
Chapter 6 P. 18
Strictly use the above mentioned connector.
Quick start-up procedure
For further information on Profibus refer to the above mentioned
Chapter 7 P. 21 standards.

10.1.3 CONNECTIONS
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
10.1.3 CONNECTIONS Figure 10.1 represents the Profibus network connector, highlighting the
The Profibus connector, located on the ETH-PROFI card and identified with switch for insertion of the termination resistance in the last slave line.
code J2 is of the sub D 9 pin female type; pin configuration can be seen in
Chapter 9 P. 55
Table 10.5. Special care shall be put in ensuring shield continuity, which can be
Functions
achieved laying the cable braiding bare on the metal connector (ref.
Table 10.5 - Profibus connector signals 2 of the figure); moreover, the slave connection cable shall be always
connected to the left, following the color sequence for connection to the
Signal Connector (pin) Description screw terminal board inside the connector.

Shield 1 Cable shield Figure 10.1 - Profibus connector

VP 6 Power supply voltage (+5V)
Chapter 10 P. 104
RxD/TxD-P 3 Receive/Transmit data – positive (B)
Fieldbus

RxD/TxD-N 8 Receive/Transmit data – negative (A)

DGND 5 0V (reference potential for VP)

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

105
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.1.4 LED 10.1.5 PROTOCOL

Scope
Communication status is indicated by LED DL1 on ETH-PROFI card, see The AD1000 is presented to the Profibus network as a slave, enabled to
Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 10.6. data exchange functions. Data Exchange is implemented according to the
Safety PROFIDrive communication profile.
Table 10.6 - Led meaning
Chapter 3 P. 8
The protocol used is Profibus-DP; with this standard, the message
Programming overview
LED Status Meaning exchanged between master and slave can have five structure types,
identified with codes: PPO1, PPO2, PPO3, PPO4, PPO5.
Chapter 4 P. 9 Normal communication between Master and AD1000. The The above mentioned codes define univocally, for the messages received
On
Programming tools Profibus interface is exchanging data with the Master. and sent from the Drive protocol, both message size (number of words)
DL1 - Green and position and typology of every datum present in the message.
Chapter 5 P. 16 Communication not working between Master and AD1000.
Off
Programming levels
and control modes
No data exchange underway. The types of data present in the messages are divided into two categories:
• parameterization data (PKW);
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
• process data (PZD).

Chapter 7 P. 21 The Drive control is able to manage both PKW parameterization data and
Control mode selection and settings PZD process data.

10.1.4 LED - 10.1.5

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

106
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1

10.1.6 STRUCTURE OF MESSAGES SENT AND RECEIVED THROUGH PROFIBUS NETWORK

P. 6 10.1.6 STRUCTURE OF MESSAGES SENT
Scope
AND RECEIVED THROUGH PROFIBUS
Chapter 2 P. 7 NETWORK
Safety The following tables report the structure of every message received or
Chapter 3 P. 8
sent by the AD1000 control according to the PPO used, the typology and
Programming overview
meaning of every word:

Table 10.7 - Structure of received message

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
STRUCTURE OF RECEIVED MESSAGE

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Word Mnemonic Typology and meaning PPO1 PPO2 PPO3 PPO4 PPO5
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 1 PKW1 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •

Quick start-up procedure
2 PKW2 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 3 PKW3 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •
Chapter 8 P. 22
4 PKW4 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •
States machine and process data

5 Command Word 1 PZD – Bitword for commands from network • • • • •

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
6 Speed Reference 2 PZD – Speed reference • • • • •

7 IPZD3 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •

8 IPZD4 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •

9 IPZD5 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •

10 IPZD6 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •

Chapter 10 P. 104
11 IPZD7 PZD – Configurable meaning •
Fieldbus

12 IPZD8 PZD – Configurable meaning •

13 IPZD9 PZD – Configurable meaning •

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 14 IPZD0 PZD – Configurable meaning •

Chapter 12 P. 145 1
: The meaning of every bit of command word 1 is contained in paragraph 8.4.1.
Protections and troubleshooting 2
: Speed reference is normalized to ±1 pu equal to ±16384. 1 pu is the motor maximum speed.
instruments

Annex P. 156

107
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1

10.1.6 STRUCTURE OF MESSAGES SENT AND RECEIVED THROUGH PROFIBUS NETWORK

P. 6 Table 10.8 - Structure of sent message
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 STRUCTURE OF SENT MESSAGE

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Word Mnemonic Typology and meaning PPO1 PPO2 PPO3 PPO4 PPO5
Programming overview
1 PKW1 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •

Chapter 4 P. 9 2 PKW2 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •

Programming tools
3 PKW3 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •

Chapter 5 P. 16
4 PKW4 PKW – Parameterization datum • • •
Programming levels
and control modes
5 Status Word 3 PZD – Bitword for Drive status
Chapter 6 P. 18
• • • • •
Quick start-up procedure
6 Feedback speed 4 PZD – Speed feedback • • • • •
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 7 OPZD3 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •

Chapter 8 P. 22 8 OPZD4 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •

States machine and process data
9 OPZD5 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •

Chapter 9 P. 55
10 OPZD6 PZD – Configurable meaning • • •
Functions

11 OPZD7 PZD – Configurable meaning •

12 OPZD8 PZD – Configurable meaning •

13 OPZD9 PZD – Configurable meaning •

14 OPZD0 PZD – Configurable meaning •

Chapter 10 P. 104
3
: The meaning of every bit of status word 1 is contained in paragraph 8.4.1.
Fieldbus 4
: Speed feedback is normalized to ±1 pu equal to ±16384. 1 pu is the motor maximum speed.

The meaning of configurable words, present in both messages, is selected

Chapter 11 P. 128
with the parameters described in the next paragraph.
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

108
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.1.7 PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

Scope
The parameters for communication configuration with the Profibus
Chapter 2 P. 7 network belong to family PROFIBUS [81.00].
Safety Communication enable on the Profibus network takes place through
parameter Profibus En [81.01].
Chapter 3 P. 8
The selection of the structure of the message to be adopted is carried out
Programming overview
through parameter PPO Type [81.20]; the possible settings and relevant
meanings are contained in the following table:
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

10.1.7 PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

Table 10.9 – PPO types

Chapter 5 P. 16 PPO setting Meaning

Programming levels
and control modes
PPO1 Profibus communication enabled with PPO1 type message
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure PPO2 Profibus communication enabled with PPO2 type message

Chapter 7 P. 21
PPO3 Profibus communication enabled with PPO3 type message
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 PPO4 Profibus communication enabled with PPO4 type message

States machine and process data
PPO5 Profibus communication enabled with PPO5 type message

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
Once the message type has been selected, it is necessary to assign to
every Drive the Profibus address univocally identifying it as a node of the
Profibus network; such Profibus address is assigned through parameter
Slave Address [81.02].

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

109
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.1.8 WORD SETTING FOR RECEIVED MESSAGE • Receive references;

Scope
CONFIGURATION • Receive commands for the command words.
Chapter 2 P. 7 Parameters IPZ03 Sel [81.21], IPZ04 Sel [81.22], IPZ05 Sel [81.23], IPZ06
Safety Sel [81.24], IPZ07 Sel [81.25], IPZ08 Sel [81.26], IPZ09 Sel [81.27], IPZ10 The values that can be set for such parameters are contained in the
Sel [81.28] are used to assign the meaning of configurable words of the following table, with the relevant meaning and resulting typology of

10.1.8 WORD SETTING FOR RECEIVED MESSAGE CONFIGURATION

Chapter 3 P. 8 received datum:
received message; these words can be used to:
Programming overview

Table 10.10 – IPZ code

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
IPZx PARAMETER SETTINGS

Chapter 5 P. 16 Setting Meaning Data type Normalization

Programming levels
and control modes
0 Off, Datum not used -- --
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
1 Auxiliary speed reference Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 2 Additional speed reference Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

Chapter 8 P. 22 3 Speed feedforward Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

States machine and process data
4 Command word 2 Bit significant --

Chapter 9 P. 55
5 Command word 3 Bit significant --
Functions

6 Command word 4 Bit significant --

7 Positive torque limit reference Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu

8 Negative torque limit reference Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu

9 Torque reference Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu

Chapter 10 P. 104 21 Torque feedforward Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu

Fieldbus
12 Analog output 1 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

13 Analog output 2 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 65 Process PID reference 1 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

66 Process PID feedback 1 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments 67 Process PID reference 2 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
Annex P. 156
68 Process PID feedback 2 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

110
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.1.9 WORD SETTING FOR SENT MESSAGE In case of loss of communication with the master, when the Timeout

10.1.9 WORD SETTING FOR SENT MESSAGE CONFIGURATION - 10.1.10 - 10-1-11

Scope
CONFIGURATION expires an alarm is generated (Profibus Error [36.49]); for the
Chapter 2 P. 7 Parameters OPZ03 Sel [81.31], OPZ04 Sel [81.32], OPZ05 Sel [81.33], management of this alarm refer to paragraphs 12.3 and 12.5.
Safety OPZ06 Sel [81.34], OPZ07 Sel [81.35], OPZ08 Sel [81.36], OPZ09
Sel [81.37] and OPZ10 Sel [81.38], are used to assign the meaning of During the waiting time for restoring communication, it is possible to
Chapter 3 P. 8 freeze the references and Command Word received via Profibus using the
configurable words of the sent message; these words can be used to:
Programming overview
values received before loss of communication; this can be achieved by
• Send the signals that can normally be displayed through analog outputs; setting parameter Freeze En [81.04] to On.
Chapter 4 P. 9
• Send bit significant information for identification of any intervened Once the freeze has been enabled, it intervenes based on the status of
Programming tools
hardware and/or software protections; bit 10 of CmdWd1. If the latter is On, the CmdWd and reference are
• Send bit significant information concerning Drive status; considered to be valid; if the latter is OFF, the CmdWd and reference are
Chapter 5 P. 16 • Send bit significant information concerning status of the microprocessor not considered to be valid and those valid and previously stored are used.
Programming levels
and control modes card (Basis card) digital inputs and outputs;
Chapter 6 P. 18
• Send bit significant information concerning status of the DO expansion
digital inputs. 10.1.10.1 FUNCTION FOR COMMANDS/REFERENCE UPDATE DELAY VIA
Quick start-up procedure
PROFIBUS IN CASE OF SERIAL TEAR-OFF
Chapter 7 P. 21 Any of these parameters can be associated to any process data ID, with Parameter Delay Com Restore [81.05] sets a delay in command/
Control mode selection and settings
the limitation that they shall be of Word size. reference update following communication restoring. During such delay
For the data normalization see paragraph 8.3. the previously stored commands/references are maintained.
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

10.1.10 MANAGEMENT OF LOSS 10.1.11 COMMAND WORD, STATUS WORD,

Chapter 9 P. 55
ALARM STATUS WORD
Functions
OF COMMUNICATION WITH
THE PROFIBUS MASTER Command words are used to send commands to the AD1000 through
In case of loss of communication with the Profibus master, Drive control Profibus network; for the meaning of every command word bit see
can act with different modes established through parameters Timeout paragraph 8.4.1.
[81.03], Freeze En [81.04] and Delay Com Restore [81.05]. Status words are used by the control to provide information concerning
Drive status; for the type of information transmitted and the meaning of
Parameter Timeout [81.03] is used to set waiting time on restoring the relevant logic states see paragraph 8.4.2.
communication with the master; it is possible to set a value between 0.01 Through the alarm status words the control provides information
s. and 10 s. The default value is 0.01 s. concerning Drive alarm status; for decoding of the alarm status word bits
Chapter 10 P. 104 see paragraph 8.4.3.
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

111
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.1.12 CONTROL PARAMETERIZATION VIA PROFIBUS the message sent by the master to the slave and in the message sent by
Scope
Drive configuration parameter setting can be implemented via Profibus the slave to the master.
Chapter 2 P. 7 using the PKW parameterization data of messages exchanged between
Safety master and slave (Drive). Such data are used by the Profibus master to 10.1.12.1 PARAMETERIZATION MESSAGE SENT BY THE MASTER
transmit or receive slave configuration parameter values; through PKW TO THE SLAVE
Chapter 3 P. 8
data storing of the chosen parameterization is automatically performed. Such message consists of 4 words.
Programming overview
PKW parameterization data are supported only with PPO1, PPO2 and
PPO5 type messages; each of them has got 4 PKW data available both in Table 10.11 - Structure of PKW message from master to slave
Chapter 4

10.1.12 CONTROL PARAMETERIZATION VIA PROFIBUS

P. 9
Programming tools
Word Meaning

Chapter 5 P. 16 Type of operation code:

Programming levels - PKW1 = 1 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit integer formatt
and control modes
1st word (PKW1) - PKW1 = 2 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit float format
Chapter 6 P. 18 - PKW1 = 3 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit integer format
Quick start-up procedure - PKW1 = 4 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit float format

Chapter 7 P. 21
2nd word (PKW2) Parameter ID of the configuration datum on which to perform the operation defined by the PKW1 word.
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 3rd word (PKW3) Most significant part of the processed datum (MSW). Only for operation code 3 and 4.
States machine and process data
4th word (PKW4) Least significant part of the processed datum (LSW). Only for operation code 3 and 4.

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
WARNING NOTE
For proper operation of the Drive parameterization protocol, For list type parameters, the parameter value to indicate the choice is
it is recommended that the master continues to send the message given in the relevant parameter tables under Annex A; and more precisely,
until receiving the reply from the slave. After that, the master can avoid it is the value appearing to the side of the description of the choice
sending again the message.

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

112
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.1.12.2 PARAMETERIZATION MESSAGE SENT BY THE SLAVE

Scope TO THE MASTER
Chapter 2 P. 7 This message consists of 4 words as well.
Safety
Table 10.12 - Structure of PKW message from slave to master
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Word Meaning

Chapter 4

10.1.12 CONTROL PARAMETERIZATION VIA PROFIBUS

P. 9 Type of operation code:
Programming tools If the operation requested by the master cannot be admitted, the most significant bit of word 1 (PKW1)is set to 1. The error code is written on word 3 (PKW3)
- PKW1 = 1 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit integer format
1st word (PKW1)
- PKW1 = 2 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit float format
Chapter 5 P. 16 - PKW1 = 3 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit integer format
Programming levels - PKW1 = 4 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit float format
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
2nd word (PKW2) Parameter ID of the configuration datum on which to perform the operation defined by the PKW1 word.
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 Most significant part of the processed datum (MSW).

Control mode selection and settings If the requested by the master cannot be admitted (most significant bit of word 1 = 1) the error code is written in this word:
- PKW3 = 2: Non-existent parameter
Chapter 8 P. 22 3rd word (PKW3) - PKW3 = 3: Non-existent operation code
States machine and process data - PKW3 = 4: Non-writable parameter
- PKW3 = 7: Writing attempt of single value on buffer parameter
- PKW3 = 10: Value out of range
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
4th word (PKW4) Least significant part of the processed datum (LSW).

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

113
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2 MODBUS 10.2.2 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

Scope
Tables below show the main features of the AD1000 Modbus interface for
Chapter 2 P. 7 10.2.1 INTRODUCTION both technologies available.
Safety Modbus is a serial communication protocol for a wide range of industrial
and automation applications. Table 10.13 - Modbus RTU
Chapter 3 P. 8
Drive AD1000 can be considered by Modbus communication as a slave.
Programming overview
Data exchange is implemented through the Modicom Modbus Reference Transmission technology Modbus RTU
Guide (PI-MBUS-300 Rev.J).
Chapter 4 P. 9
The communication type is master-slave in which only the master can start
Programming tools
Connector Terminal Board ME1 ÷ ME4
the transaction (calling ‘queries’). The slave responds either providing the
datum requested by the master or implementing the requested command. Data transmission method RS-485, Half-duplex
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
Drive AD1000 supports the RTU (standard on Basis board) and TCP/IP (on Cable Shielded three-pole
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
optional ETH-PROFI card, see paragraph 10.3) Modbus protocols.
Transmission speed From 300 to 115200 baud

10.2 MODBUS - 10.2.1 - 10.2.2

Quick start-up procedure
Figure 10.2 - Modbus network
Chapter 7 P. 21 300 ÷ 115200, N, 8, 1
Control mode selection and settings 300 ÷ 115200, N, 8, 2
Parity type
300 ÷ 115200, E, 8, 1
Chapter 8 P. 22 300 ÷ 115200, ODD, 8, 1
States machine and process data
Slave address 1 ÷ 247

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Table 10.14 - Modbus TCP/IP

Transmission technology TCP/IP

Connector RJ45, connector J6 on optional card.

Data transmission method TCP/IP

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Cable Standard Ethernet network

Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps

Chapter 11 P. 128 Slave address 1 ÷ 247

I/0 Configuration

NOTE
Chapter 12 P. 145
Modbus TCP/IP is available with ETH-PROFI optional card only.
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

114
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2.3 MODBUS FUNCTIONS 10.2.3.2 READ HOLDING REGISTER

Scope
Unless not specified in a different way, numeric values (as addresses, codes The function code “Read Holding Register” reads the binary contents
Chapter 2 P. 7 or data) are expressed as decimal values in the text of this section. They of maintenance registers (4XXXX references) in the slave. The broadcast
Safety are expressed as hexadecimal values in the message fields of figures. message is not supported.
Every process data can be read using 4+ID number as modbus address.
Chapter 3 P. 8
10.2.3.1 FUNCTIONS CODES For example, to read data process Status Wd 1 [52.01] the address will
Programming overview
Table below show the function code available on AD1000. be 45201. For the scaling of the data refer to chapter 8.

Chapter 4 P. 9 Table 10.15 - Available functions codes

Programming tools

Code
Chapter 5 Function Description
P. 16 (decimal)
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 01 Reads Coils Reading of one or more contiguous bits

10.2.3 MODBUS FUNCTIONS

Quick start-up procedure
Reading of one or more contiguous Holding
03 Read Holding Registers
Chapter 7 P. 21 Register
Control mode selection and settings
05 Write Single Coil Writing of one bit
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 06 Write Holding Registers Writing of only one Holding Register (single)

15 Write Multiple Coil Writing of one contiguous group of bits

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Writing of one group of Holding Register
16 Write Holding Registers
(multiple)

20 Read File Record Reading of string parameter

21 Write File Record Writing of string parameter

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

115
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2.3.3 WRITE HOLDING REGISTERS

Scope Reads the binary contents of maintenance registers (4XXXX references) in
Chapter 2 P. 7 the slave. The broadcast message is not supported.
Safety
Table 10.17 - Write Holding Register
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
Write Holding Registers
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
Modbus Register Process Data Description Unit Minimum Value Maximum Value

45106 Cmd Wd 1 Command Word 1 - - -

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 45107 Cmd Wd 2 Command Word 2 - - -
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 45109 Cmd Wd 4 Command Word 4 - - -

10.2.3 MODBUS FUNCTIONS

Quick start-up procedure
45301 Torque Ffw Torque Feedforward pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu; 32767 @ 4.0 pu
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
45302 Torque Ref Torque Reference pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu; 32767 @ 4.0 pu
Chapter 8 P. 22
45303 Pos Torque Lim Ref Positive limit of torque reference pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu; 32767 @ 4.0 pu
States machine and process data

45304 Neg Torque Lim Ref Negative limit of torque reference pu -32768 @ -4.0 pu; 32767 @ 4.0 pu
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 46002 Ext Aux Speed Ref External Auxiliary Speed Ref pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

46002 Ext Aux Speed Ref External Auxiliary Speed Ref pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

46003 Speed Reference Speed reference pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

46004 Add Speed Reference Additional speed reference pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

46005 Speed Feedforward Speed feedforward pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
46316 PrsPID Reference 1 Reference 1 for Process PID pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

46317 PrsPID Feedback 1 Feedback 1 for Process PID pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

46318 PrsPID Reference 2 Reference 2 for Process PID pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
46319 PrsPID Feedback 2 Feedback 2 for Process PID pu -32768 @ -2.0 pu 32767 @ 2.0 pu

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

116
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2.3.4 COIL LIST

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 10.18 - Coil List

Safety
Coil id Coil id
Process Data Bit Description Process Data Bit Description
Chapter 3 P. 8 (max.512) (max.512)
Programming overview
1 5201 SW1.b00 Status Word 1 21 5202 SW2.b04 Status Word 2
Chapter 4 P. 9
2 5201 SW1.b01 Status Word 1 22 5202 SW2.b05 Status Word 2
Programming tools

3 5201 SW1.b02 Status Word 1 23 5202 SW2.b06 Status Word 2

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 4 5201 SW1.b03 Status Word 1 24 5202 SW2.b07 Status Word 2
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 5 5201 SW1.b04 Status Word 1 25 5202 SW2.b08 Status Word 2

10.2.3 MODBUS FUNCTIONS

Quick start-up procedure
6 5201 SW1.b05 Status Word 1 26 5202 SW2.b09 Status Word 2
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
7 5201 SW1.b06 Status Word 1 27 5202 SW2.b10 Status Word 2
Chapter 8 P. 22
8 5201 SW1.b07 Status Word 1 28 5202 SW2.b11 Status Word 2
States machine and process data

9 5201 SW1.b08 Status Word 1 29 5202 SW2.b12 Status Word 2

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 10 5201 SW1.b09 Status Word 1 30 5202 SW2.b13 Status Word 2

11 5201 SW1.b10 Status Word 1 31 5202 SW2.b14 Status Word 2

12 5201 SW1.b11 Status Word 1 32 5202 SW2.b15 Status Word 2

13 5201 SW1.b12 Status Word 1 33 5203 SW3.b00 Status Word 3

14 5201 SW1.b13 Status Word 1 34 5203 SW3.b01 Status Word 3

Chapter 10 P. 104
15 5201 SW1.b14 Status Word 1 35 5203 SW3.b02 Status Word 3
Fieldbus

16 5201 SW1.b15 Status Word 1 36 5203 SW3.b03 Status Word 3

17 5202 SW2.b00 Status Word 2 37 5203 SW3.b04 Status Word 3

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
18 5202 SW2.b01 Status Word 2 38 5203 SW3.b05 Status Word 3

Chapter 12 P. 145 19 5202 SW2.b02 Status Word 2 39 5203 SW3.b06 Status Word 3
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
20 5202 SW2.b03 Status Word 2 40 5203 SW3.b07 Status Word 3
Annex P. 156

1/3 117
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Coil id Coil id
Process Data Bit Description Process Data Bit Description
(max.512) (max.512)
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety 41 5203 SW3.b08 Status Word 3 62 5204 SW4.b13 Status Word 4
Chapter 3 P. 8
42 5203 SW3.b09 Status Word 3 63 5204 SW4.b14 Status Word 4
Programming overview

43 5203 SW3.b10 Status Word 3 64 5204 SW4.b15 Status Word 4

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 44 5203 SW3.b11 Status Word 3 65 5106 CW1.b00 Command word 1

45 5203 SW3.b12 Status Word 3 66 5106 CW1.b01 Command word 1

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 46 5203 SW3.b13 Status Word 3 67 5106 CW1.b02 Command word 1
Chapter 6 P. 18
47 5203 SW3.b14 Status Word 3 68 5106 CW1.b03 Command word 1

10.2.3 MODBUS FUNCTIONS

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 48 5203 SW3.b15 Status Word 3 69 5106 CW1.b04 Command word 1

Control mode selection and settings
49 5204 SW4.b00 Status Word 4 70 5106 CW1.b05 Command word 1
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 50 5204 SW4.b01 Status Word 4 71 5106 CW1.b06 Command word 1

51 5204 SW4.b02 Status Word 4 72 5106 CW1.b07 Command word 1

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 52 5204 SW4.b03 Status Word 4 73 5106 CW1.b08 Command word 1

53 5204 SW4.b04 Status Word 4 74 5106 CW1.b09 Command word 1

54 5204 SW4.b05 Status Word 4 75 5106 CW1.b10 Command word 1

55 5204 SW4.b06 Status Word 4 76 5106 CW1.b11 Command word 1

56 5204 SW4.b07 Status Word 4 77 5106 CW1.b12 Command word 1

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 57 5204 SW4.b08 Status Word 4 78 5106 CW1.b13 Command word 1

58 5204 SW4.b09 Status Word 4 79 5106 CW1.b14 Command word 1

Chapter 11 P. 128 59 5204 SW4.b10 Status Word 4 80 5106 CW1.b15 Command word 1
I/0 Configuration
60 5204 SW4.b11 Status Word 4 81 5107 CW2.b00 Command word 2

Chapter 12 P. 145
61 5204 SW4.b12 Status Word 4 82 5107 CW2.b01 Command word 2
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/3 118
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Coil id Coil id
Process Data Bit Description Process Data Bit Description
(max.512) (max.512)
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety 83 5107 CW2.b02 Command word 2 106 5108 CW3.b09 Command word 3
Chapter 3 P. 8
84 5107 CW2.b03 Command word 2 107 5108 CW3.b10 Command word 3
Programming overview

85 5107 CW2.b04 Command word 2 108 5108 CW3.b11 Command word 3

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 86 5107 CW2.b05 Command word 2 109 5108 CW3.b12 Command word 3

87 5107 CW2.b06 Command word 2 110 5108 CW3.b13 Command word 3

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 88 5107 CW2.b07 Command word 2 111 5108 CW3.b14 Command word 3
Chapter 6 P. 18
89 5107 CW2.b08 Command word 2 112 5108 CW3.b15 Command word 3

10.2.3 MODBUS FUNCTIONS

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 90 5107 CW2.b09 Command word 2 113 5109 CW4.b00 Command word 4
Control mode selection and settings
91 5107 CW2.b10 Command word 2 114 5109 CW4.b01 Command word 4
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 92 5107 CW2.b11 Command word 2 115 5109 CW4.b02 Command word 4

93 5107 CW2.b12 Command word 2 116 5109 CW4.b03 Command word 4

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 94 5107 CW2.b13 Command word 2 117 5109 CW4.b04 Command word 4

95 5107 CW2.b14 Command word 2 118 5109 CW4.b05 Command word 4

96 5107 CW2.b15 Command word 2 119 5109 CW4.b06 Command word 4

97 5108 CW3.b00 Command word 3 120 5109 CW4.b07 Command word 4

98 5108 CW3.b01 Command word 3 121 5109 CW4.b08 Command word 4

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 99 5108 CW3.b02 Command word 3 122 5109 CW4.b09 Command word 4

100 5108 CW3.b03 Command word 3 123 5109 CW4.b10 Command word 4

Chapter 11 P. 128 101 5108 CW3.b04 Command word 3 124 5109 CW4.b11 Command word 4
I/0 Configuration
102 5108 CW3.b05 Command word 3 125 5109 CW4.b12 Command word 4

Chapter 12 P. 145
103 5108 CW3.b06 Command word 3 126 5109 CW4.b13 Command word 4
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
104 5108 CW3.b07 Command word 3 127 5109 CW4.b14 Command word 4
Annex P. 156

105 5108 CW3.b08 Command word 3 128 5109 CW4.b15 Command word 4

3/3 119
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

10.2.4 ERRORS RETURNED IN THE MODBUS PROTOCOL (MODBUS EXCEPTION CODE)

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2.4 ERRORS RETURNED IN THE MODBUS
Scope
PROTOCOL (MODBUS EXCEPTION CODE)
Chapter 2 P. 7 Except for broadcast messages, when a master device send a query to a
Safety slave device, it expects a response.
If a transmission is not successful, the response contains a code indicating
Chapter 3 P. 8
the type of error detected. The code are listed in the Table 10.19.
Programming overview

Table 10.19 - Error codes

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
Code Name Meaning

Chapter 5 P. 16 The function code received in the query is not an action allowed for the slave.
Programming levels 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
and control modes
If a Poll Program Complete command has been issued, this code indicates that no program function preceded it.

Chapter 6 P. 18
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not an acceptable address for the slave.
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an acceptable value for the slave.
Control mode selection and settings
04 SLAVE DEVICE FAILURE An irreversible error occurred while the slave was trying to perform the requested action.
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

120
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2.5 MODBUS CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

Scope
Modbus communication settings take place through the parameters family
Chapter 2 P. 7 MODBUS [82.00].
Safety
Table 10.20 – Modbus parameters
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
82 - MODBUS

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
Id Name Description Unit Range Access Type Control Type Visibility Level Download

10.2.5 MODBUS CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

Modbus enable
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Off [0]
Programming levels 82.01 Modbus En - RTU [1] # Def: OFF Read and Write All 2 Yes
and control modes - TCP/IP [2]
Chapter 6 P. 18
- RTU & TCP/IP [3]
Quick start-up procedure Min: 1
82.02 Slave Address Slave address # Def: 3 Read and Write All 2 Yes
Chapter 7 P. 21 Max: 247
Control mode selection and settings
Baud rate
Chapter 8 P. 22 - 300 [300]
States machine and process data
- 600 [600]
- 1200 [1200]
- 2400 [2400]
Chapter 9 P. 55 82.03 RTU Baud Rate
- 4800 [4800]
# Def: 9600 Read and Write All 2 Yes
- 9600 [9600]
Functions
- 19200 [19200]
- 28800 [28800]
- 38400 [38400]
- 57600 [57600]
- 115200 [115200]

Parity type
- None + 1 Stop bit [0]
Def: None
82.04 RTU Parity Type - None + 2 Stop bit [1] #
+ 1 Stop bit
Read and Write All 2 Yes
- Even [2]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Odd [3]
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Timeout for alarm 53
82.05 RTU Timeout
(0 = disabled)
s Def: 3 Read and Write All 2 Yes
Max: 250

Chapter 11 P. 128
Min: 0
I/0 Configuration Min Slave
82.06 Reaction Time
Minimum slave reaction time ms Def: 20 Read and Write All 2 Yes
Max: 150
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Selection of input auxiliary
Mod Exchange
Annex P. 156 82.07 Area In
exchange area (from Modbus # Def: Off Read and Write All 2 Yes
to Drive)

121
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2.6 LOSS OF MODBUS COMMUNICATION master and slave (Drive). Such data are used by the Modbus master to
Scope
If the “RTU” communication mode has been chosen, if the transmit or receive slave configuration parameter values; through PKW
Chapter 2 P. 7 communication fails, the system generates the alarm ModbusEr. data storing of the chosen parameterization is automatically performed.
Safety The action that shall generate such error is determined by the setting
chosen in parameter Modbus Error [36.53].
Chapter 3 P. 8 10.2.7.1 MODBUS PARAMETERIZATION MESSAGE SENT
Programming overview
BY THE MASTER TO THE SLAVE
10.2.7 CONTROL PARAMETERIZATION VIA MODBUS Such message consists of 4 words.
Chapter 4 P. 9

10.2.6 LOSS OF MODBUS COMMUNICATION - 10.2.7

Drive configuration parameter setting can be implemented via Modbus
Programming tools
using the PKW parameterization data of messages exchanged between Table 10.21 - Structure of PKW message from master to slave

Chapter 5 P. 16 Word Meaning

Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Type of operation code:
- PKW1 = 1 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit integer format
Quick start-up procedure 1 word (PKW1)
st
- PKW1 = 2 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit float format
Modbus PKW1 In [67.02]
- PKW1 = 3 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit integer format
Chapter 7 P. 21
- PKW1 = 4 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit float format
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 2nd word (PKW2)

Parameter ID of the configuration datum on which to perform the operation defined by the PKW1 word.
States machine and process data Modbus PKW2 In [67.03]

3rd word (PKW3)

Chapter 9 P. 55 Modbus PKW3 In [67.04]
Most significant part of the processed datum (MSW). Only for operation code 3 and 4.
Functions
4th word (PKW4)
Least significant part of the processed datum (LSW). Only for operation code 3 and 4.
Modbus PKW4 In [67.05]

WARNING NOTE
For proper operation of the Drive parameterization protocol, For list type parameters, the parameter value to indicate the choice is
it is recommended that the master continues to send the message until given in the relevant parameter tables under Annex A; and more precisely,
Chapter 10 P. 104 receiving the reply from the slave. After that, the master can avoid sending it is the value appearing to the side of the description of the choice
Fieldbus again the message.

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

122
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.2.7.2 MODBUS PARAMETERIZATION MESSAGE REQUESTED

Scope BY THE MASTER AND SENT TO THE SLAVE
Chapter 2 P. 7 This message consists of 4 words as well.
Safety
Table 10.22 - Structure of PKW message from slave to master
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Word Meaning

10.2.7 CONTROL PARAMETERIZATION VIA MODBUS - 10.2.8

Chapter 4 P. 9 Type of operation code:
Programming tools If the operation requested by the master cannot be admitted, the most significant bit of word 1 (PKW1)is set to 1.
The error code is written on word 3 (PKW3)
1st word (PKW1)
- PKW1 = 1 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit integer format
Chapter 5 P. 16
Modbus PKW1 Out [67.06]
- PKW1 = 2 Reading of required value parameter in 32 bit float format
Programming levels - PKW1 = 3 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit integer format
and control modes
- PKW1 = 4 Writing of required value parameter in 32 bit float format
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
2nd word (PKW2)
Parameter ID of the configuration datum on which to perform the operation defined by the PKW1 word.
Chapter 7 P. 21 Modbus PKW2 Out [67.07]
Control mode selection and settings
Most significant part of the processed datum (MSW).
Chapter 8 P. 22 If the requested by the master cannot be admitted (most significant bit of word 1 = 1) the error code is written in this word:
States machine and process data - PKW3 = 2: Non-existent parameter
3rd word (PKW3)
- PKW3 = 3: Non-existent operation code
Modbus PKW3 Out [67.08]
- PKW3 = 4: Non-writable parameter
Chapter 9 P. 55 - PKW3 = 7: Writing attempt of single value on buffer parameter
Functions - PKW3 = 10: Value out of range

4th word (PKW4)

Least significant part of the processed datum (LSW).
Modbus PKW4 Out [67.09]

10.2.8 DATA EXCHANGE AREA and the output area using the address 46712 reading and writing 1
to 16 words.
Chapter 10 P. 104 10.2.8.1 DATA EXCHANGE AREA CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
Fieldbus The Data Exchange Area allows to access to 16 configurable input words 10.2.8.2 WORD SETTING FOR RECEIVED MESSAGE CONFIGURATION
and 16 configurable output words in order to save Modbus bandwidth. Parameters from Area 1 Input Wd 01 Sel [87.04] to Area 1 Input Wd
The parameters for communication configuration of the data exchange 16 Sel [87.19] are used to assign the meaning of configurable words of
area belong to family EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG [87.00]. the received message; these words can be used to:
Chapter 11 P. 128
Communication enable on the Modbus network takes place through • Receive references;
I/0 Configuration
parameter En Exch Area 1/2 Config [87.01]. • Receive commands for the digital outputs of the microprocessor card;
It is possible to enable the input area only, the output only or both. • Receive values to be sent on the analog outputs of the microprocessor card.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Once the area has been selected, it is necessary to assign the input area to
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Modbus setting the parameter Mod Exchange Area In [82.07] The values that can be set for such parameters are contained in the
Annex P. 156
to “1 Data Exchange Area”. After the configuration of the Exchange following table, with the relevant meaning and resulting typology of
Area it is possible to access the input area using the address 46711 received datum:

123
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 10.23 - Data Exchange Area Parameter Settings

Scope
DATA EXCHANGE AREA PARAMETER SETTINGS
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Setting Meaning Data type Normalization
0 Off, Datum not used -- --
Chapter 3 P. 8
98 Main speed reference Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
Programming overview
1 Auxiliary speed feedback Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
2 Additional speed reference Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 3 Speed feedforward Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
99 Command word 1 Bit significant --
4 Command word 2 Bit significant --
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 5 Command word 3 Bit significant --
and control modes
6 Command word 4 Bit significant --
Chapter 6 P. 18

10.2.8 DATA EXCHANGE AREA

7 Positive torque limit reference Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu
Quick start-up procedure
8 Negative torque limit reference Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu
Chapter 7 P. 21
9 Torque reference Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu
Control mode selection and settings
21 Torque feedforward Analogic -32768@ - 4pu; 32767@ 4 pu
Chapter 8 P. 22 12 Analog output 1 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
States machine and process data 13 Analog output 2 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
65 Process PID reference 1 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
Chapter 9 P. 55 66 Process PID feedback 1 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
Functions
67 Process PID reference 2 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu
68 Process PID feedback 2 Analogic -32768@ - 2pu; 32767@ 2 pu

10.2.8.3 WORD SETTING FOR SENT MESSAGE CONFIGURATION

Parameters from Area 2 Output Wd 01 Sel [87.52] to Area 2 Output
Wd 16 Sel [87.67] are used to assign the meaning of configurable words
of the sent message; these words can be used to:
Chapter 10 P. 104 • Send the signals that can normally be displayed through analog outputs;
Fieldbus • Send bit significant information for identification of any intervened
hardware and/or software protections;
• Send bit significant information concerning Drive status;
• Send bit significant information concerning status of the control card
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
(Basis card) digital inputs and outputs;

Any of these parameters can be associated to any process data ID, with
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
the limitation that they shall be of Word size.
instruments For the data normalization see paragraph 8.3.
Annex P. 156

124
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 10.3 ETHERNET (OPTIONAL CARD) 10.3.3 NETWORK INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

Scope
The default IP address of the board is 192.168.1.1, and subnet mask is
Chapter 2 P. 7 10.3.1 INTRODUCTION 255.255.255.0.
Safety The Basis card can be connected to the Ethernet with TCP/IP protocol with While connecting the board to a network the IP address and subnet mask
the ETH-PROFI optional card. must be modified accordingly to the network configuration.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
This interface is used to connect to Basis card with DVM interface program The IP and subnet mask can be changed both with DVM and keypad

10.3 ETHERNET (OPTIONAL CARD) - 10.3.1 - 10.3.2 - 10.3.3

in order to configure the Drive. modifying the following parameters:
Chapter 4 P. 9
Refer to the appropriate user guide for these programs using.
Programming tools For IP address:
• IP Address - Octet 1 [88.11]
Chapter 5 • IP Address - Octet 2 [88.12]
P. 16 10.3.2 PHYSICAL INTERFACE • IP Address - Octet 3 [88.13]
Programming levels
and control modes The connector of network interface is the J6 connector on the ETH-PROFI
• IP Address - Octet 4 [88.14]
Chapter 6 P. 18 optional card.
Refer to AD1000 User and Maintenance Manual for further information.
Quick start-up procedure
The IP address is modified only after parameter IP Address -
Chapter 7 P. 21 Octet 4 [88.14] change.
WARNING
Control mode selection and settings
In order to avoid any possible failure to the PC Ethernet port PAY For subnet mask:
Chapter 8 P. 22 ATTENTION to the label on the ports of the board. The Ethernet • Subnet mask - Octet 1 [88.15]
States machine and process data communication port is tagged J6 on the board. • Subnet mask - Octet 2 [88.16]
• Subnet mask - Octet 3 [88.17]
Chapter 9 P. 55 • Subnet mask - Octet 4 [88.18]
Functions
The subnet mask is modified after parameter Subnet mask -
Octet 4 [88.18] change.

For the default gateway:

• Default Gateway - Octet 1 [88.21]
• Default Gateway - Octet 2 [88.22]
• Default Gateway - Octet 3 [88.23]
• Default Gateway - Octet 4 [88.24]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
The default gateway is modified after parameter Default Gateway -
Octet 4 [88.24] change.

Chapter 11 P. 128 To check the IP address of the board see parameter IP Address [88.01].
I/0 Configuration
The parameters family for addresses setup and visualization is
Chapter 12 P. 145
ETHERNET – TCP/IP [88.00].
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

125
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Table 10.23 - Ethernet - TCP/IP parameters

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 88 - Ethernet - TCP/IP

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Id Name Description Unit Range Access Type Control Type Visibility Level Download
Programming overview
Min: 0
88.01 IP Address IP address # Def: 192.168.1.1 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Chapter 4 P. 9 Max: 20
Programming tools

10.3.3 NETWORK INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

Min: 0
88.02 Subnet Mask Subnet mask # Def: 255.255.255.0 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16 Max: 20
Programming levels
and control modes
Min: 0
Chapter 6 P. 18 88.03 Default Gateway Default Gateway # Def: 0.0.0.0 Read Only All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure Max: 20

Chapter 7 P. 21 Min: 0
Control mode selection and settings 88.11 IP Address - Octet 1 IP address - Octet 1 # Def: 192 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data Min: 0
88.12 IP Address - Octet 2 IP address - Octet 2 # Def: 168 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
Min: 0
88.13 IP Address - Octet 3 IP address - Octet 3 # Def: 1 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Min: 0
88.14 IP Address - Octet 4 IP address - Octet 4 # Def: 1 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Min: 0
Chapter 10 P. 104 88.15 Subnet mask - Octet 1 Subnet mask - Octet 1 # Def: 255 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Fieldbus

Min: 0
88.16 Subnet mask - Octet 2 Subnet mask - Octet 2 # Def: 255 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 126
 Answer Drives 1000 10
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 88 - Ethernet - TCP/IP
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Access Type Control Type Visibility Level Download
Chapter 3 P. 8 Min: 0
Programming overview 88.17 Subnet mask - Octet 3 Subnet mask - Octet 3 # Def: 255 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Chapter 4 P. 9
Min: 0
Programming tools
88.18 Subnet mask - Octet 4 Subnet mask - Octet 4 # Def: 0 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes

10.3.3 NETWORK INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

Max: 255
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes 88.20 Host Name Host Name # Def: Drive Read and Write All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 16
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 88.21 Default Gateway - Octet 1 Default Gateway - Octet 1 # Def: 0 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings
Max: 255

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
States machine and process data 88.22 Default Gateway - Octet 2 Default Gateway - Octet 2 # Def: 0 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Chapter 9 P. 55 Min: 0
Functions 88.23 Default Gateway - Octet 3 Default Gateway - Octet 3 # Def: 0 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Min: 0
88.24 Default Gateway - Octet 4 Default Gateway - Octet 4 # Def: 0 Write at Stop Only All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Min: 0
99.17 MAC Address MAC address # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 6
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 127
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
11 I/O CONFIGURATION 11.1 DIGITAL INPUT
Scope
The configuration of the card I/O’s is available from programming level 2 Six digital inputs are available, of which two are dedicated (Drive Enable
Chapter 2 P. 7 onwards. and Start/Stop command) and four are programmable.
Safety Three additional and programmable digital inputs named DI6, DI7 and
DI8 are available on optional GIABA board. Refer to AD1000 User and
Chapter 3 P. 8
Maintenance Manual for further information.
Programming overview
To enable these digital inputs the parameter Expansion boards [06.70]
must be set to Input board.
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
For the external pre-arrangement and their wiring see User and
Maintenance Manual.
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
Table 11.1 - Digital input on Basis control card
Chapter 6 P. 18
Function Terminal ME Name Description

11 I/O CONFIGURATION - 11.1

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 22 DI3 Programmabke optoidolated digital inputs

Control mode selection and settings Voltage range: 0÷36Vdc
Programmable optoisolated digital inputs
23 DI4 Rated voltage 24Vdc
(referred to DI / DO ground)
Chapter 8 P. 22 Rated absorbition: 5mA
States machine and process data 24 DI5 For information about programmable digital input D13 see warning 2

I/O power reference 31 DI / DO ground Reference for programmable optoisolated digital inputs and for P24VI/O
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 27 DE Drive Enable

Optoisolated digital inputs

26 DI1-RUN Start/stop command
(referred to DI / DO gruond

25 DI2-RV Programmable digital input (see warning 1)

I/O power supply 30 P24V I/O 24Vcd-100mA digitl I/O power supply (analog through DC/DC coverter)

Chapter 10 P. 104
WARNING
Fieldbus
1) If digital input “DI2-RV” is configured through parameter DI Run/Fw/
Rv Connect. [31.10], the possible options are:
a) DI1:Run = run.
b) DI1:Run - DI2:Fw/Rv = run/stop with DI1 and reverse direction
Chapter 11 P. 128 with DI2.
I/0 Configuration c) DI1:RunFw - DI2: RunRv = run/stop forward with DI1 and run/stop
backward with DI2.
Chapter 12 P. 145 2) The “External Fault”, if enabled, can only operate on DI3
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

128
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.1.1 DIGITAL INPUT CONFIGURATION is displayed in the family DIGITAL INPUTS [15.00]. It is possible to
Scope
The programmable digital input must be configured according to settings invert the value of digital inputs from DI4 to DI8. In order to do this use
Chapter 2 P. 7 provided by functions. To use an input on a function see the chapter parameters from Invert DI4 [15.24] to Invert DI8 [15.32].
Safety where the function is explained. The combination of inputs to parameters Table 11.2 - Parameters that show the allocation of digital inputs
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
15 - DIGITAL INPUTS

Chapter 4 P. 9
Id Name Description Unit Range Access Type Control Type Visibility Level Download
Programming tools

15.01 DI1 Used by [ME26] DI1 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No

Chapter 5 P. 16

11.1.1 DIGITAL INPUT CONFIGURATION

Programming levels 15.02 DI2 Used by [ME25] DI2 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 15.03 DI3 Used by [ME22] DI3 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No
Quick start-up procedure
15.04 DI4 Used by [ME23] DI4 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 15.05 DI5 Used by [ME24] DI5 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No

Chapter 8 P. 22
15.06 DI6 Used by [ME38] DI6 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No
States machine and process data

15.07 DI7 Used by [ME39] DI7 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No

Chapter 9 P. 55
15.08 DI8 Used by [ME40] DI8 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No
Functions

15.10 CW1.12 Used by CW1.12 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No

15.11 CW1.13 Used by CW1.13 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No

15.12 CW1.14 Used by CW1.14 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No

15.13 CW1.15 Used by CW1.15 Used by # - Read Only All 2 No

Chapter 10 P. 104
15.21 Invert DI1 Inversion of digital input 1 # - Read Only All 2 Yes
Fieldbus

15.22 Invert DI2 Inversion of digital input 2 # - Read Only All 2 Yes

15.23 Invert DI3 Inversion of digital input 3 # - Read Only All 2 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 15.24 Invert DI4 Inversion of digital input 4 # - Read and Write All 2 Yes

Chapter 12 P. 145 15.25 Invert DI5 Inversion of digital input 5 # - Read and Write All 2 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
15.26 Invert DI6 Inversion of digital input 6 # - Read and Write All 2 Yes
Annex P. 156
15.27 Invert DI7 Inversion of digital input 7 # - Read and Write All 2 Yes

15.32 Invert DI8 Inversion of digital input 8 # - Read and Write All 2 Yes

129
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.1.2 STATUS OF DIGITAL INPUT Table 11.3 – Bit of digital input
Scope
The status of the digital inputs can be seen together through the process
Chapter 2 P. 7 data DI W1 [57.01]. Input Bit on DI W1 [57.01]
Safety Table 11.3 shows the relationship between bits of data process
DI1 0
and digital input.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview DI2 1
The status of Drive Enable (DE) digital input is also shown by bit 11 of
Status Word 1 (Status Word 1 [52.01]). See Table 8.7. DI3 2
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools DI4 3

DI5 4
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes DI6 5

11.1.2 STATUS OF DIGITAL INPUT

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure DI7 6

Chapter 7 P. 21 DI8 7
Control mode selection and settings
DE 15
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

130
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.2 DIGITAL OUTPUT For the external pre-arrangement and their wiring see User and
Scope
The available digital outputs are four, one is dedicated (Fault Relay) and Maintenance Manual.
Chapter 2 P. 7 three programmable.
Safety Table 11.4 – Digital output on Basis control card
Chapter 3 P. 8
Function Terminal ME Name Description
Programming overview

17 Fault NO NA
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Fault relay 18 Fault C COM Normally energized fault relay 1 A – 250 Vac

19 Fault NC NC
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes Programmable static output configured with DO1 Select
28 DO1
Chapter 6 P. 18 [16.01] 10 mA - 24 Vdc

11.2 DIGITAL OUTPUT - 11.2.1

Quick start-up procedure Programmable static output

Chapter 7 P. 21 29 DO2
Programmable static output configured with DO2 Select
[16.03] 10 mA - 24 Vdc
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 20 DO3 NO NA
Programmable relay configured with DO3 Select [16.05]
States machine and process data Programmable relay
C 1 A – 250 Vac
21 DO3 C

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions The Fault Relay output is normally at a high logic status and switches over For programmable relay digital outputs the following logic is used:
to low logic status, when a protection occurs, based on the logic: Digital Output = 0: contact open (Off)
Fault Relay de-energized = There is an active protection Digital Output = 1: contact closed (On)
Fault Relay energized = No active protection

11.2.1 DIGITAL OUTPUT CONFIGURATION (DO1 from ID.bit [16.02], DO2 from ID.bit [16.04] and DO3 from
Chapter 10 P. 104 Programmable outputs are configured trough the parameters of family ID.bit [16.06]) the ID number and the bit of the signal.
Fieldbus DIGITAL OUTPUT [16.00].
For instance, to associate the DO1 digital output to bit 11 of
Parameters DO1 Select [16.01], DO2 Select [16.03] and DO3 Select Command Word 1 (whose process data associated is 5106 Cmd Wd1):
[16.05] allow you to associate one of the signals of the selection list to the
Chapter 11 P. 128 digital output. The signals of the selection list are bits of Status Word 1, • choose in the selection list of parameter DO1 Select [16.01]
I/0 Configuration Status Word 2 and configurable word of Command Word 1. The last item the item DO1 from ID.bit;
on the list (DO1 from ID.bit on parameter DO1 Select [16.01], DO2 from • set on parameter DO1 from ID.bit [16.02] the value 5106.11.
Chapter 12 P. 145 ID.bit on parameter DO2 Select [16.03], DO3 from ID.bit on parameter
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments DO3 Select [16.05]), allows associating to the chosen output the status It is possible to invert the value of digital outputs using parameters Invert
of digital signal not available on the list setting in the following parameters DO1 [16.27], Invert DO2 [16.28] and Invert DO3 [16.29].
Annex P. 156

131
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.2.2 CONFIGURATION OF CONFIGURABLE BITS The configurable bits of Status Word 1 can be associated to digital outputs
Scope
OF STATUS WORD 1 through the item of selection list: SW1.12 – Cfg, SW1.13 – Cfg, SW1.14 –
Chapter 2 P. 7 Four configurable bits are available in Status Word 1 (bits 12, 13, 14, 15). Cfg, SW1.15 – Cfg.
In a similar way to the digital outputs it is possible to associate this bits

11.2.2 CONFIGURATION OF CONFIGURABLE BITS OF STATUS WORD 1

Safety

with a digital signals. Figure 11.1 show this configuration.

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
The selection parameters are SW1.12 Select [16.19], SW1.12 from ID.bit
[16.20], SW1.13 Select [16.21], SW1.13 from ID.bit [16.22], SW1.14
Chapter 4 P. 9
Select [16.23], SW1.14 from ID.bit [16.24], SW1.15 Select [16.25],
Programming tools
SW1.15 from ID.bit [16.26].

Chapter 5 P. 16 Figure 11.1 - Block diagram for digital output configuration

Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

132
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.3 ANALOG INPUT Refer to AD1000 User and Maintenance Manual for further information.
Scope
Two configurable analog inputs are available on the Basis control card. To enable these analog inputs the parameter Expansion boards [06.70]
Chapter 2 P. 7 For the external pre-arrangement and their wiring see User and must be set to Input board.
Safety Maintenance Manual.
Two additional and configurable analog inputs are available on GIABA and
Chapter 3 P. 8
GIABB optional boards. Table 11.5 - Analog input on Basis control card
Programming overview

Function Terminal ME Name Description

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 32 AI / AO ground 0V analog I/O’s
Analog references
37 AI / AO ground 0V analog I/O’s
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 33 AI1-

Chapter 6 P. 18
Programmable optoisolated 34 AI1+
Quick start-up procedure Programmable optoisolated analog inputs ± 10V or ±20mA
analog inputs
differential configuration
(referred to AI / AO ground)
Chapter 7 P. 21 35 AI2-

11.3 ANALOG INPUT

Control mode selection and settings
36 AI2+
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

It is possible to manage a current reference signal with range 4 ÷ 20mA, This means that the transduced signal have a value equal to 100% when
Chapter 9 P. 55 using jumpers P6 – P7 (see User and Maintenance Manual) and acting on the signal to the terminals reaches 10V (20mA).
Functions parameters AI1 Value for 0 pu [17.09] and AI2 Value for 0 pu [17.10].
See example 2. For instance, if input AI1 is used as input for the speed reference and input
parameters settings are the default ones, after setting equal parameter
The inputs range (+/- 100%) corresponds to: Max Speed (1 pu) [02.09] at a value equal to 1500 rpm, the motor
±10 V if the analog input signal is a voltage signal reaches the set value when the input reaches 10V (20mA).
±20 mA if the analog input signal is a current signal This correspondence can be modified adjusting the linear characteristic of
the analog input as illustrated below.

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Figure 11.2 - Block diagram for analog input processing NOTE
To convert input signals in the per unit internal variable, the two points of
the conversion characteristic are defined.
Please note that, if two points of the transduction characteristic are both
Chapter 11 P. 128 equal to X%, the internal value will be equal to X/100 pu.
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

133
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.3.1 ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 The following table indicates configuration parameters. Table 11.6 - Configuration parameters for analog inputs
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
17 - ANALOG INPUTS
Programming overview
Id Name Description Unit Range Access Type Control Type Visibility Level Download
Chapter 4 P. 9
Min: -400
Programming tools AI1 Percentage for 1 per-unit Read and
17.05 AI1 Value for 1 pu % Def: 100 All 2 Yes
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA) Write
Max: 400
Chapter 5

11.3.1 ANALOG INPUTS CONFIGURATION

P. 16
Programming levels Min: -400
AI2 Percentage for 1 per-unit Read and
and control modes 17.06 AI2 Value for 1 pu % Def: 100 All 2 Yes
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA) Write
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 400
Quick start-up procedure
Min: -2000
AI3 Percentage for 1 per-unit Read
Chapter 7 P. 21 17.07 AI3 Value for 1 pu
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA)
% Def: 100
and Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings Max: 2000

Chapter 8 P. 22
AI4 Percentage for 1 per-unit
Min: -2000
Read
States machine and process data 17.08 AI4 Value for 1 pu % Def: 100 All 2 Yes
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA) and Write
Max: 2000

Chapter 9 P. 55
AI1 Percentage for 0 per-unit
Min: -400
Read and
Functions 17.09 AI1 Value for 0 pu % Def: 0 All 2 Yes
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA) Write
Max: 400

Min: -400
AI2 Percentage for 0 per-unit Read and
17.10 AI2 Value for 0 pu % Def: 0 All 2 Yes
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA) Write
Max: 400

Min: -2000
AI3 Percentage for 0 per-unit Read
17.11 AI3 Value for 0 pu % Def: 0 All 2 Yes
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA) and Write
Max: 2000
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Min: -2000
AI4 Percentage for 0 per-unit Read
17.12 AI4 Value for 0 pu % Def: 0 All 2 Yes
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA) and Write
Max: 2000

Chapter 11 P. 128 17.13 AI1 Neg Range En

AI1 Option to use negative input values
# Def: On
Read and
All 2 Yes
I/0 Configuration
- Off [0] - On [1] Write

Read and
Chapter 12 P. 145 17.14 AI2 Neg Range En AI2 Option to use negative input values # Def: On
Write
All 2 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
AI3 Option to use negative input values
Annex P. 156 17.15 AI3 Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: On
Read
All 2 Yes
and Write
- On [1]

1/2 134
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 17 - ANALOG INPUTS
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Access Type Control Type Visibility Level Download
Chapter 3 P. 8 AI4 Option to use negative input values
Read
Programming overview 17.16 AI4 Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: On All 2 Yes
and Write
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9
AI1 Option to use absolute value of input Read and
Programming tools 17.17 AI1 Abs En # Def: Off All 2 Yes
- Off [0] - On [1] Write

Chapter 5 Read and

11.3.1 ANALOG INPUTS CONFIGURATION

P. 16 17.18 AI2 Abs En AI2 Option to use absolute value of input # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Programming levels Write
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 AI3 Option to use absolute value of input

Read
17.19 AI3 Abs En - Off [0] # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure and Write
- On [1]
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings AI4 Option to use absolute value of input
Read
17.20 AI4 Abs En - Off [0] # Def: Off All 2 Yes
and Write
Chapter 8 P. 22 - On [1]
States machine and process data
Min: 0
AI1 Filter Time Read and
17.21 AI1 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0 All 2 Yes
Constant Write
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 1000
Functions
Min: 0
AI2 Filter Time Read and
17.22 AI2 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0 All 2 Yes
Constant Write
Max: 1000

Min: 0
Read
17.23 AI3 Filter Time Const AI3 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0 All 2 Yes
and Write
Max: 100

Min: 0
Chapter 10 P. 104 17.24 AI4 Filter Time Const AI4 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0
Read
All 2 Yes
and Write
Fieldbus Max: 100

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 135
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.3.2 EXAMPLES If, with the same input reference, we want to bring the motor to a speed
Scope
A few examples of analog inputs configuration are given hereunder. equal to 2.0 pu, parameter AI1 Value for 1 pu [17.01] shall be set at 50%.
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety EXAMPLE 1 Figure 11.4 – Example 1 - Maximum at 2 pu
Configuration of the analog input AI1 to obtain a speed reference ranging
Chapter 3 P. 8
from 0 to motor maximum speed, having available a voltage signal
Programming overview
ranging from 0 to + 10V.

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Suppose the maximum motor speed to be equal to 600 rpm.
The two points of the transduction characteristic are:
Chapter 5 P. 16 600 rpm = 1.0 pu @ +10V (100%)
Programming levels
and control modes 0 rpm = 0 pu @ 0V (0%)
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
It is therefore necessary to set:
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
AI1 Value for 1 pu = 100%

11.3.2 EXAMPLES
AI1 Value for 0 pu = 0%
Chapter 8 P. 22 AI1 Neg Range En = Off
States machine and process data AI1 Abs En = Off
AI1 Filter Time Constant = 0 s
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max Speed = 600 rpm
Functions EXAMPLE 2
Configuration of the analog signal AI1 to obtain a speed reference ranging
Figure 11.3 – Example 1 – Maximum at 1 pu
from 0 to motor maximum speed, having available a current signal 4 ÷ 20 mA..

Suppose the maximum motor speed to be equal to 1500 rpm.

The two points of the transduction characteristic are:
1500 rpm = 1.0 pu @ 20 mA (100%)
Chapter 10 P. 104
0 rpm = 0 pu @ 4 mA (20%)
Fieldbus

It is therefore necessary to set:

Chapter 11 P. 128 AI1 Value for 1 pu = 100%
I/0 Configuration AI1 Value for 0 pu = 20%
AI1 Neg Range En = Off
Chapter 12 P. 145 AI1 Abs En = Off
Protections and troubleshooting AI1 Filter Time Constant = 0 s
instruments
Max Speed = 1500 rpm
Annex P. 156

136
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure 11.5 – Example 2 EXAMPLE 3

Scope The following diagrams illustrate how parameters AIx Neg Range En
Chapter 2 P. 7 [17.13 - 17.14] and AIx Abs En [17.17 - 17.18] need to be set based
Safety on the range you want to work with.

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
Figure 11.6 – Example 3

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

11.3.2 EXAMPLES
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

137
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.4 ANALOG OUTPUT For instance, in order to monitor speed feedback signal SpeedFdb with
Scope
Two analog outputs are available that can be configured with parameters a ±10V bidirectional signal on AO1 output, it is necessary to set 2 at
Chapter 2 P. 7 of family ANALOG OUTPUTS [18.00]. parameter AO1 Sel [18.01], and leave as default parameters AO1 Value
Safety for 1 pu (100%) and AO1 Value for 0 pu (0%).
For the external pre-arrangement and their wiring see To monitor the same signal with a current signal (0 ÷ 20mA) the
Chapter 3 P. 8
User and Maintenance Manual. parameter AO1 Value for 0 pu must to be set to 50%.
Programming overview

Table 11.7 - Analog output on Basis control card Figure 11.7 – Block diagram for output processing
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
Terminal
Function Name Description
ME
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 32 AI/AO ground
and control modes
Analog references 0V analog I/O’s
Chapter 6 P. 18 37 AI/AO ground
Quick start-up procedure
Programmable
Chapter 7 Programmable 13 AO1

11.4 ANALOG OUTPUT

P. 21 optoisolated analog
optoisolated analog
Control mode selection and settings outputs ±10V, 2 mA
outputs (referred to
(also 4 ÷ 20mA for NOTE
Chapter 8 P. 22
AI/AO ground) 14 AO2 outputs AO1, AO2)
To convert per unit internal variables to output signals, the two points
States machine and process data
of the conversion characteristic are defined.
Outputs AO1 and AO2 can also be managed as current outputs (4-20mA). Please note that, if two points of the transduction characteristic are both
Chapter 9 P. 55
In this case: equal to X%, the internal value will be equal to X/100 pu.
Functions
• Jumpers P6 and P7 shall be set (see User and Maintenance Manual).
• Set parameters AO1 Value for 0 pu [18.09] and AO2 Value for 0 pu
[18.10] as described in example 2.
• Set parameter AO1 Neg Range En [18.13] and AO2 Neg Range En
[18.14] to Off.

The output rated range is:

±10 V if the analog input signal is a voltage signal
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 0 ÷ 20 mA if the analog input signal is a current signal

In order to configure the outputs so that ±1.0 pu range of the chosen

Chapter 11 P. 128 (internal) variable be equivalent to ±10V range set parameters:
I/0 Configuration • AOx Value for 1 pu [18.05 ÷ 18.06] to 100%;
• AOx Value for 0 pu [18.09 ÷ 18.10] to 0%.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments In order to configure the outputs so that ±1.0 pu range of the chosen
(internal) variable be equivalent to 0 ÷ 20mA range set parameters:
Annex P. 156
• AOx Value for 1 pu [18.05 ÷ 18.06] to 100%;
• AOx Value for 0 pu [18.09 ÷ 18.10] to 50%.

138
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.4.1 ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 The following table show the configuration parameters:

Safety
Table 11.8 - Configuration parameters for analog outputs
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
18 - ANALOG OUTPUTS
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Id Name Description Unit Range Access Type Control Type Visibility Level Download

Min: 0

11.4.1 ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

Chapter 5 P. 16 18.01 AO1 Sel [ME42] AO1 Signal selection # Def: 1 Read and Write All 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 200
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Quick start-up procedure 18.02 AO2 Sel [ME43] AO2 Signal selection # Def: 2 Read and Write All 2 Yes
Max: 200
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: -400
AO1 Percentage at 1 per-unit
18.05 AO1 Value for 1 pu % Def: 100 Read and Write All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 (100% to get 10V/20mA at 1 pu)
Max: 400
States machine and process data
Min: -400
AO2 Percentage at 1 per-unit
18.06 AO2 Value for 1 pu % Def: 100 Read and Write All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 (100% to get 10V/20mA at 1 pu)
Max: 400
Functions

Min: -400
AO1 Percentage at 0 per-unit
18.09 AO1 Value for 0 pu % Def: 0 Read and Write All 2 Yes
(20% to get 2V/4mA at 0 pu)
Max: 400

Min: -400
AO2 Percentage at 0 per-unit
18.10 AO2 Value for 0 pu % Def: 0 Read and Write All 2 Yes
(20% to get 2V/4mA at 0 pu)
Max: 400

AO1 Option to use negative output values

Chapter 10 P. 104
18.13 AO1 Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: On Read and Write All 2 Yes
Fieldbus
- On [1]

18.14 AO2 Neg Range En AO2 Option to use negative output values # Def: On Read and Write All 2 Yes

Chapter 11 P. 128 O1 Option to use only absolute value

I/0 Configuration of signal
18.17 AO1 Abs En # Def: Off Read and Write All 2 Yes
- Off [0]
- On [1]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments AO2 Option to use only absolute value
18.18 AO2 Abs En # Def: Off Read and Write All 2 Yes
of signal
Annex P. 156

139
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.4.2 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED To assign a variable to an analog output, the code of quantity in the below
Scope
TO ANALOG OUTPUTS table must to be set on analog output selection parameter.
Chapter 2 P. 7 The following table lists the variables that can be programmed on the
Safety analog outputs. Table 11.9 - Variables that can be associated to analog outputs

Chapter 3 P. 8
1 pu value
Programming overview Code Variable Description
(engineering units )

11.4.2 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED TO ANALOG OUTPUTS

Chapter 4 P. 9 0 Off -- --
Programming tools
1 Speed Ref Demand Speed/freq reference demand from all external sources used by the Drive Per-Unit Speed [13.07]

Chapter 5 P. 16
2 Speed Fdb Speed feedback Per-Unit Speed [13.07]
Programming levels
and control modes
3 Iq Fdb Iq feedback Per-Unit Current [13.03]
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
4 Id Fdb Id feedback Per-Unit Current [13.03]
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings 5 Iq Ref Iq reference Per-Unit Current [13.03]

Chapter 8 P. 22 6 Id Ref Id reference Per-Unit Current [13.03]

States machine and process data
7 Speed Ref Used Actual speed reference Per-Unit Speed [13.07]

Chapter 9 P. 55
8 Torque Ref Used Torque reference used Per-Unit Torque [13.06]
Functions

9 Torque Ffw Actual torque feedforward Per-Unit Torque [13.06]

10 Actual Current Actual output current Per-Unit Current [13.03]

11 Actual Voltage Actual output voltage Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]

12 Vq Ref Voltage reference Vq Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]

Chapter 10 P. 104 13 Vd Ref Voltage reference Vd Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]

Fieldbus
14 Vdc DC-Bus Voltage Per-Unit DC-Bus Voltage [13.01]

15 Ia Phase current Per-Unit Current [13.03]

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration 16 Ib Phase current Per-Unit Current [13.03]

17 Ic Phase current Per-Unit Current [13.03]

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments 18 Va Phase voltage Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]
Annex P. 156
19 Vb Phase voltage Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]

20 Vc Phase voltage Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]

1/3 140
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 1 pu value
Code Variable Description
(engineering units )
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety 21 Line Voltage Fdb Voltage feedback from line Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]
Chapter 3 P. 8
22 Flux Flux ± 100% Rated Flux
Programming overview

23 Flux Angle Flux angle 360°

11.4.2 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED TO ANALOG OUTPUTS

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 24 Flux Frequency Flux Frequency Per-Unit frequency [13.04]

27 Speed Controller Output Speed controller output Per-Unit Speed [13.07]

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 28 Speed Controller Integral Speed controller integral
Chapter 6 P. 18
29 AI1 AI1 Value ± 100 % input value
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 30 AI2 AI2 Value ± 100 % input value

Control mode selection and settings
31 AI3 (option) AI1 Value (option) ± 100 % input value
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 32 AI4 (option) AI2 Value (option) ± 100 % input value

33 Raw AI1 Raw AI1 Value ± 100 % input value

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions 34 Raw AI2 Raw AI2 Value ± 100 % input value

35 Raw AI3 (option) Raw AI3 Value (option) ± 100 % input value

36 Raw AI4 (option) Raw AI4 Value (option) ± 100 % input value

41 Pos Torque Limit Positive Torque Limit Per-Unit Torque [13.06]

42 Neg Torque Limit Negative Torque Limit Per-Unit Torque [13.06]

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 50 Active Power Active Power Per-Unit Power [13.05]

51 Line Reactive Power Reactive Power Per-Unit Power [13.05]

Chapter 11 P. 128 52 DC Power Measured DC-Bus power Per-Unit Power [13.05]

I/0 Configuration
53 Idc Estimated Estimated DC-Bus current Per-Unit Current [13.03]

Chapter 12 P. 145
54 Idc Fdb DC-Bus Current Per-Unit Current [13.03]
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
55 Vab Ref Voltage reference Vab Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]
Annex P. 156

56 Vbc Ref Voltage reference Vbc Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]

2/3 141
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 1 pu value
Code Variable Description
(engineering units )
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety 57 Vca Ref Voltage reference Vac Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]
Chapter 3 P. 8
58 Speed Ffw Speed feedforward Per-Unit Speed [13.07]
Programming overview

59 Torque Ref Demand Torque reference Per-Unit Torque [13.06]

11.4.2 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED TO ANALOG OUTPUTS

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 66 Is Fdb Output phase current (unfiltered) Per-Unit Current [13.03]

67 Vs Ref Output voltage reference (unfiltered) Per-Unit Voltage [13.02]

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 68 Iq Max Limit Maximum absolute value of q current Per-Unit Current [13.03]
Chapter 6 P. 18
69 Iq Ref Norm Iqn Axis-Q current reference normalized 1 pu = Iqn Per-Unit Current [13.03]
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 70 Id Ref Norm Idn Axis-D current reference normalized 1 pu = Idn Per-Unit Current [13.03]
Control mode selection and settings
74 Speed Controller Output pre saturation Speed controller output before saturation Per-Unit Speed [13.07]
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data User Per-Unit Pressure [13.11], Flow [13.12],
Level [13.13] or Temperature [13.14] – Set 1 or
79 Actual Process PID Reference Actual Process PID Reference
User Per-Unit Pressure [13.21], Flow [13.22],
Chapter 9 P. 55 Level [13.23] or Temperature [13.24] – Set 2
Functions
User Per-Unit Pressure [13.11], Flow [13.12],
Level [13.13] or Temperature [13.14] – Set 1 or
80 Actual Process PID Feedback Actual Process PID Feedback
User Per-Unit Pressure [13.21], Flow [13.22],
Level [13.23] or Temperature [13.24] – Set 2

User Per-Unit Pressure [13.11], Flow [13.12]

81 Process PID Reference Set 1 Process PID Reference Set 1
or Level [13.13] – Set 1

User Per-Unit Pressure [13.11], Flow [13.12]

Chapter 10 P. 104 82 Process PID Feedback Set 1 Process PID Feedback Set 1
or Level [13.13] – Set 1
Fieldbus

User Per-Unit Pressure [13.21], Flow [13.22]

83 Process PID Reference Set 2 Process PID Reference Set 2
or Level [13.23] – Set 2

Chapter 11 P. 128
84 Process PID Feedback Set 2 Process PID Feedback Set 2
User Per-Unit Pressure [13.21], Flow [13.22]
I/0 Configuration or Level [13.23] – Set 2

Chapter 12 P. 145 NOTE to 10V/20 mA is obtained when the chosen variable is equal to 1 pu and the
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments The value in engineering units at 1 pu of the transduced quantity is displayed output stage gain (parameters [18.05 ÷ 18.08].) is equal to 100%.
in the parameters of family PER-UNIT BASE DATA [13.00]. NOTE
Annex P. 156
Analog outputs are updated at the switching frequency or, if it is less than or
NOTE equal to 4 kHz, at twice of switching frequency. Anyway in a time equal to or
Please consider that in the default situation an output voltage/current equal less than 1ms.

3/3 142
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 11.4.3 EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 2

Scope
A few examples of analog inputs configuration are given hereunder. Configuration of the analog output AO1 to monitor an internal variable
Chapter 2 P. 7 with range 0.0 ÷ + 1.0 pu and obtain an output current signal with range
Safety EXAMPLE 1 4 ÷ 20mA.
Configuration of the analog output AO1 to monitor the internal variable
Chapter 3 P. 8
relevant to speed feedback and obtain an output signal with range
Programming overview
± 10V at ± 1.0 pu. Suppose internal variable is the speed reference.
The two points of the transduction characteristic are:
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
20 mA = 100 % @ + 1.0 pu
The two points of the transduction characteristic are: 4 mA = 20 % @ 0.0 pu
+ 10 V = 100 % @ + 1.0 pu
Chapter 5 P. 16
0 V = 0 % @ 0.0 pu
Programming levels
and control modes It is therefore necessary to set:
Chapter 6 P. 18 AO1 Sel = 1 (SpeedCmd)
Quick start-up procedure It is therefore necessary to set: AO1 Value for 1 pu = 100 %
Chapter 7 P. 21 AO1 Sel = 2 (SpeedFdb) AO1 Value for 0 pu = 20 %
Control mode selection and settings AO1 Value for 1 pu = 100 % AO1 Neg Range En = Off
AO1 Abs En = Off

11.4.3 EXAMPLE
AO1 Value for 0 pu = 0 %
Chapter 8 P. 22
AO1 Neg Range En = On
States machine and process data
AO1 Abs En = Off
Figure 11.9 – EXAMPLE 2
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Figure 11.8 – EXAMPLE 1

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

143
 Answer Drives 1000 11
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 EXAMPLE 3 EXAMPLE 4

Scope Configuration of the analog output AO1 to monitor an internal variable How to set the parameters AOx Neg Range En [18.13 - 18.14] and
Chapter 2 P. 7 with range ± 1.0 pu and obtain an output current signal with range AOx Abs En [18.17 ÷ 18.18] depending on the desired range
Safety 4 ÷ 20mA.

Chapter 3 P. 8 Figure 11.11 – EXAMPLE 4

Programming overview
Suppose internal variable is the torque reference.
The two points of the transduction characteristic are:
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
20 mA = 100 % @ + 1.0 pu
12 mA = 60 % @ 0.0 pu

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes It is therefore necessary to set:
Chapter 6 P. 18 AO1 Sel = 8 (TorqueRef)
Quick start-up procedure
AO1 Value for 1 pu = 100 %
Chapter 7 P. 21 AO1 Value for 0 pu = 60 %
Control mode selection and settings AO1 Neg Range En = Off
AO1 Abs En = Off

11.4.3 EXAMPLE
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Figure 11.10 – EXAMPLE 3

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

144
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

12 PROTECTIONS AND TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUMENTS - 12.1 - 12.1.2 - 12.1.3 - 12.1.4

Chapter 1 P. 6 12 PROTECTIONS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1.3 NOT PROGRAMMABLE FAULTS
Scope
INSTRUMENTS Except for the External Fault, all hardware faults defined in the first alarm
Chapter 2 P. 7 word Alarm Wd 1 [52.05] are hardware protections, and cannot be
Safety 12.1 WARNING AND FAULT configured by the operator.
Most alarms, if enabled, are programmable as Faults or as Warnings. Their intervention always causes Drive disablement (pulse cutting with
Chapter 3 P. 8
coast stop) and, where provided (Table 13), the power section is also
Programming overview
See the paragraphs 4.2.9 and 4.2.10 for information on how to display
them on the keypad. disconnected.

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
12.1.1 WARNINGS 12.1.4 EXTERNAL FAULT
A Warning is a signal the Drive send to the outside through the bits of The External Fault is the only one among the hardware protections defined
Chapter 5 P. 16
words Alarm Wd 1 [52.05], Alarm Wd 2 [52.06], Alarm Wd 3 [52.07], in the Alarm Wd 1 [52.05] that can be directly enabled/disabled by the
Programming levels
and control modes Alarm Wd 4 [52.08] and the cumulative bit (bit 7) present in Status Wd operator.
Chapter 6 P. 18 1 [52.01]. The possible settings are:
Quick start-up procedure Some Warnings can anyway inhibit the passage to the following status of • Off (disable);
the control sequence. • Coast Stop;
Chapter 7 P. 21
The bits corresponding to some Warnings return to the logic state 0, after • Quick Stop;
Control mode selection and settings
their intervention, even in the absence of a reset command when the • Ramp Stop.
Chapter 8 P. 22 alarm condition is over.
States machine and process data The action can be associated only to terminal DI3 and the protection is
activated when this input goes to logic state 0.
Chapter 9 P. 55 12.1.2 FAULTS
Functions A Fault is a status always providing a protection action with motor stop
(normal, quick or free) and/or Drive stop; also switching off of the power
section can be provided.
When a protection occurs, the Drive control enters in Fault status and exits
only if no other faults are active and if the reset command arrives from the
controller/operator.
The bits corresponding to alarms programmed as Faults, and the Fault bit
(bit 3) of Status Word 1 remain to logic state 1 until the alarm condition
Chapter 10 P. 104
continues. They can be reset, if the alarm condition is over, only with the
Fieldbus
reset command.

Based on the configured action, the following protection types can be

present in decreasing priority:
Chapter 11 P. 128 • Fault with Coast Stop;
I/0 Configuration • Fault with Quick Stop;
• Fault with Ramp Stop.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
Stop reaction protections with higher priority overwrite those with lower
priority stop reactions. For further details on the stop types refer to
Annex P. 156
paragraph 8.2.

145
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 12.2 DISCONNECTION OF THE POWER

Scope
In case of protection it is possible to directly force complete power
Chapter 2 P. 7 disconnection.
Safety To do this it is necessary:
Chapter 3 P. 8
• Set the parameter Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] (family ALARM
Programming overview
SETTINGS [36.00]) to On.
• Assign to a programmable digital output the signal CTLRM (SW2.06).
Chapter 4 P. 9
This digital output must to be used for the main line management.
Programming tools

The following table lists list the hardware trips with main line control
Chapter 5 P. 16 action:

12.2 DISCONNECTION OF THE POWER

Programming levels
and control modes
Table 12.1 – List of hardware protections
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
HW Protection Description If the protection occurs
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings AC Supply No AC Supply Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On

Chapter 8 P. 22 VdcOV DC-link Overvoltage Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On
States machine and process data
IGBTDesat IGBT Power Module Fault Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On

Chapter 9 P. 55
OverHeat Drive overtemperature Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On
Functions

Short-circuit/Earth Fault at motor side based on sum current

Earth Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On
measurement

OverCur Drive Output Overcurrent Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On

PrcTimeout DC-Link Precharge Timeout Power turn-off

ExtFault External fault Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus VdcUV Bus DC undervoltage Power turn-off

VminSupply Minimum supply at power cards Power turn-off

Chapter 11 P. 128 POKFail Power Card Failure Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On
I/0 Configuration
LinePhase Line Phase Loss or measurement error Power turn-off if Power Off if HW Fault [36.65] = On

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

146
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 12.3 ALARMS LIST

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 The table below show the alarms of the Drive.

Safety
Table 12.2 – List of alarms
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
Configuration Default
Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
parameter Id action
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 01 WatchDog AW1.00 36.01 Watchdog

02 AC Supply AW1.01 36.02 AC Line Supply

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 03 VdcOV AW1.02 36.03 DC-bus overvoltage
Chapter 6 P. 18 Coast Stop
04 IGBTDesat AW1.03 36.04 IGBT Power Module Fault
Quick start-up procedure Coast
Stop (type of action is
Chapter 7 P. 21 05 OverHeat AW1.04 36.05 not configurable) Drive overtemperature
Control mode selection and settings

12.3 ALARMS LIST

06 Earth AW1.05 36.06 Short-circuit/Earth Fault at motor side based on sum current measurement
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data 07 OverCur AW1.06 36.07 Drive Output Overcurrent

08 PrcTimeout AW1.07 36.08 DC-Link Precharge Timeout

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
Off
Coast Stop External Fault.
09 ExtFault AW1.08 36.09 Off
Quick Stop If enabled the external fault is associated with DI3 digital input.
Ramp Stop

10 -- AW1.09 36.10 Reserved

11 VdcUV AW1.10 36.11 DC-bus undervoltage

Chapter 10 P. 104
12 VminSupply AW1.11 36.12 Minimum supply at power cards
Fieldbus Coast Stop
Coast
13 POKFail AW1.12 36.13 Power Card Failure
Stop (type of action is
not configurable)
14 -- AW1.13 36.14 Reserved
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
15 -- AW1.14 36.15 Reserved

Chapter 12 P. 145 16 LinePhase AW1.15 36.16 Line Phase Loss or measurement error
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/4 147
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Configuration Default
Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
parameter Id action
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Off
Coast Stop
Chapter 3 P. 8 17 MotorOL AW2.00 36.17 Coast Stop Quick Stop Motor overload limit exceeded
Programming overview Ramp Stop
Warning
Chapter 4 P. 9
Coast Stop
Programming tools
Quick Stop
18 ConvOL AW2.01 36.18 Coast Stop Drive overload limit exceeded
Ramp Stop
Warning
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 19 -- AW2.02 36.19 Off Reserved
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure 20 -- AW2.03 36.20 Off Reserved

Chapter 7 P. 21 21 Underload AW2.04 36.21 Warning Reserved

Control mode selection and settings Off

12.3 ALARMS LIST

22 NoFlux AW2.05 36.22 Warning Coast Stop Motor flux-up exceeded configured timeout (see par. 9.17)
Chapter 8 P. 22 Quick Stop
States machine and process data 23 MaxCurLim AW2.06 36.23 Off Ramp Stop Motor current exceeded configured threshold (*)
Warning
24 SpeedDev AW2.07 36.24 Warning Motor speed error between ref. and fdb. is out of tolerance (see. par. 9.19) (*)
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
25 OverSpeed AW2.08 36.25 Coast Stop Motor Overspeed (*)

26 -- AW2.09 36.26 Off Reserved

Coast Stop
27 DSPInitEr AW2.10 36.27 Coast Stop Data configuration error during initialization
(type of action is
not configurable)

Chapter 10 P. 104 28 DSPParEr AW2.11 36.28 Warning Data configuration error during parameter change
Fieldbus
29 UVCtrlLim AW2.12 36.29 Off Off DC-bus voltage < UV Control Limit
Coast Stop
30 OVCtrlLim AW2.13 36.30 Warning Quick Stop DC-bus voltage > OV Control Limit (*)
Chapter 11 P. 128 Ramp Stop
31 -- AW2.14 36.31 Off Warning Reserved
I/0 Configuration

32 ADCAutoCal AW2.15 36.32 Coast Stop ADC auto-calibration error

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/4 148
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Configuration Default
Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
parameter Id action
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety Off
33 FlyStartEr AW3.00 36.33 Coast Stop Coast Stop FlyStart search failed
Chapter 3 P. 8
Warning
Programming overview

34 -- AW3.01 36.34 Off Reserved

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 35 -- AW3.02 36.35 Off Reserved

36 -- AW3.03 36.36 Off Reserved

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 37 -- AW3.04 36.37 Off Reserved
Chapter 6 P. 18
38 -- AW3.05 36.38 Off Reserved
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21 39 Mon1Alarm AW3.06 36.39 Off

Analog Monitor, compare analog input with a threshold
and a configurable logic
Control mode selection and settings

12.3 ALARMS LIST

Chapter 8 P. 22 40 Mon2Alarm AW3.07 36.40 Off Off Analog Monitor, compare analog input with a threshold
States machine and process data Coast Stop and a configurable logic
Quick Stop
41 AI Loss AW3.08 36.41 Warning Ramp Stop Analog Command Loss
Chapter 9 P. 55 Warning
Functions 42 LogicAlarm AW3.09 36.42 Off Logic, one of the three possible configurable logic function is active

43 GWMaxTime AW3.09 36.43 Coast Stop Bus Drop and Grid Waiting

44 -- AW3.11 36.44 Off Reserved

45 -- AW3.12 36.45 Off Reserved

46 PrPidFdbLs AW3.13 36.46 Warning Process PID: Analog Feedback Loss, monitor process feedback
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus 47 SfFillTime AW3.14 36.47 Warning Soft Fill, sequence timeout

48 -- AW3.15 (36.48) Off Reserved

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/4 149
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope Configuration Default
Code Name Word.bit Possible actions Description
parameter Id action
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety 49 ProfiEr AW4.00 36.49 Coast Stop Profibus error
Off
Coast Stop
Chapter 3 P. 8
50 ModbusEr AW4.01 36.50 Coast Stop Quick Stop Modbus slave error
Programming overview
Ramp Stop
51 BadPar AW4.02 36.51 Off Warning Bad parameter (out of range)
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Coast Stop
Quick Stop
52 MCUDSPTout AW4.03 36.52 Coast Stop MCU ➡ DSP Timout fail (from ETH-PROFI board)
Ramp Stop
Chapter 5 P. 16 Warning
Programming levels
and control modes
53 MCUDSPSync AW4.04 36.53 Warning MCU ➡ DSP Synchronization fail (from ETH-PROFI board)
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure 54 FrostProt AW4.05 36.54 Warning Frost Protection, monitor temperature

Chapter 7 P. 21
55 WDDSleepMd AW4.06 36.55 Warning Well Draw Down Sleep Mode
Control mode selection and settings

12.3 ALARMS LIST

Chapter 8 P. 22 56 LwCityPres AW4.07 36.56 Warning Low City or Low Suction Inlet Pressure, monitor inlet pressure switch
States machine and process data
57 MotorSwitch AW4.08 36.57 Warning Motor Switch, monitor status of the switch between Drive and motor
Off
Chapter 9 P. 55 58 FdbMonitor AW4.09 36.58 Warning Coast Stop Process PID: Feedback Supervision, monitor process feedback threshold
Functions Quick Stop
59 inPresMon1 AW4.10 36.59 Warning Ramp Stop Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision, monitor inlet pressure threshold 1
Warning
60 inPresMon2 AW4.11 36.60 Coast Stop Process PID: Input Pressure Supervision, monitor inlet pressure threshold 2

61 AutoClnCur AW4.12 36.61 Warning Auto-Cleaning Current Threshold

62 -- AW4.13 36.62 Off Reserved

Chapter 10 P. 104 63 -- AW4.14 36.63 Off Reserved

Fieldbus
64 -- AW4.15 36.64 Off Reserved

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/4 150
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 12.4 FAULT HISTORY 12.5.1 RESET PROCEDURES

Scope
Each First Fault is recorded within a 30 items circular buffer. Where in the following table a Reset procedure is requested, proceed as
Chapter 2 P. 7 The items of this buffer are displayed by the family FAULT HISTORY indicated below.
Safety [59.00]. If the performed operation is not successful, go on with the following one.
Chapter 3 P. 8
The index of the last fault occurred is show by Fault Log Current Index • Pressing key [Reset] on the keypad.
Programming overview
[59.66]. • Pressing pushbutton Reset SW1 on the card or removing auxiliary power
supply: this operation excludes power supply to the AD1000 control card
Chapter 4 P. 9
Cleaning of the buffer is performed by setting parameter Clear Fault Log and allows its restart.
Programming tools
[59.65] to Clear Log. After the cleaning the system set the parameter • Replacing the card.
to Off. • Getting in touch with Service.
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

12.4 FAULT HISTORY - 12.5 - 12.5.1

Chapter 6 P. 18
12.5 TROUBLESHOOTING
Quick start-up procedure
WARNING
Chapter 7 P. 21 Perform all checks relevant to equipment or motor windings wiring
Control mode selection and settings conditions (insulation) with no voltage applied to power circuits and after
Chapter 8 P. 22 a waiting period (at least 10 seconds) to allow for condenser battery
States machine and process data discharging.

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

151
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 12.5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table 12.3 – Troubleshooting

Safety
ID Name Description/Cause Solution
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
01 Watchdog Controller error. Start reset procedures.

Chapter 4 P. 9 02 AC Supply No power supply. Check power supply on the terminals of AD1000 and power fuses, if present.
Programming tools
Deceleration time is too short. Increase deceleration time.
Overvoltage on DC bus: the DC bus voltage instantaneous If the braking chopper is present, check:
Chapter 5 P. 16 03 VdcOV
value exceeds the protection trip threshold. • Braking resistor;
Programming levels
and control modes • Braking unit fuse.
Chapter 6 P. 18
IGBT driving abnormality, IGBT desaturation, power fault Check IGBTs and firing circuits power supplies.
Quick start-up procedure

12.5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
04 IGBTDesat of firing circuits, defective operation detected on a firing Sometimes this protection can occur due to overcurrent; in this case refer to what
Chapter 7 P. 21 circuit. is indicated for the Fault OverCur.
Control mode selection and settings
The normally closed contacts of thermal sensors are placed in series and monitored
Overheat of one or more Drive dissipators detected by
Chapter 8 P. 22 05 OverHeat
thermal switch (OH).
by control diagnostics as one sensor only.
Check proper operation of the cooling system.
States machine and process data

Short circuit/Earth discharge through the frame. The instan-

A loss of insulation occurred in either connection cables or motor windings. The protection
Chapter 9 P. 55 06 Earth taneous value of the sum of Drive output currents excee-
can trip only if an output phase is connected to earth at any point.
Functions
ded the protection trip threshold.

• Check that there is neither short circuit between motor phases nor a fault to the grounded
phase;
• Check wiring and proper operation of the encoder and its mechanical coupling
07 OverCur Overcurrent at Drive output. (only for the FOC control);
• Check that the acceleration ramp time is not too short;
• Check the upper limits of torque reference and torque current.

Chapter 10 P. 104 • No pre-charge circuit power supply;

Fieldbus • Check auxiliary power supply (220 - 440 V);
08 PrcTimeout Timeout on DC bus pre-charge. • Check that the DC bus voltage value is not null after sending the pre-charge command;
• Check on the keypad that parameter AC Input Voltage [06.24] has been set to an
adequate value.
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration Check:
External protection.
09 ExtFault • status of the contacts connected to the terminal board to implement such logic input;
The dedicated digital input (DI3) is at a low logic level.
Chapter 12 P. 145 • any other external protections active.
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/4 152
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope ID Name Description/Cause Solution

Chapter 2 P. 7 Undervoltage on the DC bus.

Safety The DC bus voltage instantaneous value decreased below Check the value of DC bus voltages measured by voltage transducers controlling VDC
11 VdcUV
the set threshold value with value set on DC Undervolt parameters on the keypad display (in “Monitor” mode).
Chapter 3 P. 8 Level [12.03].
Programming overview
• If the power cards are powered by DC bus check the value of DC bus voltages.
12 VminSupply Minimum supply at power cards
Chapter 4 P. 9 • If the power cars are powered by an auxiliary power supply check the auxiliary power
supply and the fuses.
Programming tools

13 POKFail Power Card Failure If it occurs on its own get in touch with Service.
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels 16 LinePhase No input phase or measurement error. A power supply phase is missing.Check power connection to the Drive.
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 The motor worked under overload conditions for a period of time longer than the maximum
17 MotorOl Motor overload limit exceeded.
Quick start-up procedure value allowed.

12.5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
Chapter 7 P. 21 The Drive worked under overload conditions for a period of time longer than
18 ConvOI Drive overload limit exceeded.
Control mode selection and settings the maximum value allowed.

Chapter 8 P. 22
The motor worked under underload conditions for a period of time longer than the
States machine and process data 21 Underload Motor underload limit exceeded.
maximum value allowed.

Chapter 9 P. 55 22 NoFlux Fluxing timeout exceeded (see par. 9.17).

The fluxing operation did not terminate within the time set in parameter Flux-up
Timeout [33.02].
Functions

23 MaxCurLim Maximum motor current threshold exceeded. Motor instantaneous current exceeded the value set in parameter Max Current [02.08].

The error between speed reference and feedback exceeded the value set at parameter
Comparison between reference and speed feedback out
24 SpeedDev Speed Deviation Error [32.24] for a period of time longer than the one set in parameter
of tolerance (see par. 9.19).
Speed Deviation Time [32.25].

25 OverSpeed Motor overspeed. Motor instantaneous speed exceeded the value set in parameter Max Speed [02.07].

Chapter 10 P. 104 27 DSPInitEr Error during control card initialization.

Check process datum Bad Par [64.07] to know the ID of the wrong parameter.
Fieldbus
Check microprocessor card and possibly start Reset procedures.
28 DSPParEr Configuration error during parameter modification.

The DC bus voltage instantaneous value decreased below the value set in parameter DC UV
29 UVCtrlLim Vdc < DC UV Control Level [12.15].
Chapter 11 P. 128 Control Level [12.15] (see par. 9.12).
I/0 Configuration
The DC bus voltage instantaneous value exceeded the value set in parameter DC OV
30 OVCtrlLim Vdc > DC OV Control Level [12.04].
Control Level [12.04] (see par. 9.13).
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/4 153
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope ID Name Description/Cause Solution

Chapter 2 P. 7 32 AdcAutoCal ADC auto-calibration error If it occurs on its own get in touch with Service.
Safety
33 FlystartEr Flystar Error The flystart function has failed to hook up the motor in rotation
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
Analog input compared with threshold respect
39 Mon1Alarm Check parameters and signals related to Analog Monitor function
the configured logic
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Analog input compared with threshold respect
40 Mon2Alarm Check parameters and signals related to Analog Monitor function
the configured logic

Chapter 5 P. 16 41 AI Loss Analog input loss (AI1, AI2, AI3 or AI4) Check parameters and signals related to AI Loss function.
Programming levels
and control modes
Logic, one of the three possible configurable logic function
Chapter 6 P. 18 42 LogicAlarm
is active
Check parameters and signals related to Logic function
Quick start-up procedure

12.5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
Check parameters related to Bus Drop & Grid Waiting function. Check AC Supply
Chapter 7 P. 21 43 GWMaxTime Grid waiting maximum time.
and DC-bus voltage.
Control mode selection and settings

Check parameters and signals related to Process PID function.

Chapter 8 P. 22 46 PrPidFdbLs Process PID feedback loss
Check analog inputs signals used as feedback for Process PID.
States machine and process data

Check parameters related to Soft Fill function.

47 SfFillTime Soft fill time
Chapter 9 P. 55
The Process PID feedback didn’t reach the preconfigured threshold within the timeout.
Functions
Check:
• The status of the Master that shall be active.
49 ProfibusEr Profibus communication error • Check that the Profibus connection cable between the AD1000 and the network master is
not damaged.
• Check coherence between Profibus node setting, parameter Slave Address [81.02], and
the Drive serial address sent by the network master.

Check:
Chapter 10 P. 104 • The status of the Master that shall be active.
Fieldbus 50 ModbusEr Modbus communication error • Check that the Modbus connection cable between the AD1000 and the network master is
not damaged.
• Check coherence between Modbus node setting, parameter Slave Address [82.02], and
the Drive serial address sent by the network master.
Chapter 11 P. 128
51 BadPar Parameter error (out of range) Check process datum Bad Par [64.07] to know the ID of the wrong parameter.
I/0 Configuration

52 MCUDSPTout MCU ➡ DSP Timeout Check if the ETH_PROFI card is properly installed on the Basis card.
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting 53 MCUDSPSync MCU DSP Synchronization fail Start reset procedures
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/4 154
 Answer Drives 1000 12
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope ID Name Description/Cause Solution

Chapter 2 P. 7 54 FrostProt Frost protection function activated Check parameters related to Frost Protection function and the water temperature.
Safety
The Drive is in sleep mode due to Well draw down
Chapter 3 P. 8 55 WDDSleepMd
function request.
Check parameters related to Well Draw Down Control function and the water level.
Programming overview

56 LwCityPres Low city pressure alarm Check parameters related to Low City Pressure function and the inlet pressure of the pump.
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Check parameters related to Motor Switch function and the status of hardware related
57 MotrSwitch Motor switch activated
to Motor Switch.

Chapter 5 P. 16
58 FdbMonitor PID Feedback monitor or PID feedback supervision error
Check parameters related to PID Feedback Supervision.
Programming levels Check analog inputs signals used as feedback for Process PID.
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Check parameters related to PID Input Pressure Supervision.

59 inPresMon1 Input pressure monitor 1 alarm
Quick start-up procedure Check analog inputs signals used as feedback (set 2) for Process PID.

12.5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
Chapter 7 P. 21 Check parameters related to PID Input Pressure Supervision.
Control mode selection and settings 60 inPresMon2 Input pressure monitor 2 trip
Check analog inputs signals used as feedback (set 2) for Process PID.

Chapter 8 P. 22
When Auto-Cleaning function is enabled, the motor worked under preconfigured load
States machine and process data 61 AutoClnCur Auto-cleaning in current mode activated
conditions for a period of time longer than the maximum value allowed.

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/4 155
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 ANNEX A PARAMETERS LISTS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety
A-1 INDUCTION MOTOR
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
2 - INDUCTION MOTOR

Access Control Visibility

Chapter 4 P. 9 Id Name Description Unit Range
Type Type Level
Download
Programming tools

Min: 0.1
Read and Scalar;
Chapter 5 P. 16 02.01 Rated Power Motor rated power kW Def: 15
Write Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Programming levels Max: 8000
and control modes

ANNEX A PARAMETERS LISTS - A-1

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0.134
Read and Scalar;
Quick start-up procedure 02.91 Rated Power Motor rated power HP Def: 20.115
Write Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Max: 10728.176
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: 2
Write at Scalar;
02.02 Poles Motor number of poles # Def: 4
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 16
States machine and process data
Min: 0.1
Write at Scalar;
02.03 Rated Voltage Motor RMS rated voltage V Def: 400
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 700
Functions
Min: 0.1
Write at Scalar;
02.04 Rated Current Motor RMS rated current A Def: 30
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Max: 8000

Min: 1
Write at Scalar;
02.05 Rated Speed (with slip) Motor rated speed rpm Def: 1465
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Max: 12000

Min: 10
Chapter 10 P. 104 02.06 Rated Freq Motor rated frequency Hz Def: 50
Write at Scalar;
1 Yes
Stop Only Vector; Sls
Fieldbus Max: 400

Min: 0.1
Read and Scalar;
02.07 Power Factor Motor rated power factor # Def: 0.8
Write Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128 Max: 0.99
I/0 Configuration
Min: 0
Read and Scalar;
02.08 Max Current Limit Motor maximum RMS current A Def: 60 1 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145 Max: 16000
Write Vector; Sls
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
Min: 1
Write at Scalar;
Annex P. 156 02.09 Max Speed (1 pu) Motor absolute maximum operative speed rpm Def: 2000
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Max: 12000

1/2 156
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 2 - INDUCTION MOTOR
Chapter 2 P. 7
Access Control Visibility
Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Any inductance connected in series with Read and Scalar;
02.11 L in series
the motor
mH Def: 0
Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Max: 1000
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Stator phase resistance in T-equivalent circuit Read and Scalar;
02.12 T-Model Rs
model (cold)
mOhm Def: 0
Write Vector; Sls
3 Yes
Max: 10000
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Rotor phase resistance in T-equivalent circuit Read and Scalar;
02.13 T-Model Rr mOhm Def: 0 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 model (cold)
Max: 10000
Write Vector; Sls
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0

A-1 INDUCTION MOTOR

Chapter 7 P. 21
02.14 T-Model Lm
Phase magnetizing inductance in T-equivalent
mH Def: 0
Read and Scalar;
3 Yes
Control mode selection and settings circuit model Write Vector; Sls
Max: 1000

Chapter 8 P. 22
Min: 0
States machine and process data Stator phase leakage inductance in T-equivalent Read and Scalar;
02.15 T-Model Lls
circuit model
mH Def: 0
Write Vector; Sls
3 Yes
Max: 1000
Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0
Functions Rotor phase leakage inductance in T-equivalent Read and Scalar;
02.16 T-Model Llr
circuit model
mH Def: 0
Write Vector; Sls
3 Yes
Max: 1000

Min: 1
Scalar;
02.17 Sinchro Speed Motor base/synchronous speed at rated frequency rpm Def: 1500 Read Only
Vector; Sls
2 No
Max: 6000

Min: 0
Scalar;
02.18 Max Freq (1 pu) Motor frequency at maximum speed Hz Def: 66 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Chapter 10 P. 104 Max: 400
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Scalar;
02.19 Rated Slip Freq Motor rated slip frequency Hz Def: 1.2 Read Only
Vector; Sls
2 No
Max: 40

Chapter 11 P. 128 Min: 0

Scalar;
I/0 Configuration 02.20 Rated Torque Motor rated torque Nm Def: 200 Read Only
Vector; Sls
2 No
Max: 1000000
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting Min: 0
instruments Def: 147.512 Scalar;
02.92 Rated Torque Motor rated torque lb*ft
Max: 737562.149
Read Only
Vector; Sls
2 No
Annex P. 156

2/2 157
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-2 DRIVE

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 6 - Drive
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Write at Scalar;
06.01 Drive Size Selection of the Drive size # Def: Undefined 1 Yes
Chapter 4 P. 9 Stop Only Vector; Sls
Programming tools
Overload Class
Write at Scalar;
06.08 Overload Class - 110 [110] % Def: 110
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16 - 150 [150]
Programming levels
and control modes
Min: 1
Scalar;
Chapter 6 P. 18 06.20 Rated Output Current Drive rated RMS output current A Def: 10 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Quick start-up procedure Max: 10000

Chapter 7 P. 21
Rated RMS AC supply voltage of Drive used
Min: 180
Write at Scalar;
Control mode selection and settings 06.24 AC Supply Voltage
to define the per-unit DC-bus voltage
V Def: 400
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Max: 792
Chapter 8 P. 22
Output switching frequency

A-2 DRIVE
States machine and process data
- 1500 [1500]
- 2000 [2000]
Write at Scalar;
Chapter 9 P. 55 06.25 Switching Freq - 3000 [3000] Hz Def: 2000
Stop Only Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Functions - 4000 [4000]
- 6000 [6000]
- 8000 [8000]

Reverse the output polarity internally switching

the UVW phasing to UWV Write at Scalar;
06.28 Phase Reverse
- U V W [0]
# Def: U V W
Stop Only Vector; Sls
2 Yes
- U W V [1]

Min: 300
Chapter 10 P. 104 06.31 Per-Unit Vdc
DC-bus per-unit voltage (sqrt(2)
• AC Supply Voltage)
V Def: 566
Read and
Write
Scalar;
Vector; Sls
2 No
Fieldbus Max: 6000

Selection of expansion board

Write at
06.70 Expansion boards - None [0] # Def: None
Stop Only
All 1 Yes
- Input board [1]
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

158
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-3 MOTOR ID 1

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 7 - MOTOR ID 1
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Selects the type of motor identification

Chapter 4 P. 9 07.01 Static Test ID 1
- Test Done [0]
- Test On [1]
# Def: Use eq. Circuit data
Write at
Stop Only
Scalar;
Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Programming tools
- Use eq. Circuit data [2]

Chapter 5 P. 16 Voltage drop across equivalent leakage

Min: 0.05
Read and Scalar;
Programming levels 07.02 Voltage Drop Over Ls
inductance (IM motor) at rated motor current
pu Def: 0.15
Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
and control modes Max: 2
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Min: 0.001
Voltage drop across the stator resistance at rated Read and Scalar;
07.03 Voltage Drop Over Rs
motor current
pu Def: 0.01
Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Chapter 7 P. 21 Max: 0.9
Control mode selection and settings
Min: 0

A-3 MOTOR ID 1
Read and Scalar;
Chapter 8 P. 22 07.04 Dead Time Comp Drive dead time compensation us Def: 0
Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
States machine and process data Max: 20

Min: 0.001
Chapter 9 P. 55 07.05 Stator Time Constant Stator time constant s Def: 0.006 Read Only Vector; Sls 2 No
Functions Max: 2

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

159
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-4 INERTIA ID

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 10 - INERTIA ID
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Enable torque step test for system inertia

Chapter 4 P. 9 identification (suitable for linear loads with
Write at
Programming tools
10.01 Inertia ID constant inertia) # Def: Test Done/Manual Set
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- Test Done/Manual Set [0]
- Test On [1]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: -0.5
Speed to reach to trigger the inertia Read
and control modes 10.02 Test Start Speed
identification test
pu Def: 0.1
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 0.5
Quick start-up procedure
Min: -1
Speed to reach to finish the inertia Read
Chapter 7 P. 21 10.03 Test End Speed
identification test
pu Def: 0.5
and Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings
Max: 1

Chapter 8

A-4 INERTIA ID
P. 22 Acceleration time of the whole system from Min: 0.01
Read
States machine and process data 10.04 Inertia Time Constant 0 to motor base speed with motor rated s Def: 0.1
and Write
All 2 Yes
torque applied Max: 999

Chapter 9 P. 55
Measured damping factor of motor and load
Min: 0
Read
Functions 10.05 Damping
(1 pu damping = Tn[N*m]/Wn[rad/s])
pu Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 10

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

160
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-5 DC-BUS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 12 - DC-BUS
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Reaction for DC-bus Overvoltage management

Chapter 4 P. 9 12.01 DC Overvolt Mng
- Off [0]
- Brake Chopper Control [1]
# Def: OV Control
Read
and Write
Scalar;
Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Programming tools
- OV Control [2]

Chapter 5 P. 16 Reaction for DC-bus Undervoltage management

Read Scalar;
Programming levels 12.02 DC Undervolt Mng - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
and control modes - UV Control [1]
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Min: 0.7
Read Scalar;
12.03 DC UV Trip Level DC-bus threshold for Undervoltage protection pu Def: 0.7
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Chapter 7 P. 21 Max: 0.85
Control mode selection and settings
Min: 0.7
Read Scalar;
Chapter 8 P. 22 12.07 DC Precharge Level Vdc threshold for the end of DC-Bus precharging pu Def: 0.8
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes

A-5 DC-BUS
States machine and process data Max: 1.2

Min: 500
Read Scalar;
Chapter 9 P. 55 12.08 Precharge Delay Delay before closing end-precharge contactor ms Def: 2000
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Functions Max: 10000

Min: 100
Read Scalar;
12.09 Precharge Cont Delay Precharge Contactor Closing Delay ms Def: 1000
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Max: 10000

Min: 0.7
Read Scalar;
12.15 DC UV Control Limit DC-Bus threshold for UV Control Limit alarm pu Def: 0.78
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Max: 0.9

Chapter 10 P. 104 Min: 1.01

Read Scalar;
Fieldbus 12.16 DC OV Control Limit DC-bus threshold for OV Control Limit alarm pu Def: 1.3
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Max: 1.5

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 161
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 12 - DC-BUS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
BusDrop GridWaiting Selection
Programming overview
- Off [0] Write at Scalar;
12.30 BDrop GWait Sel
- Bus Drop [1]
# Def: Off
Stop Only Vector; Sls
2 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9 - Grid Waiting [2]

Programming tools
Min: 0
Firing pulses turn off threshold (as percentage Read Scalar;
12.31 Vdc to shut-off
of nominal Vdc)
pu Def: 0.85
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16 Max: 1
Programming levels
and control modes
Min: 0
Read Scalar;
Chapter 6 P. 18 12.33 UV-Off threshold Vdc threshold for masking undervoltage trip pu Def: 0.72
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure Max: 1

Chapter 7 P. 21 Min: 0
Maximum time for the WGTimeMax trip Read Scalar;
Control mode selection and settings 12.35 WaitGrid MaxTime
intervention
s Def: 10
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Max: 1000
Chapter 8 P. 22

A-5 DC-BUS
States machine and process data Min: 0
Read Scalar;
12.36 Delta on Vdc threshold Delta on Vdc threshold pu Def: 0.05
and Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Max: 1
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 162
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-6 PER-UNIT BASE DATA

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 13 - PER-UNIT BASE DATA

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Min: 0
Scalar;
Chapter 4 P. 9 13.01 Per-Unit DC-Bus Voltage Base value of per-unit DC-Bus voltage V Def: 566 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Max: 6000
Programming tools

Min: 0
Scalar;
Chapter 5 P. 16 13.02 Per-Unit AC Voltage Base value of per-unit AC output voltage V Def: 400 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Programming levels Max: 1000
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Scalar;
Quick start-up procedure 13.03 Per-Unit Current Base value of per-unit current A Def: 30 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Max: 8000

A-6 PER-UNIT BASE DATA

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: 0
Scalar;
13.04 Per-Unit Frequency Base value of per-unit frequency Hz Def: 50 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 3000
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Scalar;
13.05 Per-Unit Power Base value of per-unit power kW Def: 15 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 8000
Functions
Min: 0
Scalar;
13.91 Per-Unit Power Base value of per-unit power HP Def: 20.115 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Max: 10728.176

Min: 0
Scalar;
13.06 Per-Unit Torque Base value of per-unit torque Nm Def: 97.8 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Max: 2000000

Min: 0
Chapter 10 P. 104 13.92 Per-Unit Torque Base value of per-unit torque lb*ft Def: 72.134 Read Only
Scalar;
1 No
Vector; Sls
Fieldbus Max: 1475124.298

Min: 0
Base value of per-unit speed (derived from motor Scalar;
13.07 Per-Unit Speed
maximum speed parameter defined by User)
rpm Def: 1500 Read Only
Vector; Sls
1 No
Chapter 11 P. 128 Max: 15000
I/0 Configuration
Min: 0
Base value of per-unit pressure 1 set by User Read
13.11 User Per-Unit Press. 1 bar Def: 0 All 3 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145 (Process PID macro only)
Max: 1000
and Write
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
Min: 0
Annex P. 156 13.31 User Per-Unit Press. 1
Base value of per-unit pressure 1 set by User
(Process PID macro only)
PSI Def: 0
Read
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 14503.774

1/3 163
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 13 - PER-UNIT BASE DATA

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Base value of per-unit flow 1 set by User Read
13.12 User Per-Unit Flow 1
(Process PID macro only)
m^3/h Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1000
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Base value of per-unit flow 1 set by User Read
13.32 User Per-Unit Flow 1
(Process PID macro only)
GPM Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 4403.000
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Base value of per-unit level 1 set by User Read
13.13 User Per-Unit Level 1
(Process PID macro only)
m Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 1000
Quick start-up procedure

A-6 PER-UNIT BASE DATA

Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 13.33 User Per-Unit Level 1
Base value of per-unit level 1 set by User
ft Def: 0
Read
All 3 Yes
(Process PID macro only) and Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 3280.840

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Base value of per-unit temperature 1 set by User Read
States machine and process data 13.14 User Per-Unit Temp. 1
(Process PID macro only)
C Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1000

Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0
Base value of per-unit temperature 1 set by User Read
Functions 13.34 User Per-Unit Temp. 1
(Process PID macro only)
F Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1832.000

Min: 0
Base value of per-unit pressure 2 set by User Read
13.21 User Per-Unit Press. 2
(Process PID macro only)
bar Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1000

Min: 0
Base value of per-unit pressure 2 set by User Read
13.41 User Per-Unit Press. 2
(Process PID macro only)
PSI Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 14503.774
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Base value of per-unit flow 2 set by User Read
13.22 User Per-Unit Flow 2
(Process PID macro only)
m^3/h Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1000

Chapter 11 P. 128 Min: 0

Base value of per-unit flow 2 set by User Read
I/0 Configuration 13.42 User Per-Unit Flow 2
(Process PID macro only)
GPM Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 4403.000
Chapter 12 P. 145
Min: 0
Protections and troubleshooting Base value of per-unit level 2 set by User Read
instruments 13.23 User Per-Unit Level 2
(Process PID macro only)
m Def: 0
and Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1000
Annex P. 156

2/3 164
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 13 - PER-UNIT BASE DATA

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Base value of per-unit level 2 set by User Read and
13.43 User Per-Unit Level 2
(Process PID macro only)
ft Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 3280.840
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Base value of per-unit temperature 2 set by User Read and
13.24 User Per-Unit Temp. 2
(Process PID macro only)
C Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1000
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Base value of per-unit temperature 2 set by User Read and
13.44 User Per-Unit Temp. 2
(Process PID macro only)
F Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 1832.000
Quick start-up procedure

A-6 PER-UNIT BASE DATA

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/3 165
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-7 DIGITAL INPUTS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 15 - DIGITAL INPUTS

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Min: 0
Chapter 4 P. 9 15.01 DI1 Used by [ME26] DI1 Used by # Def: Start/Stop cmd Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30
Programming tools

Min: 0
Chapter 5 P. 16 15.02 DI2 Used by [ME25] DI2 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Programming levels Max: 30
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Quick start-up procedure 15.03 DI3 Used by [ME22] DI3 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30
Chapter 7 P. 21

A-7 DIGITAL INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings Min: 0
15.04 DI4 Used by [ME23] DI4 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 30
States machine and process data
Min: 0
15.05 DI5 Used by [ME24] DI5 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 30
Functions
Min: 0
15.06 DI6 Used by [ME38] DI6 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30

Min: 0
15.07 DI7 Used by [ME39] DI7 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30

Min: 0
Chapter 10 P. 104 15.08 DI8 Used by [ME40] DI8 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Fieldbus Max: 30

Min: 0
15.14 DI9 Used by [ME42] DI9 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 11 P. 128 Max: 30
I/0 Configuration
Min: 0
15.15 DI10 Used by [ME43] DI10 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 12 P. 145 Max: 30
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
Min: 0
Annex P. 156 15.16 DI11 Used by [ME44] DI11 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30

1/3 166
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 15 - DIGITAL INPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview
15.17 DI12 Used by [ME45] DI12 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
15.10 CW1.12 Used by CW1.12 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes
15.11 CW1.13 Used by CW1.13 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 30
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 15.12 CW1.14 Used by CW1.14 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No

A-7 DIGITAL INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings Max: 30

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
States machine and process data 15.13 CW1.15 Used by CW1.15 Used by # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 30

Chapter 9 P. 55
Inversion of digital input 1
Functions 15.21 Invert DI1 - Off [0] # Def: Off Read Only All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Inversion of digital input 2

15.22 Invert DI2 - Off [0] # Def: Off Read Only All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Inversion of digital input 3

15.23 Invert DI3 - Off [0] # Def: Off Read Only All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Inversion of digital input 4
Read
15.24 Invert DI4 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Chapter 11 P. 128 Inversion of digital input 5

Read
I/0 Configuration 15.25 Invert DI5 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Inversion of digital input 6
Protections and troubleshooting Read
instruments 15.26 Invert DI6 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Annex P. 156

2/3 167
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 15 - DIGITAL INPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
nversion of digital input 7
Programming overview Read
15.27 Invert DI7 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Inversion of digital input 8
- Off [0] Read
15.28 Invert DI8
- On [1]
# Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
Inversion of digital input 9
Read
Chapter 6 P. 18 15.29 Invert DI9 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure - On [1]

Chapter 7 P. 21 Inversion of digital input 10

Read

A-7 DIGITAL INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings 15.30 Invert DI10 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data Inversion of digital input 11
Read
15.31 Invert DI11 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Inversion of digital input 12
Read
15.32 Invert DI12 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/3 168
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-8 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 16 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

[ME28] DO1 selection

Chapter 4 P. 9 - Off [0]
- CW1.12 [510612]
Programming tools
- CW1.13 [510613]
- CW1.14 [510614]
- CW1.15 [510615]
Chapter 5 P. 16
- SW1.00-Ready to on [520100]
Programming levels
and control modes - SW1.01-Ready to oper [520101]
- SW1.02-Oper. enabled [520102]
Chapter 6 P. 18
- SW1.03-Fault [520103]
Quick start-up procedure - SW1.04-No coast stop [520104]
- SW1.05-No quick stop [520105]
Chapter 7 P. 21

A-8 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

- SW1.06-Switch-On Inh [520106]
Control mode selection and settings - SW1.07-Warning [520107]
- SW1.08-Fdb equal ref [520108]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - SW1.09-Remote control [520109]
States machine and process data - SW1.10-Ref reached [520110]
- SW1.11-DE received [520111]
- SW1.12-Cfg [520112]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - SW1.13-Cfg [520113]
Functions - SW1.14-Cfg [520114]
- SW1.15-Cfg [520115]
Read
16.01 DO1 Select - SW2.00-Speed limit [520200] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- SW2.01-Current limit [520201]
- SW2.02-Torque limit [520202]
- SW2.03-Voltage limit [520203]
- SW2.04-Precharged [520204]
- SW2.05-Fluxed [520205]
- SW2.06-CTLRM [520206]
- SW2.07-Min speed [520207]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - SW2.08-Zero speed [520208]
- SW2.09-Fly start [520209]
Fieldbus
- SW2.10-Ramp end [520210]
- SW2.11-Pulses enabled [520211]
- SW2.12-Brake On [520212]
- SW2.13-OV Control On [520213]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - SW2.14-UV Control On [520214]
I/0 Configuration - SW2.15-Flux ON [520215]
- SW4.04-Aux Pump 1 [520404]
- SW4.05-Aux Pump 2 [520405]
Chapter 12 P. 145 - SW4.06-Aux Pump 3 [520406]
Protections and troubleshooting - SW4.07-Aux Pump 4 [520407]
instruments
- SW4.08-Aux Pump 5 [520408]
Annex P. 156 - SW4.09-Aux Pump 6 [520409]
- D01 from ID.bit [37]

1/5 169
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 16 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read
16.02 DO1 from ID.bit DO1 from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Read
16.03 DO2 Select [ME29] DO2 selection # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 5 P. 16 Min: 0
Read
Programming levels
and control modes
16.04 DO2 from ID.bit DO2 from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Read
16.05 DO3 Select [ME17-18] DO3 selection # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 7 P. 21

A-8 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Control mode selection and settings Min: 0
Read
16.06 DO3 from ID.bit DO3 from ID.bit # Def: 0 All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 9999
and Write
States machine and process data

Status word 1 bit 12 selection

- Off [0]
Chapter 9 P. 55
- CW1.12 [510612]
Functions - CW1.13 [510613]
- CW1.14 [510614]
- CW1.15 [510615]
- SW2.00-Speed limit [520200]
- SW2.01-Current limit [520201]
- SW2.02-Torque limit [520202]
- SW2.03-Voltage limit [520203]
- SW2.04-Precharged [520204]
Read
16.19 SW1.12 Select - SW2.05-Fluxed [520205] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- SW2.06-CTLRM [520206]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - SW2.07-Min speed [520207]
Fieldbus - SW2.08-Zero speed [520208]
- SW2.09-Fly start [520209]
- SW2.10-Ramp end [520210]
- SW2.11-Pulses enabled [520211]
- SW2.12-Brake On [520212]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - SW2.13-OV Control On [520213]
I/0 Configuration - SW2.14-UV Control On [520214]
- SW2.15-Flux ON [520215]
- SW1.12 from ID.bit [21]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Min: 0
Read
16.20 SW1.12 from ID.bit SW1.12 from ID.bit # Def: 0 All 2 Yes
Annex P. 156 Max: 9999
and Write

2/5 170
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 16 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Read
Programming overview 16.21 SW1.13 Select Status word 1 bit 13 selection # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9 Min: 0
Read
Programming tools 16.22 SW1.13 from ID.bit SW1.13 from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Chapter 5 P. 16 Read
Programming levels 16.23 SW1.14 Select Status word 1 bit 14 selection # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Read
Quick start-up procedure 16.24 SW1.14 from ID.bit SW1.14 from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 7 P. 21

A-8 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Control mode selection and settings Read
16.25 SW1.15 Select Status word 1 bit 15 selection # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Read
16.26 SW1.15 from ID.bit SW1.15 from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions
Inversion of digital output 1
Read
16.27 Invert DO1 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Inversion of digital output 2

Read
16.28 Invert DO2 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Inversion of digital output 3

Read
Chapter 10 P. 104 16.29 Invert DO3 - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Fieldbus

Selection of Logic function 1

- Off [0]
- A AND B [1]
Chapter 11 P. 128 16.40 Logic function 1 - A OR B [2] # Def: Off
Read
All 2 Yes
and Write
I/0 Configuration - A XOR B [3]
- NOT A [4]
- Positive edge on A [5]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/5 171
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 16 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Selection of Logic function 2
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- C AND D [1]
Read
Chapter 4 P. 9 16.41 Logic function 2 - C OR D [2] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Programming tools
- C XOR D [3]
- NOT C [4]
- Positive edge on C [5]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Selection of Logic function 3
and control modes - Off [0]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - E AND F [1]
Read
Quick start-up procedure 16.42 Logic function 3 - E OR F [2] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- E XOR F [3]
Chapter 7 P. 21 - NOT E [4]

A-8 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

- Positive edge on E [5]
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read
States machine and process data 16.45 Signal A from ID.bit Signal A from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Chapter 9 P. 55 Inversion of signal A

Read
Functions 16.46 Invert signal A - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Min: 0
Read
16.47 Signal B from ID.bit Signal B from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Inversion of signal B
Read
16.48 Invert signal B - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Min: 0
Read
16.49 Signal C from ID.bit Signal C from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Chapter 11 P. 128 Inversion of signal C

Read
I/0 Configuration
16.50 Invert signal C - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/5 172
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 16 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read
16.51 Signal D from ID.bit Signal D from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Inversion of signal D
Read
16.52 Invert signal D - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Read
16.53 Signal E from ID.bit Signal E from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 9999
Quick start-up procedure
Inversion of signal E
Chapter 7 P. 21 16.54
Read

A-8 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Invert signal E - Off [0] # Def: Off All 2 Yes
and Write
Control mode selection and settings - On [1]

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read
States machine and process data 16.55 Signal F from ID.bit Signal F from ID.bit # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Chapter 9 P. 55
Inversion of signal F
Read
Functions 16.56 Invert signal F - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Selection of logic function to set alarm bit

- None [0]
Read
16.60 Logic function alarm - Logic function 1 [1] # Def: None
and Write
All 2 Yes
- Logic function 2 [2]
- Logic function 3 [3]

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

5/5 173
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-9 ANALOG INPUTS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 17 - ANALOG INPUTS

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview
Min: -2000
AI1 Percentage for 1 per-unit Read
Chapter 4 P. 9 17.05 AI1 Value for 1 pu
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA)
% Def: 100
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2000
Programming tools

Min: -2000
AI2 Percentage for 1 per-unit Read
Chapter 5 P. 16 17.06 AI2 Value for 1 pu
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA)
% Def: 100
and Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 2000
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 AI3 Percentage for 1 per-unit

Min: -2000
Read
Quick start-up procedure 17.07 AI3 Value for 1 pu
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA)
% Def: 100
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2000
Chapter 7 P. 21

A-9 ANALOG INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings Min: -2000
AI4 Percentage for 1 per-unit Read
17.08 AI4 Value for 1 pu
(100% to get 1 pu at 10V/20mA)
% Def: 100
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 2000
States machine and process data
Min: -2000
AI1 Percentage for 0 per-unit Read
17.09 AI1 Value for 0 pu
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA)
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 2000
Functions
Min: -2000
AI2 Percentage for 0 per-unit Read
17.10 AI2 Value for 0 pu
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA)
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2000

Min: -2000
AI3 Percentage for 0 per-unit Read
17.11 AI3 Value for 0 pu
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA)
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2000

Min: -2000
Chapter 10 P. 104 17.12 AI4 Value for 0 pu
AI4 Percentage for 0 per-unit
% Def: 0
Read
All 2 Yes
(20% to get 0 pu at 2V/4mA) and Write
Fieldbus Max: 2000

AI1 Option to use negative input values

Read
17.13 AI1 Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: On
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128 - On [1]
I/0 Configuration
Read
17.14 AI2 Neg Range En AI2 Option to use negative input values # Def: On
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/5 174
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 17 - ANALOG INPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
AI3 Option to use negative input values
Programming overview Read
17.15 AI3 Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: On
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools AI4 Option to use negative input values
Read
17.16 AI4 Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: On
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels AI1 Option to use absolute value of input
and control modes Read
17.17 AI1 Abs En - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 - On [1]
Quick start-up procedure
Read
Chapter 7 P. 21 17.18 AI2 Abs En AI2 Option to use absolute value of input # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes

A-9 ANALOG INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings
AI3 Option to use absolute value of input
Chapter 8 P. 22
17.19 AI3 Abs En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Read
All 2 Yes
and Write
States machine and process data - On [1]

AI4 Option to use absolute value of input

Chapter 9 P. 55
17.20 AI4 Abs En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Read
All 2 Yes
Functions and Write
- On [1]

Min: 0
Read
17.21 AI1 Filter Time Const AI1 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Min: 0
Read
17.22 AI2 Filter Time Const AI2 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 10 P. 104
Min: 0
Fieldbus Read
17.23 AI3 Filter Time Const AI3 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Min: 0
Chapter 11 P. 128 17.24 AI4 Filter Time Const AI4 Time constant of low-pass filter s Def: 0
Read
All 2 Yes
and Write
I/0 Configuration Max: 100

Input signal type corresponding to DIP switch

Chapter 12 P. 145
setting Read
Protections and troubleshooting 17.25 AI1 Type
- Volt [0]
# Def: Volt
and Write
All 2 Yes
instruments
- mA [1]
Annex P. 156

2/5 175
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 17 - ANALOG INPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Input signal type corresponding to DIP switch
Programming overview
setting Read
17.26 AI2 Type
- Volt [0]
# Def: Volt
and Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9 - mA [1]
Programming tools
Analog input selection for Monitor 1
- Off [0]
Chapter 5 P. 16
17.29 Monitor 1 AI Sel
- AI1 [2]
# Def: Off
Read
All 2 Yes
Programming levels - AI2 (Int. Pull-Up) [3] and Write
and control modes - AI3 (Option) [4]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - AI4 (Option) [5]
Quick start-up procedure
Analog Input selection for Monitor 2
Chapter 7 P. 21 - Off [0]

A-9 ANALOG INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings - AI1 [2] Read
17.30 Monitor 2 AI Sel
- AI2 (Int. Pull-Up) [3]
# Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 - AI3 (Option) [8]
States machine and process data - AI4 (Option) [9]

Min: -4
Read
Chapter 9 P. 55 17.31 Monitor Level 1 First monitor threshold for the analog input used # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Functions Max: 4

Min: -4
Read
17.32 Monitor Level 2 First monitor threshold for the analog input used # Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 4

Enables Monitor 1 and selects how to force the

Monitor 1 Alarm
- Off [0]
- AI > Level 1 [1]
Chapter 10 P. 104
17.33 Monitor 1 Alarm En
- AI < Level 1 [2]
# Def: Off
Read
All 2 Yes
Fieldbus - AI > Level 2 [3] and Write
- AI < Level 2 [4]
- |AI| > Level 1 [5]
- |AI| > Level 2 [6]
- (AI<Lvl1)OR(AI>Lvl2) [7]
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration Enables Monitor 2 and selects how to force the
Monitor 2 Alarm
Chapter 12 P. 145 - Off [0]
Protections and troubleshooting
- AI > Level 1 [1]
instruments - AI < Level 1 [2] Read
17.34 Monitor 2 Alarm En
- AI > Level 2 [3]
# Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Annex P. 156 - AI < Level 2 [4]
- |AI| > Level 1 [5]
- |AI| > Level 2 [6]
- (AI<Lvl1)OR(AI>Lvl2) [7]

3/5 176
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 17 - ANALOG INPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Option to manage a loss of AI connection
Programming overview
- No Action [0]
Read
17.43 AI1 Loss - Freeze To Last Val [1] # Def: No Action
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Freeze To Preset Val [2]
Programming tools
- Prs PID Disable [3]

Option to manage a loss of AI connection

Chapter 5 P. 16 - No Action [0]
Read
Programming levels 17.44 AI2 Loss - Freeze To Last Val [1] # Def: No Action
and Write
All 2 Yes
and control modes - Freeze To Preset Val [2]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - Prs PID Disable [3]
Quick start-up procedure
Option to manage a loss of AI connection
Chapter 7 P. 21 - No Action [0]
Read

A-9 ANALOG INPUTS

Control mode selection and settings 17.45 AI3 Loss - Freeze To Last Val [1] # Def: No Action
and Write
All 2 Yes
- Freeze To Preset Val [2]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - Prs PID Disable [3]
States machine and process data
Option to manage a loss of AI connection
- No Action [0]
Read
Chapter 9 P. 55 17.46 AI4 Loss - Freeze To Last Val [1] # Def: No Action
and Write
All 2 Yes
Functions - Freeze To Preset Val [2]
- Prs PID Disable [3]

Min: -100
AI1 Percentage for the threshold of AI loss mana- Read
17.51 AI1 Loss Threshold
gement
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Min: -100
AI2 Percentage for the threshold of AI loss mana- Read
17.52 AI2 Loss Threshold
gement
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Min: -100
AI3 Percentage for the threshold of AI loss mana- Read
17.53 AI3 Loss Threshold
gement
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/5 177
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 17 - ANALOG INPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: -100
Programming overview AI4 Percentage for the threshold of AI loss mana- Read
17.54 AI4 Loss Threshold
gement
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: -100
Read
17.59 AI1 Preset Value AI1 Percentage for the AI loss preset value % Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: -100
and control modes Read
17.60 AI2 Preset Value AI2 Percentage for the AI loss preset value % Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 100
Quick start-up procedure
Min: -100
Chapter 7 P. 21 17.61 AI3 Preset Value AI3 Percentage for the AI loss preset value % Def: 0
Read
All 2 Yes

A-9 ANALOG INPUTS

and Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 100

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: -100

Read
States machine and process data 17.62 AI4 Preset Value AI4 Percentage for the AI loss preset value % Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

5/5 178
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-10 ANALOG OUTPUTS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 18 - ANALOG OUTPUTS

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Min: 0
Read
Chapter 4 P. 9 18.01 AO1 Sel [ME13] AO1 Signal selection # Def: 1
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 200
Programming tools

Min: 0
Read
Chapter 5 P. 16 18.02 AO2 Sel [ME14] AO2 Signal selection # Def: 2
and Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 200
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 AO1 Percentage at 1 per-unit (100% to get 10V/

Min: -2000
Read
Quick start-up procedure 18.05 AO1 Value for 1 pu
20mA at 1 pu)
% Def: 100
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2000

A-10 ANALOG OUTPUTS

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: -2000
AO2 Percentage at 1 per-unit (100% to get 10V/ Read
18.06 AO2 Value for 1 pu
20mA at 1 pu)
% Def: 100
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 2000
States machine and process data
Min: -2000
AO1 Percentage at 0 per-unit (20% to get 2V/ Read
18.09 AO1 Value for 0 pu
4mA at 0 pu)
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 2000
Functions
Min: -2000
AO2 Percentage at 0 per-unit (20% to get 2V/ Read
18.10 AO2 Value for 0 pu
4mA at 0 pu)
% Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2000

AO1 Option to use negative output values

Read
18.13 AO1 Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: On
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Read
Chapter 10 P. 104 18.14 AO2 Neg Range En AO2 Option to use negative output values # Def: On
and Write
All 2 Yes
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 179
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 18 - ANALOG OUTPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
AO1 Option to use only absolute value of signal
Programming overview Read
18.17 AO1 Abs En - Off [0] # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Read
18.18 AO2 Abs En AO2 Option to use only absolute value of signal # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 5 P. 16 Output signal type corresponding to jumper

Programming levels setting Read
and control modes 18.21 AO1 Type
- Volt [0]
# Def: Volt
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 - mA [1]
Quick start-up procedure
Output signal type corresponding to jumper

A-10 ANALOG OUTPUTS

Chapter 7 P. 21 setting Read
Control mode selection and settings
18.22 AO2 Type
- Volt [0]
# Def: Volt
and Write
All 2 Yes
- mA [1]
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 180
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-11 SPEED CONTROL

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 21 - SPEED CONTROL

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Enable internal controller autotuning for desired

Chapter 4 P. 9 21.01 Speed Ctrl Autotune
bandwidth using the inertia time constant
- Off [0]
# Def: Off
Read
and Write
All 2 Yes
Programming tools
- On [1]

Chapter 5 P. 16 Min: 1
Read
Programming levels 21.02 Speed Ctrl Bandwidth Desired speed control bandwidth Hz Def: 3
and Write
All 2 Yes
and control modes Max: 50
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Command 1 for gain set selection
- Off [0]
Chapter 7 P. 21 - ME25:DI-02 [2]

A-11 SPEED CONTROL

Control mode selection and settings
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
States machine and process data
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] Read
21.03 Cmd 1 Gain Set Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 - ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
and Write
Functions
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
- CW2.10 [13]

Read
21.04 Cmd 2 Gain Set Sel Command 2 for gain set selection # Def: Off
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Read
21.05 Proportional Gain 1 User speed control proportional gain 1 pu Def: 3
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 11 P. 128 Min: 0

Read
I/0 Configuration 21.06 Integral Time 1 User speed control integral time 1 s Def: 0.3
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 60

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 181
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 21 - SPEED CONTROL

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read
21.07 Proportional Gain 2 User speed control proportional gain 2 pu Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Read
21.08 Integral Time 2 User speed control integral time 2 s Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 60
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Read
21.09 Proportional Gain 3 User speed control proportional gain 3 pu Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 100
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 21.10
Read

A-11 SPEED CONTROL

Integral Time 3 User speed control integral time 3 s Def: 0 All 2 Yes
and Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 60

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read
States machine and process data 21.11 Proportional Gain 4 User speed control proportional gain 4 pu Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0
Read
Functions 21.12 Integral Time 4 User speed control integral time 4 s Def: 0
and Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 60

Min: 0
Time constant of the low-pass filter for the speed Read and
21.13 Speed Fdb Filter Time
feedback
s Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0.1

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 182
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-12 TORQUE CONTROL

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 22 - TORQUE CONTROL

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range
Type Type Level
Download
Programming overview

Min: 0
Read and
Chapter 4 P. 9 22.01 Pos Torque Limit 1 Fixed positive torque limit 1 pu Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming tools Max: 4

Min: -4
Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 22.02 Neg Torque Limit 1 Fixed negative torque limit 1 pu Def: -1
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 0
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Read and
Quick start-up procedure 22.03 Pos Torque Limit 2 Fixed positive torque limit 2 pu Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 4

A-12 TORQUE CONTROL

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: -4
Read and
22.04 Neg Torque Limit 2 Fixed negative torque limit 2 pu Def: -1 All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 0
Write
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Read and
22.22 Pos Torque Limit 3 Fixed positive torque limit 3 pu Def: 1 All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 4
Write
Functions

Min: -4
Read and
22.23 Neg Torque Limit 3 Fixed negative torque limit 3 pu Def: -1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0

Min: 0
Read and
22.24 Pos Torque Limit 4 Fixed positive torque limit 4 pu Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 4

Min: -4
Chapter 10 P. 104
22.25 Neg Torque Limit 4 Fixed negative torque limit 4 pu Def: -1
Read and
All 2 Yes
Fieldbus Write
Max: 0

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/4 183
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 22 - TORQUE CONTROL

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Command 1 for selection of fixed torque limit set
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - ME25:DI-02 [2]
Programming tools
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
Programming levels - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
and control modes 22.05 Cmd 1 Torque Limit Set - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
Quick start-up procedure
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]

A-12 TORQUE CONTROL

- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- CW1.12 [9]
Control mode selection and settings
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- CW1.15 [12]
States machine and process data - CW2:07 [13]

Command 2 for selection of fixed torque limit set

Chapter 9 P. 55
- Off [0]
Functions
- On [1]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
22.26 Cmd 2 Torque Limit Set - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Fieldbus - ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - CW4:08 [13]
I/0 Configuration

Internal type of use for the Pos and Neg torque

Chapter 12 P. 145 22.06 Torque Limit Type
limiters
# Def: Pos/Neg
Read and
All 2 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting - Pos/Neg [0] Write
instruments - Motor/Gen [1]
Annex P. 156

2/4 184
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 22 - TORQUE CONTROL

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Source selection for the external positive signal to
Programming overview
limit the speed controller output
- Off [0] Read and
22.08 Ext Pos Torque Lim Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 4 P. 9 - AI1 [2] Write
Programming tools
- Profibus [6]
- Modbus [7]

Chapter 5 P. 16 Source selection for the external negative signal to

Programming levels limit the speed controller output
and control modes - Off [0] Read and
22.09 Ext Neg Torque Lim Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 - AI2 [3] Write
Quick start-up procedure
- Profibus [6]
- Modbus [7]

A-12 TORQUE CONTROL

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Torque feedforward reference source selection
- Off [0]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - AI1 [2]
- AI2 [3] Read and
States machine and process data 22.10 Torque Ffw Sel
- AI3 (Option) [4]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- AI4 (Option) [5]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - Profibus [6]
- Modbus [7]
Functions

Torque feedforward command enable

- Operation Enabled [0]
- Always On [1]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Chapter 10 P. 104
22.11 Torque Ffw En Cmd - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Operation Enabled
Read and
All 2 Yes
Fieldbus Write
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
I/0 Configuration
- CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
Chapter 12 P. 145 - CW2:01 [13]
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/4 185
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 22 - TORQUE CONTROL

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Time for the reference to increase from zero to Read and
22.12 Torque Ramp-Up Time
nominal motor torque
s Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Time for the reference to decrease from nominal Read and
22.13 Torque Ramp-Down Time
motor torque to zero
s Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Defines the torque reference band above and Read and
22.14 Torque Ramp Band
below zero where the torque ramp is active
pu Def: 0.1
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 4
Quick start-up procedure

A-12 TORQUE CONTROL

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/4 186
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-13 V/F CONTROL

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 24 - V/f CONTROL

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Min: 0.5
Read and
Chapter 4 P. 9 24.01 Base Voltage Maximum output voltage pu Def: 1
Write
Scalar 1 Yes
Max: 1.5
Programming tools

Min: 0.5
Ratio to modify the initial frequency of field-wea- Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 24.02 Base Freq / Rated Freq
kening
pu Def: 1
Write
Scalar 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 2
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 20
Gain to modify the Rs voltage drop compensation Def: 100 Read and
Quick start-up procedure 24.03 Boost Gain
for initial boost
%
Max: 400 Write
Scalar 1 Yes
Chapter 7 P. 21

A-13 V/F CONTROL

Control mode selection and settings
Min: 0
Gain to modify the rated frequency slip compensa- Read and
Chapter 8 P. 22 24.04 Slip Compensation
tion under load conditions
% Def: 100
Write
Scalar 2 Yes
States machine and process data Max: 200

Activates the Flying Start feature under V/f control

Chapter 9 P. 55
24.05 FlyStart En
mode
# Def: Off
Read and
Scalar 2 Yes
Functions - Off [0] Write
- On [1]

Min: 0
Maximum current error required to terminate the Read and
24.06 FlyStart Current Error
motor frequency search
pu Def: 0.15
Write
Scalar 2 Yes
Max: 0.5

Disables the speed/torque control loop and enable

the scalar V/f control Read and
24.07 Scalar V/f En
- Off [0]
# Def: On
Write
Scalar 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - On [1]
Fieldbus
Activates the damping of current oscillations for
scalar control (to switch off in case of LC output
Read and
24.08 Current Damping filter) # Def: On
Write
Scalar 1 Yes
- Off [0]
Chapter 11 P. 128
- On [1]
I/0 Configuration

Min: 0
Read and
Chapter 12 P. 145 24.09 V/f Ratio 1/3 Point V/f Ratio 1/3 Point pu Def: 0.333
Write
Scalar 2 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting Max: 1
instruments

Annex P. 156 Min: 0

Def: 0.667 Read and
24.10 V/f Ratio 2/3 Point V/f Ratio 2/3 Point pu
Max: 1 Write
Scalar 2 Yes

187
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-14 SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 31 - SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Source selection for the main command word

Chapter 4 P. 9 31.01 Cmd Wd 1 Sel
- Terminal Board [0]
- Profibus [1]
# Def: Terminal Board
Write at
Stop Only
All 1 Yes
Programming tools
- Modbus [2]

Chapter 5 P. 16 Enable HW run interlock

Write at
Programming levels 31.02 Run Interlock En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
and control modes - On [1]
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Enable bits 4, 5, 6 of main command word
Write at

A-14 SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS

31.03 Special Cmd Wd En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Chapter 7 P. 21 - On [1]
Control mode selection and settings
Command Word 2 source selection
Chapter 8 P. 22
31.04 Cmd Wd 2 Sel
- Off [0]
# Def: Off
Write at
All 2 Yes
States machine and process data - Profibus [1] Stop Only
- Modbus [2]

Chapter 9 P. 55 Command Word 4 source selection

Functions - Off [0] Write at
31.06 Cmd Wd 4 Sel
- Profibus [1]
# Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- Modbus [2]

DI Run/Forward/Reverse connections
- DI1:Run [0] Write at
31.10 DI Run/Fw/Rv Connect.
- DI1:Run - DI2:Fw/Rv [1]
# Def: DI1:Run
Stop Only
All 1 Yes
- DI1:RunFw - DI2:RunRv [2]

DI Quick Stop (OFF3) selection

Chapter 10 P. 104 - Off [0]
Fieldbus - ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
Write at
31.11 DI Quick Stop Sel - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6] # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Stop Only
I/0 Configuration - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
Chapter 12 P. 145
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments - ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]

Annex P. 156

1/2 188
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 31 - SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
DI Fault acknowledge selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - ME22:DI-03 [3]
Programming tools
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
Write at
31.12 DI Fault Ack Sel - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Programming levels - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
and control modes - ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Chapter 6 P. 18
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Quick start-up procedure

A-14 SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS

- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
DI Coast Stop (OFF2) selection
- Off [0]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
States machine and process data
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
Write at
Chapter 9 P. 55 31.13 DI Coast Stop Sel - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Functions
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 189
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 32 - SPEED REFERENCE

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range
Type Type Level
Download
Programming overview

Selection of main speed command source

Chapter 4 P. 9 - Off [0]
Programming tools - Fixed [1]
- AI1 [2]
- AI2 [3]
Chapter 5 P. 16 32.01 Main Speed Ref Sel
- AI3 (Option) [4]
# Def: Off
Write at
All 1 Yes
Programming levels - AI4 (Option) [5] Stop Only
and control modes - Profibus [6]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - Modbus [7]
- Digital Pot [9]
Quick start-up procedure
- Prs PID [10]
Chapter 7 - Keypad [11]

A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
Selection of auxiliary speed command source
Chapter 8 P. 22 - Off [0]
- Fixed [1]
States machine and process data
- AI1 [2]
- AI2 [3]
Chapter 9 P. 55 32.02 Aux Speed Ref Sel
- AI3 (Option) [4]
# Def: Off
Write at
All 2 Yes
- AI4 (Option) [5] Stop Only
Functions
- Profibus [6]
- Modbus [7]
- Digital Pot [9]
- Prs PID [10]
- Keypad [11]

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/7 190
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 32 - SPEED REFERENCE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Source selection for switch command from Main
Programming overview
to Aux speed reference
- Off [0]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - On [1]
Programming tools
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - ME24:DI-05 [5]
Programming levels - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
and control modes - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7] Write at
32.03 Aux Speed Ref Cmd # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Stop Only
Quick start-up procedure
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Chapter 7

A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

P. 21
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Control mode selection and settings
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- CW1.14 [11]
States machine and process data - CW1.15 [12]
- CW4.05 [13]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Selection of additional speed command source
Functions
- Off [0]
- Fixed [1]
- AI1 [2]
Write at
32.04 Add Speed Ref Sel - AI2 [3] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- AI3 (Option) [4]
- AI4 (Option) [5]
- Profibus [6]
- Modbus [7]

Selection of feedforward speed command source

Chapter 10 P. 104 - Off [0]
Fieldbus - Fixed [1]
- AI1 [2]
Write at
32.05 Speed Feedforward Sel - AI2 [3] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- AI3 (Option) [4]
- AI4 (Option) [5]
Chapter 11 P. 128
- Profibus [6]
I/0 Configuration
- Modbus [7]

Chapter 12 P. 145 Min: -2

Read and
Protections and troubleshooting 32.06 Fixed Speed Ref 1 Fixed speed command 1 pu Def: 0
Write
All 1 Yes
instruments Max: 2
Annex P. 156

2/7 191
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 32 - SPEED REFERENCE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: -2
Programming overview Read and
32.07 Fixed Speed Ref 2 Fixed speed command 2 pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: -2
Read and
32.08 Fixed Speed Ref 3 Fixed speed command 3 pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 2
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: -2
and control modes Read and
32.09 Fixed Speed Ref 4 Fixed speed command 4 pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 2
Quick start-up procedure
Command 1 for selection of fixed command
Chapter 7

A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

P. 21 reference
Control mode selection and settings - Off [0]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - ME22:DI-03 [3]
States machine and process data - ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
Functions 32.10 Cmd 1 Sel Fix Speed Ref - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
- CW4.03 [13]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Command 2 for selection of fixed command Read and
Fieldbus 32.11 Cmd 2 Sel Fix Speed Ref
reference
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Min: 0
Maximum acceleration ramp time 1 from 0 to Read and
32.12 Ramp Acc Time 1 s Def: 10 All 1 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128 100% speed
Max: 600
Write
I/0 Configuration
Min: 0
Maximum deceleration ramp time 1 from 0 to Read and
Chapter 12 P. 145 32.13 Ramp Dec Time 1
100% speed
s Def: 10
Write
All 1 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting
Max: 600
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/7 192
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 32 - SPEED REFERENCE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Safety Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Maximum acceleration ramp time 2 from 0 to Read and
32.14 Ramp Acc Time 2
100% speed
s Def: 20
Write
All 1 Yes
Max: 600
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Maximum deceleration ramp time 2 from 0 to Read and
32.15 Ramp Dec Time 2
100% speed
s Def: 20
Write
All 1 Yes
Max: 600
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Selection of ramp rate
and control modes
- Set 1 [0]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - Set 2 [1]
Quick start-up procedure - ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
Chapter 7

A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

P. 21 - ME23:DI-04 [4]
Control mode selection and settings - ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
States machine and process data 32.16 Ramp Rate Sel - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Set 1
Write
All 1 Yes
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Functions
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
- CW2.08 [13]

Min: 0
Absolute threshold of speed feedback to set the Read and
32.18 Overspeed Threshold
Overspeed alarm
pu Def: 1.2
Write
All 1 Yes
Max: 2
Chapter 10 P. 104
Min: 0
Fieldbus Absolute value of minimum speed feedback to set Read and
32.19 Min Speed
the Min-Speed status bit
pu Def: 0.03
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0.5

Min: 0
Chapter 11 P. 128 32.20 Min Speed Hysteresis
Size of hysteresis band above and below the
pu Def: 0.01
Read and
All 2 Yes
Min-Speed threshold Write
I/0 Configuration Max: 0.2

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/7 193
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 32 - SPEED REFERENCE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Size of band above and below the zero speed to Read and
32.21 Zero Speed
detect the standstill condition
pu Def: 0.01
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0.5
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Maximum allowable positive speed command Read and
32.22 Max Pos Ref
before and after ramp
pu Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: -1
and control modes Maximum allowable negative speed command Read and
32.23 Max Neg Ref
before and after ramp
pu Def: -1
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 0
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0.01
Chapter 7

A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

P. 21 Absolute speed error tolerance before causing the Read and
32.24 Speed Deviation Error
Speed Deviation alarm
pu Def: 0.2
Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings Max: 0.5

Chapter 8 P. 22 Maximum amount of time the speed error Min: 0.1

Read and
States machine and process data 32.25 Speed Deviation Time tolerance can be exceeded without generating s Def: 2
Write
All 2 Yes
alarm Max: 60

Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0.01
Minimum time with the speed error inside the Read and
Functions 32.26 Settling Time
band to set the Freq-Equal-Setpoint status bit
s Def: 0.01
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 60

Min: 0
Size of band above and below the command Read and
32.27 Settling Band
speed to set the Freq-Equal-Setpoint status bit
pu Def: 0.02
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 4

Min: 0
Size of hysteresis band above and below the speed Read and
32.28 Skip Speed Band 1
to skip
pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0.1
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: -1
Read and
32.29 Skip Speed 1 Speed reference to skip pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1

Chapter 11 P. 128
Size of hysteresis band above and below the speed
Min: 0
Read and
I/0 Configuration 32.30 Skip Speed Band 2
to skip
pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0.1

Chapter 12 P. 145
Min: -1
Protections and troubleshooting Read and
instruments 32.31 Skip Speed 2 Speed reference to skip pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1
Annex P. 156

5/7 194
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 32 - SPEED REFERENCE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Selection of digital input to enable the additional
Programming overview
speed reference
- Off [0]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - On [1]
Programming tools
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - ME24:DI-05 [5]
Programming levels - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
and control modes - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7] Read and
32.32 Enable Add Speed Cmd # Def: On All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Write
Quick start-up procedure
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Chapter 7

A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

P. 21
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Control mode selection and settings
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- CW1.14 [11]
States machine and process data - CW1.15 [12]
- CW4.06 [13]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Selection of digital input to enable the speed
Functions
feedforward reference
- Off [0]
- On [1]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
32.33 Enable Ffw Speed Cmd - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: On All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Write
Fieldbus - ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - CW1.14 [11]
I/0 Configuration - CW1.15 [12]
- CW4.07 [13]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

6/7 195
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 32 - SPEED REFERENCE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read and
32.34 Jerk Rate Time Jerk rate time s Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: -2
Read and
32.38 Speed Ffw Gain Speed Feedforward Gain pu Def: 1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 2
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: -2
and control modes Read and
32.39 Speed Ffw Offset Speed Feedforward Offset pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 2
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7

A-15 SPEED REFERENCE

P. 21 Thrust Bearing Ramp Acceleration Time from 0% Read and
32.41 TB Ramp Acc Time 1
to 100% speed Set 1
s Def: 5
Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings Max: 100

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Thrust Bearing Ramp Deceleration Time from Read and
States machine and process data 32.42 TB Ramp Dec Time 1
100% to 0% speed Set 1
s Def: 5
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0
Read and
Functions
32.43 TB Thresh Speed 1 Thrust Bearing Threshold Speed Set 1 (=0 disable) pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1

Min: 0
Thrust Bearing Ramp Acceleration Time from 0% Read and
32.44 TB Ramp Acc Time 2
to 100% speed Set 2
s Def: 5
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Min: 0
Thrust Bearing Ramp Deceleration Time from Read and
32.45 TB Ramp Dec Time 2
100% to 0% speed Set 2
s Def: 5
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Read and
32.46 TB Thresh Speed 2 Thrust Bearing Threshold Speed Set 2 (=0 disable) pu Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

7/7 196
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-16 START/STOP MODE

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 33 - START/STOP MODE

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Drive start mode

Read and
Chapter 4 P. 9 33.01 Start Mode - Auto [0] # Def: Auto
Write
All 1 Yes
- Flux-Up Time [1]
Programming tools

Min: 0
Constant amount of time to flux-up the induction Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 33.02 Flux-up Time
motor after the Run command
s Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 60
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Maximum time allowed to complete the induction

Min: 0.03
Read and Scalar;
Quick start-up procedure 33.03 Flux-up Timeout
motor fluxing without Flux-Up Timeout alarm
s Def: 4
Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Max: 60

A-16 START/STOP MODE

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Selection for Flux command (for hand-tuning,
pre-magnetizing, or DC-braking)
Chapter 8 P. 22 - Off [0]
States machine and process data - On [1]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - ME23:DI-04 [4]
Functions
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and Scalar;
33.04 Flux Cmd Sel - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
Chapter 10 P. 104
- CW1.15 [12]
Fieldbus - CW2.00 [13]
- After OFF1 or Jog [20]

Min: 0
Current step applied to the Id reference when the Read and Scalar;
Chapter 11 P. 128 33.05 Flux Cmd Current
Flux command is active
pu Def: 0.4
Write Vector; Sls
2 Yes
I/0 Configuration
Max: 1

Flux command or constant time flux-up applies a

Chapter 12 P. 145 DC current to brake the motor or maintain it at
Protections and troubleshooting standstill Read and Scalar;
instruments 33.06 DC Brake
- Off [0]
# Def: Off
Write Vector; Sls
1 Yes
Annex P. 156 - On (Flux Cmd Current) [1]
- On (Idn) [2]

1/7 197
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 33 - START/STOP MODE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read and
33.10 Ramp Stop Time Deceleration time for OFF1 (0 gives coast stop) s Def: 15
Write
All 1 Yes
Max: 600
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Read and
33.11 Quick Stop Time Deceleration time for OFF3 (0 gives coast stop) s Def: 5
Write
All 1 Yes
Max: 600
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels HOA Start/Stop type
and control modes
- Edge Start/Stop [0] Write at
Chapter 6 P. 18 33.12 HOA Start/Stop type
- Level Start/Stop [1]
# Def: Edge Start/Stop
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure - Pulsed Start/Stop [2]

A-16 START/STOP MODE

Chapter 7 P. 21 HOA Manual/Automatic OnFly Command Se-
Control mode selection and settings HOA Man/Auto lection Read and
33.13 OnFly Cmd - Off [0]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 - On [1]
States machine and process data
HOA Manual Reference Source Selection
- Off [0]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - Fixed [1]
Functions - AI1 [2] Write at
33.16 HOA Man Ref Src Sel
- AI2 [3]
# Def: Keypad
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- AI3 (Option) [4]
- AI4 (Option) [5]
- Keypad [11]

HOA Manual/Automatic Command Selection

- Keypad Auto/Man [0]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - ME23:DI-04 [4]
Fieldbus - ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6] Write at
33.17 HOA Man/Auto Cmd Sel
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
# Def: Keypad Auto/Man
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
I/0 Configuration - ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- Man disabled [20]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/7 198
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 33 - START/STOP MODE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
HOA Manual Start Command Selection
Programming overview
- Keypad Start [0]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - ME22:DI-03 [3]
Programming tools
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
Write at
33.18 HOA Man Start Cmd Sel - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6] # Def: Keypad Start
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Programming levels - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
and control modes - ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Chapter 6 P. 18
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Quick start-up procedure
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]

A-16 START/STOP MODE

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
HOA Manual Pulsed Stop Command Selection
- Keypad Stop [0]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
States machine and process data
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
HOA Man P Stop Cmd Write at
Chapter 9 P. 55 33.19 Sel
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6] # Def: Keypad Stop
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Functions
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]

HOA Auto Pulsed Stop Command Selection

- Off [0]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - ME23:DI-04 [4]
Fieldbus - ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
HOA Auto P Stop Cmd Write at
33.20 Sel
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Chapter 11 P. 128
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
I/0 Configuration
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Chapter 12 P. 145 - CW1.12 [9]
Protections and troubleshooting - CW1.13 [10]
instruments - CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
Annex P. 156

3/7 199
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 33 - START/STOP MODE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Auto On/Off Enable
Programming overview Write at
33.21 Auto OnOff Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: -1
Read and
33.22 Auto OnOff Stop Thresh Auto On/Off Stop Threshold pu Def: -1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: -1
and control modes Read and
33.23 Auto OnOff Start Thresh Auto On/Off Start Threshold pu Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 1
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0

A-16 START/STOP MODE

Chapter 7 P. 21 33.24 Auto OnOff Stop Delay Auto On/Off Stop Delay s Def: 1
Read and
All 2 Yes
Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 300

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read and
States machine and process data 33.25 Auto OnOff Start Delay Auto On/Off Start Delay s Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 300

Chapter 9 P. 55
Frost Protection Enable
Functions - Off [0]
- AI1 [1] Write at
33.30 Frost Prot. Enable
- AI2 [2]
# Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- AI3 (Option) [3]
- AI4 (Option) [4]

Min: -100
Read and
33.31 Frost Prot. Low Temp. Frost Protection Low Temperature % Def: 20
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 10 P. 104
Min: -100
Fieldbus Read and
33.32 Frost Prot. High Temp. Frost Protection High Temperature % Def: 80
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/7 200
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 33 - START/STOP MODE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: -1
Programming overview Read and
33.33 Frost Prot. Speed Ref Frost Protection Speed Reference pu Def: 0.1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Low City Pressure Enable
Write at
33.40 Low City Press. Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Low City Pressure Command Selection
and control modes
- Off [0]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - On [1]
Quick start-up procedure - ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]

A-16 START/STOP MODE

Chapter 7 P. 21 - ME23:DI-04 [4]
Control mode selection and settings - ME24:DI-05 [5] Read and
33.41 Low City Press. Cmd Sel
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
# Def: Off
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
States machine and process data
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Functions

Min: 0
Read and
33.42 Low City Press. Timeout Low City Pressure Timeout s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100

Motor Switch Enable

Write at
33.50 Motor Switch Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Chapter 10 P. 104 Motor Switch Cmd Sel

Fieldbus - Off [0]
- On [1]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - ME24:DI-05 [5] Read and
I/0 Configuration
33.51 Motor Switch Cmd Sel
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
Chapter 12 P. 145
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments - ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Annex P. 156 - ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]

5/7 201
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 33 - START/STOP MODE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
AntiBlocking Enable
Programming overview Write at
33.60 AntiBlocking Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Read and
33.61 AntiBlocking Interval AntiBlocking Interval s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Read and
33.62 AntiBlocking Runtime AntiBlocking Runtime s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 100
Quick start-up procedure
Min: -1

A-16 START/STOP MODE

Chapter 7 P. 21 33.63 AntiBlocking Speed Ref AntiBlocking Speed Reference pu Def: 0.1
Read and
All 3 Yes
Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 1

Chapter 8 P. 22 AutoCleaning Enable

States machine and process data - Off [0]
- Digital Input [1] Write at
33.70 AutoClean Enable
- Current Threshold [2]
# Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 - Time Interval [3]
Functions - Start Command [4]

AutoCleaning Cmd Sel

- Off [0]
- On [1]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5] Read and
33.71 AutoClean Cmd Sel
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
# Def: Off
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Fieldbus - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration Min: 0
Read and
33.72 AutoClean Curr Thres AutoCleaning Current Threshold % Def: 10
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145 Max: 100
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Min: 0
Read and
Annex P. 156 33.73 AutoClean Curr Delay AutoCleaning Current Threshold Delay s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100

6/7 202
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 33 - START/STOP MODE

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read and
33.74 AutoClean Time Interval AutoCleaning Time Interval - Delta functioning min Def: 1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 43200
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 1
Read and
33.75 AutoClean Cycles Number AutoCleaning Cycles Number # Def: 1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Read and
33.76 AutoClean Forward Speed AutoCleaning Forward Speed pu Def: 0.1
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 1
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0

A-16 START/STOP MODE

Chapter 7 P. 21 33.77 AutoClean Forward Time AutoCleaning Forward Time s Def: 5
Read and
All 3 Yes
Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 100

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read and
States machine and process data 33.78 AutoClean Reverse Speed AutoCleaning Reverse Speed pu Def: 0.1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1

Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0
Functions Read and
33.79 AutoClean Reverse Time AutoCleaning Reverse Time s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100

Min: 0
AutoClean Ramp Acc AutoCleaning Ramp Acceleration Time from 0% Read and
33.80 Time to 100% speed
s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100

Min: 0
AutoClean Ramp Dec AutoCleaning Ramp Deceleration Time from Read and
33.81 Time 100% to 0% speed
s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Read and
33.82 AutoClean OffDelay Time AutoCleaning Off Delay Time s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

7/7 203
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-17 AUTORESET

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 34 - AUTORESET
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Auto Reset Enable

Write at
Chapter 4 P. 9 34.01 Auto Reset Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Programming tools

Read and
34.02 Auto Reset Time Auto Reset Time s Min: 0.1 All 2 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16 Write
Programming levels
and control modes
Read and
34.03 Auto Reset Attempt Auto Reset Attempt # Def: 10 All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Write
Quick start-up procedure
Read and
Chapter 7 P. 21 34.04 Reset Memory Time Reset Memory Time s Max: 300
Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings

A-17 AUTORESET
Reset Desaturation Enable
Chapter 8 P. 22 34.05 Reset Desaturation - Off [0] # Min: 1
Read and
All 2 Yes
Write
States machine and process data - On [1]

Reset IOC Enable

Chapter 9 P. 55
34.06 Reset IOC - Off [0] # Def: 2
Read and
All 2 Yes
Write
Functions - On [1]

Reset Overvoltage Enable

Read and
34.07 Reset Overvoltage - Off [0] # Max: 100
Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Reset Undervoltage Enable

Read and
34.08 Reset Undervoltage - Off [0] # Min: 0.1
Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Chapter 10 P. 104
Reset Therm. Ovld. Enable
Fieldbus Read and
34.09 Reset Therm. Ovld. - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

204
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-18 MOTOR UNDER/OVERLOAD

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
35 - MOTOR UNDER/OVERLOAD
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Chapter 3 P. 8 Type Type Level
Programming overview
Select Drive response to motor overload
- Off [0] Write at Scalar;
Chapter 4 P. 9 35.01 Overload Mng
- Fault/Alarm [1]
# Def: Off
Stop Only Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Programming tools - Flt/Alm & Reduce Curr [2]

Min: 105
Chapter 5 P. 16
35.02 Overload Level
Defines motor overload current limit relative to
% Def: 110
Write at Scalar;
2 Yes
Programming levels rated motor current Stop Only Vector; Sls
and control modes Max: 250

A-18 MOTOR UNDER/OVERLOAD

Chapter 6 P. 18
Min: 1
Quick start-up procedure Write at Scalar;
35.03 Overload Time Motor overload maximum time before reaction s Def: 600
Stop Only Vector; Sls
2 Yes
Chapter 7 P. 21 Max: 18000
Control mode selection and settings
Min: 25
Write at Scalar;
Chapter 8 P. 22 35.04 Zero Speed Icont Continuos current at zero speed % Def: 100
Stop Only Vector
2 Yes
Max: 100
States machine and process data

Motor Underload Enable

Read and
Chapter 9 P. 55 35.10 Underload Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Functions
- On [1]

Min: 0
Read and
35.11 Underload Level Motor Underload Level % Def: 10
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100

Min: 0
Read and
35.12 Underload Time Motor Underload Time s Def: 10
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 1000

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

205
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-19 ALARM SETTINGS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 36 - ALARM SETTINGS

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

36.01 Watchdog AW1.00 - Watchdog # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools 36.02 AC Line Supply AW1.01 - AC line supply # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No

36.03 Vdc OV AW1.02 - DC link Overvoltage # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes 36.04 IGBT Desat AW1.03 - IGBT desaturation # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure 36.05 Overheat AW1.04 - Overheat # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No

Chapter 7

A-19 ALARM SETTINGS

P. 21
36.06 Earth AW1.05 - Earth # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 36.07 OverCur AW1.06 - Overcurrent # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No
States machine and process data
36.08 Prc Timeout AW1.07 - Precharge timeout # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No

Chapter 9 P. 55 Read and

Functions
36.09 External Fault AW1.08 - External fault (DI3 = FALSE) # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

36.11 Vdc UV AW1.10 - DC link undervoltage # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No

36.12 Vmin Supply AW1.11 - Minimun supply voltage at power card # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No

36.13 Power Card Fail AW1.12 - Generic failure at power cards # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No

36.16 AC Line Phase AW1.15 - AC line phase # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Read and
36.17 Motor Overload AW2.00 - Motor overload # Def: Coast Stop
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.18 Drive Overload AW2.01 - Drive overload # Def: Coast Stop All 2 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128 Write
I/0 Configuration
Read and
36.19 AW2.02 AW2.02 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/4 206
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 36 - ALARM SETTINGS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Read and
Programming overview 36.20 AW2.03 AW2.03 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9
36.21 Underload AW2.04 - Underload # Def: Warning
Read and
All 2 Yes
Programming tools Write

Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 36.22 Fluxup Timeout AW2.05 - Fluxup timeout # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels
and control modes
AW2.06 - Load current exceeded the maximum Read and
Chapter 6 P. 18 36.23 Max Current Limit
limit
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure

Read and
Chapter 7

A-19 ALARM SETTINGS

P. 21 36.24 Speed Deviation AW2.07 - Speed deviation # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 36.25 Overspeed AW2.08 - Overspeed # Def: Coast Stop

Read and
Write
All 2 Yes
States machine and process data

36.27 DSP Init Error AW2.10 - DSP initialization error # Def: Coast Stop Read Only All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Read and
36.28 DSP Par Error AW2.11 - DSP parameters change error # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.29 DC UV Control Limit AW2.12 - DC link undervoltage control limit # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.30 DC OV Control Limit AW2.13 - DC link overvoltage control limit # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
Chapter 10 P. 104 36.31 AW2.14 AW2.14 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Fieldbus

Read and
36.32 ADC AutoCal AW2.15 - ADC auto-calibration failed # Def: Coast Stop
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 11 P. 128
36.33 FlyStart Error
AW3.00 - FlyStart search failed or AC line synchro-
# Def: Coast Stop
Read and
All 2 Yes
I/0 Configuration nization Write

Read and
Chapter 12 P. 145 36.35 AW3.02 AW3.02 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
Read and
Annex P. 156 36.36 AW3.03 AW3.03 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

2/4 207
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 36 - ALARM SETTINGS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Read and
Programming overview 36.37 AW3.04 AW3.04 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9
36.38 AW3.05 AW3.05 # Def: Off
Read and
All 2 Yes
Programming tools Write

Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 36.39 AI Monitor 1 Alarm AW3.06 - Alarm generated by AI Monitor 1 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels
and control modes
Read and
Chapter 6 P. 18 36.40 AI Monitor 2 Alarm AW3.07 - Alarm generated by AI Monitor 2 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure

Read and
Chapter 7

A-19 ALARM SETTINGS

P. 21 36.41 AI Loss AW3.08 - AI Loss # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 36.42 Logic Alarm AW3.09 - Alarm generated by logic function # Def: Off
Read and
Write
All 2 Yes
States machine and process data

Read and
36.43 GWMaxTime AW3.10 - Grid Waiting Maximum Time # Def: Coast Stop All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Write
Functions
Read and
36.46 Prs PID Fdb Loss AW3.13 - Process PID Feedback Loss # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.47 Soft Fill Timeout AW3.14 - Soft Fill Timeout # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.49 Profibus Error AW4.00 - Profibus error # Def: Coast Stop
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 10 P. 104 Read and

Fieldbus
36.50 Modbus Slave Error AW4.01 - Modbus slave error # Def: Coast Stop
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.51 Bad Par AW4.02 - Bad parameter # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 11 P. 128
Read and
I/0 Configuration 36.52 MCU - DSP Timeout AW4.03 - MCU-->DSP timeout # Def: Coast Stop
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 12 P. 145 Read and

Protections and troubleshooting 36.53 MCU - DSP Sync Error AW4.04 - MCU-->DSP sync error # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes
instruments

Annex P. 156 Read and

36.54 Frost Protection AW4.05 - Frost Protection # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes

3/4 208
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 36 - ALARM SETTINGS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Read and
Programming overview 36.55 WDD Sleep Mode AW4.06 - Well Draw Down Sleep Mode # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9
36.56 Low City Pressure AW4.07 - Low City Pressure # Def: Warning
Read and
All 2 Yes
Programming tools Write

Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 36.57 Motor Switch AW4.08 - Motor Switch # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels
and control modes
Read and
Chapter 6 P. 18 36.58 Fdb Monitor AW4.09 - Feedback Supervision # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure

Read and
Chapter 7

A-19 ALARM SETTINGS

P. 21 36.59 In Press Monitor Thres1 AW4.10 - Input Pressure Supervision Threshold 1 # Def: Warning
Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 36.60 In Press Monitor Thres2 AW4.11 - Input Pressure Supervision Threshold 2 # Def: Warning
Read and
Write
All 2 Yes
States machine and process data

Read and
36.61 AutoClean Curr Thres AW4.12 - Auto-Cleaning Current Threshold # Def: Warning All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Write
Functions
Read and
36.62 AW4.13 AW4.13 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.63 AW4.14 AW4.14 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Read and
36.64 AW4.15 AW4.15 # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 10 P. 104 Forces a new precharge sequence after any HW

Fieldbus trip (Alarm Word 1) Read and
36.65 Power Off if HW Fault
- Off [0]
# Def: Off
Write
All 1 Yes
- On [1]

Chapter 11 P. 128 Enables the automatic reset of VminSupply fault

at Drive power-on Write at
I/0 Configuration 36.66 AutoReset VminSupply
- Off [0]
# Def: On
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting Enables the automatic reset of VdcUV or
instruments
AC-Supply faults at Drive power-on Write at
36.67 AutoReset VdcUV/ACSup # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Annex P. 156 - Off [0] Stop Only
- On [1]

4/4 209
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-20 JOG/FLUSHING

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 41 - JOG/FLUSHING
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Enable use of Jog macro

Read and
Chapter 4 P. 9 41.01 Jog En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1
Programming tools

Min: -0.5
Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 41.02 Jog 1 Speed Ref Jog 1 setpoint pu Def: 0.05
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 0.5
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: -0.5

Read and
Quick start-up procedure 41.03 Jog 2 Speed Ref Jog 2 setpoint pu Def: 0.02
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0.5
Chapter 7 P. 21

A-20 JOG/FLUSHING
Control mode selection and settings Min: 0
Read and
41.04 Jog Time 1 Jog 1 ramp time s Def: 2
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 60
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Read and
41.05 Jog Time 2 Jog 2 ramp time s Def: 2
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 60
Functions
Jog 1 command selection
- Off [0]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6] Read and
41.06 Jog 1 Cmd Sel
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
Fieldbus
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- CW1.08 [13]

Chapter 11 P. 128 Read and

I/0 Configuration
41.07 Jog 2 Cmd Sel Jog 2 command selection # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

210
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-21 DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 42 - DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Digital Potentiometer Enable

Write at
Chapter 4 P. 9 42.01 DigPot Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Programming tools

Digital Potentiometer Negative Range Enable

Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 42.02 DigPot Neg Range En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels - On [1]
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0.001

Read and
42.03

A-21 DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER

Quick start-up procedure DigPot Step Up Digital Potentiometer Step Up pu Def: 0.01 All 2 Yes
Write
Max: 1
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: 0.001
Read and
42.04 DigPot Step Down Digital Potentiometer Step Down pu Def: 0.01
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 1
States machine and process data
Digital Potentiometer Positive Limit Min: 0
Read and
42.05 DigPot Pos Lim - Off [0] pu Def: 2
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 - On [1] Max: 2
Functions
Min: -2
Read and
42.06 DigPot Neg Lim Digital Potentiometer Negative Limit pu Def: -2
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 0

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/3 211
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 42 - DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Digital Potentiometer Up Command Selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - ME25:DI-02 [2]
Programming tools
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
Programming levels - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
and control modes 42.07 DigPot Up Cmd Sel - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]

A-21 DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER

Quick start-up procedure
- ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- CW1.12 [9]
Control mode selection and settings
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- CW1.15 [12]
States machine and process data - CW4.00 [13]

Digital Potentiometer Down Command Selection

Chapter 9 P. 55
- Off [0]
Functions
- On [1]
- ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
- ME23:DI-04 [4]
- ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
- ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
42.08 DigPot Down Cmd Sel - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
Fieldbus - ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - CW4.01 [13]
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/3 212
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 42 - DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 1
Programming overview Read and
42.09 DigPot Cmd Delay Digital Potentiometer Command Delay s Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 10
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
DigPot Up/Dw Read and
42.10 Ramp Time
Digital Potentiometer Up/Down Ramp Time s Def: 1
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Digital Potentiometer Clear Command Selection
and control modes
- Off [0]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - On [1]

A-21 DIGIT. POTENTIOMETER

Quick start-up procedure - ME25:DI-02 [2]
- ME22:DI-03 [3]
Chapter 7 P. 21 - ME23:DI-04 [4]
Control mode selection and settings - ME24:DI-05 [5]
- ME38:DI-06 (Option) [6]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - ME39:DI-07 (Option) [7]
Read and
States machine and process data 42.11 DigPot Clear Cmd Sel - ME40:DI-08 (Option) [8] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- ME42:DI-09 (Option) [14]
- ME43:DI-10 (Option) [15]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - ME44:DI-11 (Option) [16]
- ME45:DI-12 (Option) [17]
Functions
- CW1.12 [9]
- CW1.13 [10]
- CW1.14 [11]
- CW1.15 [12]
- CW4.02 [13]

Digital Potentiometer Auxilary-Main Reference

Tracking Read and
42.12 DigPot Aux-Main Track
- Off [0]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Digital Potentiometer Memorized Read and
42.13 DigPot Mem Ref En
Reference Enable
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Min: -2
Chapter 11 P. 128 42.14 DigPot Mem Ref Value Digital Potentiometer Memorized Reference Value pu Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
I/0 Configuration Max: 2

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/3 213
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-22 PROCESS PID

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 45 - PROCESS PID

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Enables/disables PID regulator

Write at
Chapter 4 P. 9 45.01 PID Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- On [1]
Programming tools

Min: 0
Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 45.02 PID Proportional Gain PID regulator proportional gain # Def: 1
Write
All 3 Yes
Programming levels Max: 100
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Read and
Quick start-up procedure 45.03 PID Integral Time PID regulator integral time (Ti=0s, disable) s Def: 0.1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: 0

A-22 PROCESS PID

Read and
45.04 PID Derivative Time PID regulator derivative time s Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 100
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Read and
45.05 PID Upper Limit PID regulator output upper limit pu Def: 1
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 1
Functions
Min: -1
Read and
45.06 PID Lower Limit PID regulator output lower limit pu Def: -1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 0

Min: -1
PID Upper threshold for automatic start/stop Read and
45.07 PID Hysteresis Upper
command
pu Def: 1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1

Min: -1
Chapter 10 P. 104 45.08 PID Hysteresis Lower
PID Lower threshold for automatic start/stop
pu Def: -1
Read and
All 3 Yes
command Write
Fieldbus Max: 1

PID Error Calculation Selection 1 (Main)

Read and
45.09 PID Pump Type Sel 1 - Lift [0] # Def: Lift
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128 - Force [1]
I/0 Configuration
Min: -1
Read and
45.10 PID Fixed Ref 1 PID Fixed Reference 1 (Main) pu Def: 0 All 3 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145 Max: 1
Write
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/6 214
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 45 - PROCESS PID

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
PID Reference Source Selection 1 (Main)
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Fixed [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - AI1 [2]
Read and
Programming tools 45.11 PID Ref Src Sel 1 - AI2 [3] # Def: Off
Write
All 3 Yes
- AI3 (Option) [4]
- AI4 (Option) [5]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Profibus [6]
Programming levels - Modbus [7]
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 PID Feedback Source Selection 1 (Main)

Quick start-up procedure
- Off [0]
- AI1 [2]
Chapter 7 P. 21 45.12 PID Fdb Src Sel 1
- AI2 [3]
# Def: Off
Read and
All 3 Yes
Control mode selection and settings
- AI3 (Option) [4] Write

A-22 PROCESS PID

- AI4 (Option) [5]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - Profibus [6]
- Modbus [7]
States machine and process data

PID Error Calculation Selection 2 (Aux)

Read and
Chapter 9 P. 55 45.13 PID Pump Type Sel 2 - Lift [0] # Def: Lift
Write
All 3 Yes
- Force [1]
Functions

Min: -1
Read and
45.14 PID Fixed Ref 2 PID Fixed Reference 2 (Aux) pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1

PID Reference Source Selection 2 (Aux)

- Off [0]
- Fixed [1]
- AI1 [2]
Read and
Chapter 10 P. 104 45.15 PID Ref Src Sel 2 - AI2 [3] # Def: Off
Write
All 3 Yes
Fieldbus
- AI3 (Option) [4]
- AI4 (Option) [5]
- Profibus [6]
- Modbus [7]

Chapter 11 P. 128 PID Feedback Source Selection 2 (Aux)

I/0 Configuration - Off [0]
- AI1 [2]
- AI2 [3] Read and
Chapter 12 P. 145 45.16 PID Fdb Src Sel 2
- AI3 (Option) [4]
# Def: Off
Write
All 3 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments - AI4 (Option) [5]
- Profibus [6]
Annex P. 156 - Modbus [7]

2/6 215
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 45 - PROCESS PID

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
PID function mode selection
Programming overview
- Continuous [0] Read and
45.17 PID Mode Sel
- On/Off [1]
# Def: Continuous
Write
All 3 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9 - Both [2]

Programming tools
Motor Pause Enable
Write at
45.20 Motor Pause Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
Chapter 5 P. 16 - On [1]
Programming levels
and control modes
Min: 0
Read and
Chapter 6 P. 18 45.21 Motor Pause Curr Limit Motor Pause Current Limit % Def: 10
Write
All 3 Yes
Quick start-up procedure Max: 100

Chapter 7 P. 21 Min: 0
Read and
Control mode selection and settings 45.22 Motor Pause Time Limit Motor Pause Time Limit s Def: 10 All 3 Yes

A-22 PROCESS PID

Write
Max: 1000
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data Min: -1
Read and
45.23 Motor Pause Fdb Thres Motor Pause Feedback Threshold pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Auxiliary Pumps Enable
Read and
45.30 Aux Pumps Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 3 Yes
- On [1]

Min: 0
Read and
45.31 Aux Pumps Off Thres Auxiliary Pumps switch-off threshold pu Def: 0.1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1

Min: 0
Read and
Chapter 10 P. 104
45.32 Aux Pumps On Thres Auxiliary Pumps switch-on threshold pu Def: 0.1
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 1
Fieldbus

Min: 1
Read and
45.33 Aux Pumps Off Wait Auxiliary Pumps Waiting time for next pump off s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 300
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration Min: 1
Read and
45.34 Aux Pumps On Wait Auxiliary Pumps Waiting time for next pump on s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 300
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments Min: 1
Read and
45.35 Aux Pumps Number Auxiliary Pumps Number # Def: 1 All 3 Yes
Annex P. 156 Max: 6
Write

3/6 216
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 45 - PROCESS PID

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Soft Fill Mode
Programming overview
- Off [0]
Write at
45.40 Soft Fill Mode - Horizontal mode [1] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Vertical simple mode [2]
Programming tools
- Vertical complex mode [3]

Min: 0
Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 45.41 Soft Fill Timeout Soft Fill Timeout s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Programming levels Max: 100
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: -2
Read and
Quick start-up procedure 45.42 Soft Fill Threshold Soft Fill Threshold (Pressure, Flow, Level) pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 2
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: 0

A-22 PROCESS PID

Read and
45.43 Soft Fill Band Soft Fill Band pu Def: 0.05 All 3 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 2
Write
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Read and
45.44 Soft Fill Ramp Time Soft Fill Ramp Time s Def: 1 All 3 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 100
Write
Functions
Well Draw Down Enable
Write at
45.50 WDD Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- On [1]

Min: 0
Read and
45.51 WDD Threshold 1 Well Draw Down Threshold 1 pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 2

Min: 0
Chapter 10 P. 104
45.52 WDD Timeout 1 Well Draw Down Timeout 1 s Def: 5
Read and
All 3 Yes
Fieldbus Write
Max: 100

Min: 0
Read and
45.53 WDD Threshold 2 Well Draw Down Threshold 2 pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 11 P. 128 Max: 2
I/0 Configuration
Min: 0
Read and
45.54 WDD Timeout 2 Well Draw Down Timeout 2 s Def: 5 All 3 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145 Max: 100
Write
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
Min: 0
Annex P. 156 45.55 WDD Threshold 3 Well Draw Down Threshold 3 pu Def: 0
Read and
All 3 Yes
Write
Max: 2

4/6 217
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 45 - PROCESS PID
Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility
Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read and
45.56 WDD Timeout 3 Well Draw Down Timeout 3 s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 100
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Feedback Supervision Enable
Write at
45.60 Fdb Mon Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Feedback Supervision Lower Limit (Delta between Read and
45.61 Fdb Mon Low Lim
Prs PID Ref and threshold)
pu Def: 0.05
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 2
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 45.62 Fdb Mon Up Lim
Feedback Supervision Upper Limit (Delta between
pu Def: 0.05
Read and
All 3 Yes
Prs PID Ref and threshold) Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 2

A-22 PROCESS PID

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read and
States machine and process data 45.63 Fdb Mon Timeout Feedback Supervision Timeout s Def: 5
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 300

Chapter 9 P. 55
Input Pressure Supervision Enable
Functions Write at
45.70 In Press Mon Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- On [1]

Min: 0
Read and
45.71 In Press Mon Alm Thres Input Pressure Supervision Alarm Threshold pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 2

Min: 0
Read and
45.72 In Press Mon Trip Thres Input Pressure Supervision Trip Threshold pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 2
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Read and
45.73 In Press Mon Ref Delta Input Pressure Supervision Reference Delta pu Def: 0
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 2

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

5/6 218
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 45 - PROCESS PID
Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility
Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Dead Band Enable
Programming overview Write at
45.80 Dead Band Enable - Off [0] # Def: Off
Stop Only
All 3 Yes
- On [1]
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Dead Band Lower Limit (Delta between Prs PID Read and
45.81 Dead Band Low Lim
Fdb and threshold)
pu Def: 0.05
Write
All 3 Yes
Max: 2
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Dead Band Upper Limit (Delta between Prs PID Read and
45.82 Dead Band Up Lim
Fdb and threshold)
pu Def: 0.05
Write
All 3 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 2
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 45.83 Dead Band Time Delay Dead Band Time Delay s Def: 5
Read and
All 3 Yes
Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 300

A-22 PROCESS PID

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

6/6 219
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-23 FAULT HISTORY

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 59 - FAULT HISTORY

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Clear Fault Log

Read and
Chapter 4 P. 9 59.65 Clear Fault Log - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 1 No
- Clear log [1]
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21

A-23 FAULT HISTORY

Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

220
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-24 TRACE SETTINGS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 66 - TRACE SETTINGS

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Enables the trace

Chapter 4 P. 9 - Off [0]
Read and
Programming tools
66.01 Trace Enable - On - Trigger A [1] #
Write
All 1 Yes
- On - Trigger B [2]
- On - Trig A OR Trig B [3]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Selection of command for restarting the trace
and control modes - Alarm Reset [510607]
Chapter 6 P. 18 66.02 Trace Restart
- CW1.12 [510612]
- CW1.13 [510613]
#
Read and
Write
All 1 Yes
Quick start-up procedure
- CW1.14 [510614]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- CW1.15 [510615]

A-24 TRACE SETTINGS

Control mode selection and settings
Read and
66.03 Trigger Position Trigger position in the buffer % All 1 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Write
States machine and process data
Time interval between two samples
- 1 [1]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - 2 [2]
Functions
- 5 [5]
- 10 [10]
- 20 [20]
Read and
66.04 Sampling Time - 50 [50] ms
Write
All 1 Yes
- 100 [100]
- 200 [200]
- 500 [500]
- 1000 [1000]
- 2000 [2000]
- 5000 [5000]
Chapter 10 P. 104
Selection of the trigger A type
Fieldbus
- Fault [0]
- Level 1 - Rising [1]
- Level 1 - Falling [2] Read and
66.05 Trigger A - Type
- Out of band [3]
#
Write
All 1 Yes

Chapter 11 P. 128 - Bit-Mask (0->1) [4]

I/0 Configuration
- Bit-Mask (1->0) [5]
- Forced [6]

Chapter 12 P. 145 Read and

Protections and troubleshooting 66.06 Trigger A - Variable ID of the variable linked to the trigger A #
Write
All 1 Yes
instruments

Annex P. 156 Read and

66.07 Trigger A - Level 1 Trigger A level 1 #
Write
All 1 Yes

1/3 221
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 66 - TRACE SETTINGS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Read and
Programming overview 66.08 Trigger A - Level 2 Trigger A level 2 #
Write
All 1 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9
66.09 Trigger A - Mask
Mask applied to trigger A variable to build the
#
Read and
All 1 Yes
Programming tools signal trigger Write

Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 66.10 Samples Number Number of samples to be recorded #
Write
All 1 Yes
Programming levels
and control modes
Selection of the trigger B type
Chapter 6 P. 18 - Fault [0]
Quick start-up procedure - Level 1 - Rising [1]
- Level 1 - Falling [2] Read and
Chapter 7 P. 21 66.11 Trigger B - Type # All 1 Yes

A-24 TRACE SETTINGS

- Out of band [3] Write
Control mode selection and settings - Bit-Mask (0->1) [4]
- Bit-Mask (1->0) [5]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - Forced [6]
States machine and process data
Read and
66.12 Trigger B - Variable ID of the variable linked to the trigger B #
Write
All 1 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions Read and
66.13 Trigger B - Level 1 Trigger B level 1 #
Write
All 1 Yes

Read and
66.14 Trigger B - Level 2 Trigger B level 2 #
Write
All 1 Yes

Mask applied to trigger B variable to build the Read and

66.15 Trigger B - Mask
signal trigger
#
Write
All 1 Yes

Chapter 10 P. 104 66.20 Trace Signal 0 ID of the sampling variable in channel 0 #

Read and
All 1 Yes
Write
Fieldbus

Read and
66.21 Trace Signal 1 ID of the sampling variable in channel 1 #
Write
All 1 Yes

Chapter 11 P. 128
Read and
I/0 Configuration 66.22 Trace Signal 2 ID of the sampling variable in channel 2 #
Write
All 1 Yes

Chapter 12 P. 145 66.23 Trace Signal 3 ID of the sampling variable in channel 3 #

Read and
All 1 Yes
Protections and troubleshooting Write
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/3 222
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 66 - TRACE SETTINGS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Read and
Programming overview 66.24 Trace Signal 4 ID of the sampling variable in channel 4 #
Write
All 1 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9
66.25 Trace Signal 5 ID of the sampling variable in channel 5 #
Read and
All 1 Yes
Programming tools Write

Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 66.26 Trace Signal 6 ID of the sampling variable in channel 6 #
Write
All 1 Yes
Programming levels
and control modes
Read and
Chapter 6 P. 18 66.27 Trace Signal 7 ID of the sampling variable in channel 7 #
Write
All 1 Yes
Quick start-up procedure

Read and
Chapter 7 P. 21 66.28 Trace Signal 8 ID of the sampling variable in channel 8 # All 1 Yes

A-24 TRACE SETTINGS

Write
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22 66.29 Trace Signal 9 ID of the sampling variable in channel 9 #

Read and
Write
All 1 Yes
States machine and process data

Trace Status
Chapter 9 P. 55 - Trace disabled/undef [0]
- Running & wait trig. [1]
Functions
- Defined & wait start [2]
66.51 Trace status - Trace stopped [3] # Read Only All 1 No
- Trace parameter error [4]
- Trace wait post trig [5]
- Trigger reached [64]
- Trace completed [128]

66.52 Trigger Time Stamp Time Stamp of the trigger signal # Read Only All 1 No

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/3 223
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-25 PROFIBUS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 81 - PROFIBUS
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Profibus Enable
Read and
Chapter 4 P. 9 81.01 Profibus En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- On [1]
Programming tools

Min: 3
Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 81.02 Slave Address Slave address # Def: 3
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels Max: 127
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0.01

Read and
Quick start-up procedure 81.03 Timeout Timeout s Def: 0.01
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 10
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Enable freeze of Speed Ref/Cmd Wd
Read and
81.04 Freeze En - Off [0] # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

A-25 PROFIBUS
Chapter 8 P. 22 - On [1]
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Read and
81.05 Delay Com Restore Delay for communication restore s Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 10
Functions
Selection of PPO type
- PPO1 [1]
- PPO2 [2] Read and
81.20 PPO Type
- PPO3 [3]
# Def: PPO5
Write
All 2 Yes
- PPO4 [4]
- PPO5 [5]

IPZ03 selection
- Off [0]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Fieldbus - Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - Torque Lim Ref Pos [7] Read and
I/0 Configuration
81.21 IPZ03 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 12 P. 145
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments - 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Annex P. 156 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
- PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

1/3 224
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 81 - PROFIBUS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Read and
Programming overview 81.22 IPZ04 Sel IPZ04 selection # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 4 P. 9
81.23 IPZ05 Sel IPZ05 selection # Def: Off
Read and
All 2 Yes
Programming tools Write

Read and
Chapter 5 P. 16 81.24 IPZ06 Sel IPZ06 selection # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Programming levels
and control modes
Read and
Chapter 6 P. 18 81.25 IPZ07 Sel IPZ07 selection # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Quick start-up procedure

Read and
Chapter 7 P. 21 81.26 IPZ08 Sel IPZ08 selection # Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings

A-25 PROFIBUS
Chapter 8 P. 22 81.27 IPZ09 Sel IPZ09 selection # Def: Off
Read and
Write
All 2 Yes
States machine and process data

Read and
81.28 IPZ10 Sel IPZ10 selection # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Write
Functions
Min: 0
Read and
81.31 OPZ03 Sel OPZ03 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Min: 0
Read and
81.32 OPZ04 Sel OPZ04 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Min: 0
Read and
Chapter 10 P. 104 81.33 OPZ05 Sel OPZ05 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Fieldbus Max: 9999

Min: 0
Read and
81.34 OPZ06 Sel OPZ06 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration
Min: 0
Read and
81.35 OPZ07 Sel OPZ07 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 12 P. 145 Max: 9999
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/3 225
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 81 - PROFIBUS

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read and
81.36 OPZ08 Sel OPZ08 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Read and
81.37 OPZ09 Sel OPZ09 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Read and
81.38 OPZ10 Sel OPZ10 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 9999
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

A-25 PROFIBUS
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/3 226
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-26 MODBUS

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 82 - MODBUS
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Modbus enable
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Off [0]
Read and
Programming tools
82.01 Modbus En - RTU [1] #
Write
All 2 Yes
- TCP/IP [2]
- RTU & TCP/IP [3]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Read and
Programming levels
and control modes
82.02 Slave Address Slave address #
Write
All 2 Yes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Baud rate
- 300 [300]
Chapter 7 P. 21 - 600 [600]
Control mode selection and settings
- 1200 [1200]
- 2400 [2400]
Chapter 8

A-26 MODBUS
P. 22 - 4800 [4800] Read and
82.03 RTU Baud Rate
- 9600 [9600]
#
Write
All 2 Yes
States machine and process data
- 19200 [19200]
- 28800 [28800]
Chapter 9 P. 55 - 38400 [38400]
- 57600 [57600]
Functions
- 115200 [115200]

Parity type
- None + 1 Stop bit [0]
Read and
82.04 RTU Parity Type - None + 2 Stop bit [1] #
Write
All 2 Yes
- Even [2]
- Odd [3]

Read and
82.05 RTU Timeout Timeout for alarm 53 (0 = disabled) s All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 Write
Fieldbus
Read and
82.06 Min Slave Reaction Time Minimum slave reaction time ms
Write
All 2 Yes

Selection of input auxiliary exchange area (from

Chapter 11 P. 128 Modbus to Drive)
Read and
I/0 Configuration 82.07 Mod Exchange Area In - Off [0] #
Write
All 2 Yes
- 1 Data Exchange Area [1]
- 2 Data Exchange Area [2]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

227
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview
Enables the configuration of exchange area 1
and 2
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Off [0] Read and
Programming tools 87.01 En Exch Area 1/2 Config
- En Area 1 In [1]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- En Area 2 Out [2]
- En Area 1 In & 2 Out [3]
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Area 1 Input Word 01 selection
and control modes - Off [0]
Chapter 6 P. 18 - Main Speed Ref [98]

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
Chapter 7 P. 21 - Speed Feedforward [3]
Control mode selection and settings
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Chapter 8 P. 22 - Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
States machine and process data 87.04 Area 1 Input Wd 01 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Chapter 9 P. 55
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Functions
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
- PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Area 1 Input Word 02 selection

- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Fieldbus
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.05 Area 1 Input Wd 02 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
I/0 Configuration
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
- Torque Ref [9]
Chapter 12 P. 145 - Torque FeedForward [21]
Protections and troubleshooting - 1 Analog Output [12]
instruments
- 2 Analog Output [13]
Annex P. 156 - PrsPIDRef1 [65]
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
- PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

1/10 228
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Area 1 Input Word 03 selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Programming tools
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Programming levels - Cmd Wd 3 [5]
and control modes - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.06 Area 1 Input Wd 03 Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Write

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Control mode selection and settings
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
States machine and process data - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Area 1 Input Word 04 selection
Functions
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.07 Area 1 Input Wd 04 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Fieldbus - Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
I/0 Configuration - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/10 229
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Area 1 Input Word 05 selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Programming tools
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Programming levels - Cmd Wd 3 [5]
and control modes - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.08 Area 1 Input Wd 05 Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Write

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Control mode selection and settings
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
States machine and process data - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Area 1 Input Word 06 selection
Functions
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.09 Area 1 Input Wd 06 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Fieldbus - Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
I/0 Configuration - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

3/10 230
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Area 1 Input Word 07 selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Programming tools
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Programming levels - Cmd Wd 3 [5]
and control modes - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.10 Area 1 Input Wd 07 Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Write

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Control mode selection and settings
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
States machine and process data - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Area 1 Input Word 08 selection
Functions
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.11 Area 1 Input Wd 08 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Fieldbus - Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
I/0 Configuration - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

4/10 231
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Area 1 Input Word 09 selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Programming tools
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Programming levels
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
and control modes - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.12 Area 1 Input Wd 09 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Control mode selection and settings
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
States machine and process data - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Area 1 Input Word 10 selection
Functions - Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.13 Area 1 Input Wd 10 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Fieldbus - Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
I/0 Configuration - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

5/10 232
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Area 1 Input Word 11 selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Programming tools
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Programming levels - Cmd Wd 3 [5]
and control modes - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.14 Area 1 Input Wd 11 Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Write

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Control mode selection and settings
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
States machine and process data - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Area 1 Input Word 12 selection
Functions
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.15 Area 1 Input Wd 12 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Fieldbus - Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
I/0 Configuration - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

6/10 233
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Area 1 Input Word 13 selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Programming tools
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Programming levels - Cmd Wd 3 [5]
and control modes - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.16 Area 1 Input Wd 13 Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Write

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Control mode selection and settings
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
States machine and process data - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Area 1 Input Word 14 selection
Functions
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.17 Area 1 Input Wd 14 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Fieldbus - Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
I/0 Configuration - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

7/10 234
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Area 1 Input Word 15 selection
Programming overview
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
Chapter 4 P. 9 - Aux Speed Ref [1]
Programming tools
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
Chapter 5 P. 16 - Cmd Wd 2 [4]
Programming levels - Cmd Wd 3 [5]
and control modes - Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.18 Area 1 Input Wd 15 Sel # Def: Off All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
- Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Write

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
- Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
Chapter 7 P. 21
- 1 Analog Output [12]
Control mode selection and settings
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 8 P. 22
- PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
States machine and process data - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]

Chapter 9 P. 55
Area 1 Input Word 16 selection
Functions
- Off [0]
- Main Speed Ref [98]
- Aux Speed Ref [1]
- Add Speed Ref [2]
- Speed Feedforward [3]
- Cmd Wd 1 [99]
- Cmd Wd 2 [4]
- Cmd Wd 3 [5]
- Cmd Wd 4 [6] Read and
87.19 Area 1 Input Wd 16 Sel
- Torque Lim Ref Pos [7]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 10 P. 104 - Torque Lim Ref Neg [8]
Fieldbus - Torque Ref [9]
- Torque FeedForward [21]
- 1 Analog Output [12]
- 2 Analog Output [13]
- PrsPIDRef1 [65]
Chapter 11 P. 128 - PrsPIDFdb1 [66]
I/0 Configuration - PrsPIDRef2 [67]
- PrsPIDFdb2 [68]
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting Min: 0
Read and
instruments 87.52 Area 2 Output Wd 01 Sel Area 2 Output Word 01 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Annex P. 156

8/10 235
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read and
87.53 Area 2 Output Wd 02 Sel Area 2 Output Word 02 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Read and
87.54 Area 2 Output Wd 03 Sel Area 2 Output Word 03 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Read and
87.55 Area 2 Output Wd 04 Sel Area 2 Output Word 04 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 9999

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 87.56 Area 2 Output Wd 05 Sel Area 2 Output Word 05 selection # Def: 0
Read and
All 2 Yes
Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 9999

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read and
States machine and process data 87.57 Area 2 Output Wd 06 Sel Area 2 Output Word 06 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0
Read and
Functions 87.58 Area 2 Output Wd 07 Sel Area 2 Output Word 07 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Min: 0
Read and
87.59 Area 2 Output Wd 08 Sel Area 2 Output Word 08 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Min: 0
Read and
87.60 Area 2 Output Wd 09 Sel Area 2 Output Word 09 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Read and
87.61 Area 2 Output Wd 10 Sel Area 2 Output Word 10 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Chapter 11 P. 128 Min: 0

Read and
I/0 Configuration 87.62 Area 2 Output Wd 11 Sel Area 2 Output Word 11 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

9/10 236
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 87 - EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Read and
87.63 Area 2 Output Wd 12 Sel Area 2 Output Word 12 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Read and
87.64 Area 2 Output Wd 13 Sel Area 2 Output Word 13 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Read and
87.65 Area 2 Output Wd 14 Sel Area 2 Output Word 14 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 9999

A-27 EXCH AREA 1/2 CONFIG

Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7 P. 21 87.66 Area 2 Output Wd 15 Sel Area 2 Output Word 15 selection # Def: 0
Read and
All 2 Yes
Write
Control mode selection and settings Max: 9999

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read and
States machine and process data 87.67 Area 2 Output Wd 16 Sel Area 2 Output Word 16 selection # Def: 0
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 9999

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

10/10 237
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-28 ETHERNET - TCP/IP

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 88 - ETHERNET - TCP/IP

Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Min: 0
Write at
Chapter 4 P. 9 88.01 IP Address IP address # Def: 192.168.1.1
Stop Only
All 1 Yes
Max: 20
Programming tools

Min: 0
Write at
Chapter 5 P. 16 88.02 Subnet Mask Subnet mask # Def: 255.255.255.0
Stop Only
All 1 Yes
Programming levels Max: 20
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Write at
Quick start-up procedure 88.03 Default Gateway Default Gateway # Def: 0.0.0.0
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 20
Chapter 7

A-28 ETHERNET - TCP/IP

P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: 0
Write at
88.11 IP Address-Octet1 IP address - Octet 1 # Def: 192
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 255
States machine and process data
Min: 0
Write at
88.12 IP Address-Octet2 IP address - Octet 2 # Def: 168
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 255
Functions
Min: 0
Write at
88.13 IP Address-Octet3 IP address - Octet 3 # Def: 1
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Min: 0
Write at
88.14 IP Address-Octet4 IP address - Octet 4 # Def: 1
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 238
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope 88 - ETHERNET - TCP/IP

Chapter 2 P. 7 Access Control Visibility

Safety Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Chapter 3 P. 8
Min: 0
Programming overview Write at
88.15 Subnet mask-Octet1 Subnet mask - Octet 1 # Def: 255
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools Min: 0
Write at
88.16 Subnet mask-Octet2 Subnet mask - Octet 2 # Def: 255
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels Min: 0
and control modes Write at
88.17 Subnet mask-Octet3 Subnet mask - Octet 3 # Def: 255
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Chapter 6 P. 18 Max: 255
Quick start-up procedure
Min: 0
Chapter 7

A-28 ETHERNET - TCP/IP

P. 21 Write at
88.18 Subnet mask-Octet4 Subnet mask - Octet 4 # Def: 0
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Control mode selection and settings Max: 255

Chapter 8 P. 22 Min: 0
Read and
States machine and process data 88.20 Host Name Host Name # Def: Drive
Write
All 2 Yes
Max: 16

Chapter 9 P. 55
Min: 0
Functions Write at
88.21 Default Gateway-Octet1 Default Gateway - Octet 1 # Def: 0
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Min: 0
Write at
88.22 Default Gateway-Octet2 Default Gateway - Octet 2 # Def: 0
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Min: 0
Write at
88.23 Default Gateway-Octet3 Default Gateway - Octet 3 # Def: 0
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Min: 0
Write at
88.24 Default Gateway-Octet4 Default Gateway - Octet 4 # Def: 0
Stop Only
All 2 Yes
Max: 255

Chapter 11 P. 128 Min: 0

I/0 Configuration 99.17 MAC Address MAC address # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 17
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 239
 Answer Drives 1000 A
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 A-29 INFO

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 99 - INFO
Safety
Access Control Visibility
Chapter 3 P. 8 Id Name Description Unit Range Download
Type Type Level
Programming overview

Min: 0
Chapter 4 P. 9 99.30 Product Version Product Version # Def: 0 Read Only All 1 No
Max: 48
Programming tools

Min: 0
Chapter 5 P. 16 99.11 Info Firmware Info firmware # Def: 0 Read Only All 1 No
Programming levels Max: 65535
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Min: 0
Quick start-up procedure 99.02 SW Version Parameter set and software package version # Def: 1G1504B1 Read Only All 1 Yes
Max: 16
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings Min: 0
99.16 Serial Number Serial number # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 8 P. 22 Max: 20

A-29 INFO
States machine and process data
Min: 0
99.17 MAC Address MAC address # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Chapter 9 P. 55 Max: 17
Functions
Min: 0
99.70 ETH-Profi FW Version ETH-Profi FW Version # Def: 0 Read Only All 2 No
Max: 65535

Blocks the modification of parameters from

keypad Read and
99.88 Parameter Security
- Off [0]
# Def: Off
Write
All 2 No
- On [1]

Chapter 10 P. 104 Min: -32768

Read and
Fieldbus 99.89 Security Code Security code input to unlock the parameters # Def: 0
Write
All 2 No
Max: 32767

Reset all parameters to default

Write at
Chapter 11 P. 128 99.90 Reset All - Reset All [0] # Def: Reset All
Stop Only
All 2 No
- Off [1]
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

240
 Answer Drives 1000 B
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 ANNEX B SWITCHING FREQUENCIES Freq [06.25]. After modifying parameter Switching Freq [06.25] (range
Scope 1.5kHz ÷ 8kHz) a confirmation is requested through the dialog window.
Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety CURRENT DERATING BASED ON SWITCHING The possible selections are:
FREQUENCY 1.5 kHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
The default switching frequency is 2kHz. Table B.1 reports the Drive output
current derating coefficient based on the selected switching frequency. Table B.1 - Current downgrading based on switching frequency
The switching frequency value is selected with parameter Switching
Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools
CLASS 1 CLASS 2
AD1000
Chapter 5 P. 16
1,5KHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 1,5KHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz
Programming levels

ANNEX B SWITCHING FREQUENCIES

and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 AD1A0P3F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%
Quick start-up procedure
AD1A0P4F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings AD1A0P6F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%

Chapter 8 P. 22
AD1A008F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%
States machine and process data

AD1A011F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%
Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions AD1A015F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%

AD1A018F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%

AD1A022F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%

AD1A028F 100% 100% 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% 80%

AD1A030F 100% 100% 100% 92% 84% 100% 100% 100% 100% 84%
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus AD1A036F 100% 100% 100% 90% 80% 100% 100% 100% 90% 80%

AD1A045F 100% 100% 100% 100% 90% 100% 100% 100% 100% 90%

Chapter 11 P. 128 AD1A053F 100% 100% 100% 90% 80% 100% 100% 100% 90% 80%
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

1/2 241
 Answer Drives 1000 B
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope CLASS 1 CLASS 2
AD1000
Chapter 2 P. 7 1,5KHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 1,5KHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz
Safety

AD1A066F 100% 100% 100% 85% 70% 100% 100% 100% 80% 70%
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview
AD1A086F 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

Chapter 4 P. 9 AD1A108F 100% 100% 85% 100% 100% 80%

Programming tools

AD1A125F 100% 100% 85% 100% 100% 85%

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels AD1A150F 100% 100% 85% 100% 100% 85%

ANNEX B SWITCHING FREQUENCIES

and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 AD1A166F 100% 90% 80% 100% 90% 80%

Quick start-up procedure
AD1A210F 100% 100% 80% 65% 100% 100% 80% 65%
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings AD1A260F 100% 100% 80% 65% 100% 100% 80% 65%

Chapter 8 P. 22
AD1A290F 100% 100% 80% 65% 100% 100% 80% 65%
States machine and process data

AD1A350F 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 80%

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions AD1A370F 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 80%

AD1A440F 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 80%

AD1A480F 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 80%

AD1A520F 100% 100% 80% 100% 100% 80%

Chapter 10 P. 104
The full current switching frequency is highlighted in bold.
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

2/2 242
 Answer Drives 1000 C
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 ANNEX C DATA PROCESS REFRESH TIME

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Table C.1 - Refresh times

Safety
Data type Variable refresh time [ms]
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview Digital output 1 ms

Chapter 4 P. 9 Analog output

Switching frequency for switching frequencies over 4kHz
Programming tools
Twice of switching frequency for switching frequencies less than or equal to 4kHz

Fieldbus 1 ms minimum
Chapter 5 P. 16

ANNEX C DATA PROCESS REFRESH TIME

Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

243
 Answer Drives 1000 D
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 ANNEX D FLOW CHART MENU

Scope
Drive configuration depends on the parameters in the structure called
Chapter 2 P. 7 “System Menu”. The System Menu allows the operator to navigate over
Safety menus, submenus and parameters.
The Flowchart shows all families available at levels 1, 2.
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX D FLOW CHART MENU

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

244
 Answer Drives 1000 D
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX D FLOW CHART MENU

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

245
 Answer Drives 1000 D
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes
Process PID
Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX D FLOW CHART MENU

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

246
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7 Figure E.1 - General scheme of control

Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

247
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.2 - Speed Demand scheme

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

248
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.3 - Speed reference source selection (Main and auxiliary)
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration Process PID Process PID

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

249
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.4 - Speed reference source selection (Additional and Feedforward)
Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

250
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.5 - Digital Potentiometer

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

251
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.6 - Speed PI Regulator

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

252
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.7 - Torque reference limitation

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

253
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.8 - Process PID

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

254
 Answer Drives 1000 E
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 Figure E.9 - Legend

Scope

Chapter 2 P. 7
Safety

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9
Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18

ANNEX E CONTROL SCHEMES

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

255
 Answer Drives 1000 F
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 ANNEX F SETTING UP THE FIRMWARE OF THE DRIVE When the page is displayed you can read a description of the firmware
Scope
Drives of AD1000 Basis family allow you to perform a complete Drive you have chosen (“Basis Firmware Prototype 9/9/2009” in the sample on
Chapter 2 P. 7 Firmware update using a Serial line connection. the right).
Safety
You need: The Firmware installation page allows you to select:
Chapter 3 P. 8
• A connection to the AD1000 using the Serial Line. • The Serial COM port target
Programming overview
• A firmware file (file extension is .fmw) used to update the Drive. • The firmware installation speed
• If you want to save the old parameter values and then reapply them
Chapter 4 P. 9 at the end of the firmware installation process (optional but slower)

ANNEX F SETTING UP THE FIRMWARE OF THE DRIVE

WARNING
Programming tools
Please pay attention to this operation because you could erroneously
operate with a wrong Drive. Figure F.2 – Firmware setup options
Chapter 5 P. 16 Carefully check if the Drive selected is the Drive you want to work with.
Programming levels
and control modes
The update will erase the previous firmware and the values of the
parameters of the control card.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure
CHOOSING THE FIRMWARE FILE
Chapter 7 P. 21 You need to select the proper firmware setup file. It has a .fmw extension.
Control mode selection and settings When selected click on the finish button. A new window will appear.
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data
Figure F.1 – Choosing the firmware file

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Click on the Start ! button to install the new firmware.

The steps it will perform are:

Figure F.3 – Start firmware installation

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

256
 Answer Drives 1000 F
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 • Read of the whole current Drive configuration At end of Drive Data read a warning is displayed.
Scope You have to manually close the Jumper P34 and reset the board in order
Chapter 2 P. 7 Figure F.4 – Reading the configuration to put the Board in “firmware installation mode”
Safety
Figure F.6 – Close the jumper
Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9

ANNEX F SETTING UP THE FIRMWARE OF THE DRIVE

Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Programming levels
and control modes After click on the OK button the firmware installation starts.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure Figure F.7 – Download Firmware. Started
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
• Read of the current Drive values
Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data Figure F.5 – Reading the Drive values

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Firmware installation ended

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus
Figure F.8 – Download Firmware. Installation succeeded

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

257
 Answer Drives 1000 F
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 You will have to manually open the Jumper P34 and then reset the board Operation completed. Firmware installed.
Scope in order to proceed.
Chapter 2 P. 7
Figure F.11 – Download Firmware. Firmware installed
Safety Figure F.9 – Download Firmware. Open the jumper

Chapter 3 P. 8
Programming overview

Chapter 4 P. 9

ANNEX F SETTING UP THE FIRMWARE OF THE DRIVE

Programming tools

Chapter 5 P. 16
Now follows another 2 steps where the new configuration will be
Programming levels read and the old data values will be applied.
and control modes

Chapter 6 P. 18 Figure F.10 – Download Firmware. Reading the new configuration

Quick start-up procedure

Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings

Chapter 8 P. 22
States machine and process data

Chapter 9 P. 55
Functions

Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus

Chapter 11 P. 128
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

258
 Answer Drives 1000 G
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 ANNEX G PUMP APPLICATION EXAMPLES Set the parameters for PID regulator (e.g. the desired reference is 2 bar,
Scope fixed), using the parameters available in the family PROCESS PID [45.00]:
Chapter 2 P. 7 EXAMPLE N. 1 – WATER PRESSURE REGULATION [45.01] PID Enable On
Safety WITH PROCESS PID [45.02] PID Proportional Gain 0.500
The following example shows how to configure AD1000 drive in order to [45.03] PID Integral Time 0.800 s
Chapter 3 P. 8 [45.10] PID Fixed Ref 1 0.200 pu
Programming overview
perform a process variable regulation in a typical hydraulic system; in this
case the process variable is the water pressure at the outlet of the pump. [45.11] PID Ref Src Sel 1 Fixed
See Figure 1 for a scheme of the hydraulic system. [45.12] PID Fdb Src Sel 1 AI1
Chapter 4 P. 9 [45.17] PID Mode Sel Continuous
Programming tools
ASSUMPTION Note: [45.10] = desired reference / [13.11] = 2 [bar] / 10 [bar] = 0.200 [pu]
The output of the Pressure Transducer (PT) is a current signal in the range
Chapter 5

ANNEX G PUMP APPLICATION EXAMPLES

P. 16
(4÷20) mA connected to AI1 (analog input) of AD1000. The full scale of
Programming levels
and control modes PT is 10 bar.
Chapter 6 P. 18
Quick start-up procedure HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
Set the jumper P6 in position 1-2 on Basis board in order to configure the
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
analog input AI1 as current input.

Chapter 8 P. 22 STEPS TO CONFIGURE AD1000 DRIVE

States machine and process data Set the motor parameters with the right data, using the parameters
available in the family INDUCTION MOTOR [02.00].
Chapter 9 P. 55 Set the drive parameters with the right data, in particular the size
Functions (Drive Size [16.01]), using the parameters available in the family
INVERTER [06.00].
Set AI1 parameters, using the parameters available in the family ANALOG
INPUTS [17.00]:
[17.05] AI1 Value for 1 pu 100.00 %
[17.09] AI1 Value for 0 pu 20.00 %
[17.13] AI1 Neg Range En Off
[17.25] AI1 Type mA
Chapter 10 P. 104
Fieldbus Set the full scale of the sensor, using the parameters available in the family
PER-UNIT BASE DATA [13.00]:
[13.11] User Per-Unit Press. 1 10.000 bar

Chapter 11 P. 128 Set the speed reference for the motor, using the parameters available in
I/0 Configuration the family SPEED REFERENCE [32.00]:
[32.01] Main Speed Ref Sel Prs PID
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

259
 Answer Drives 1000 G
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 EXAMPLE N. 2 – WATER FLOW REGULATION Set the parameters for PID regulator (e.g. the desired reference is 15
Scope
WITH PROCESS PID m^3/h, fixed), using the parameters available in the family PROCESS PID
Chapter 2 P. 7 The following example shows how to configure AD1000 drive in order to [45.00]:
Safety perform a process variable regulation in a typical hydraulic system; in this [45.01] PID Enable On
case the process variable is the water flow at the outlet of the pump. See [45.02] PID Proportional Gain 0.500
Chapter 3 P. 8 [45.03] PID Integral Time 0.800 s
Figure 1 for a scheme of the hydraulic system.
Programming overview
[45.10] PID Fixed Ref 1 0.500 pu
ASSUMPTION [45.11] PID Ref Src Sel 1 Fixed
Chapter 4 P. 9 [45.12] PID Fdb Src Sel 1 AI2
The output of the Flow Transducer (FT) is a voltage signal in the range
Programming tools
(0÷10) V connected to AI2 (analog input) of AD1000. The full scale of FT is [45.17] PID Mode Sel Continuous
30 m^3/h.
Chapter 5 Note: [45.10] = desired reference / [13.12] = 15 [m^3/h] / 30 [m^3/h] =

ANNEX G PUMP APPLICATION EXAMPLES

P. 16
Programming levels 0.500 [pu]
and control modes HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
Chapter 6 P. 18 Set the jumper P7 in position 2-3 on Basis board in order to configure the
Figure 1 – Scheme of the hydraulic system (Examples N. 1 and N. 2).
Quick start-up procedure analog input AI2 as voltage input.
Chapter 7 P. 21
Control mode selection and settings
STEPS TO CONFIGURE AD1000 DRIVE
Set the motor parameters with the right data, using the parameters
Chapter 8 P. 22 available in the family INDUCTION MOTOR [02.00].
States machine and process data Set the drive parameters with the right data, in particular the size
(Drive Size [16.01]), using the parameters available in the family
Chapter 9 P. 55 INVERTER [06.00].
Functions Set the AI1 parameters, using the parameters available in the family
ANALOG INPUTS [17.00]:
[17.06] AI2 Value for 1 pu 100.00 %
[17.10] AI2 Value for 0 pu 0.00 %
[17.14] AI2 Neg Range En Off
[17.26] AI2 Type Volt

Set the full scale of the sensor, using the parameters available in the family
Chapter 10 P. 104
PER-UNIT BASE DATA [13.00]:
Fieldbus
[13.12] User Per-Unit Flow 1 30.000 m^3/h

Set the Speed Reference for the motor, using the parameters available in
the family SPEED REFERENCE [32.00]:
Chapter 11 P. 128 [32.01] Main Speed Ref Sel Prs PID
I/0 Configuration

Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments

Annex P. 156

260
 Answer Drives 1000 G
Summary PREVIOUS VIEW

Chapter 1 P. 6 EXAMPLE N. 3 – WATER PRESSURE REGULATION Set the parameters for PID regulator (e.g. the desired reference is 5 bar,
Scope
WITH PROCESS PID AND INPUT PRESSURE fixed), using the parameters available in the family PROCESS PID [45.00]:
Chapter 2 P. 7 SUPERVISION [45.01] PID Enable On
Safety The following example shows how to configure AD1000 drive in order [45.02] PID Proportional Gain 0.500
to perform a pressure regulation at the outlet of the pump with an input [45.03] PID Integral Time 0.800 s
Chapter 3 P. 8 [45.10] PID Fixed Ref 1 0.500 pu
Programming overview
pressure supervision (at the inlet of the pump). See Figure 2 for a scheme
of the hydraulic system. [45.11] PID Ref Src Sel 1 Fixed
[45.12] PID Fdb Src Sel 1 AI1
Chapter 4 P. 9 [45.16] PID Fdb Src Sel 2 AI2
Programming tools
ASSUMPTION [45.17] PID Mode Sel Continuous
The outputs of the Pressure Transducers (PT1 and PT2) are current signals
in the range (4÷20) mA connected to AI1 and AI2 (analog inputs) of
Chapter 5 Note: [45.10] = desired reference / [13.11] = 5 [bar] / 10 [bar] = 0.500 [pu]

ANNEX G PUMP APPLICATION EXAMPLES

P. 16
AD1000. PT1 is connected to AI1 and PT2 is connected to AI2. The full
Programming levels
and control modes scale of PT1 and PT2 is 10 bar.
Set the parameters for Input Pressure Supervision function (e.g. the alarm
Chapter 6 P. 18
threshold is 3 bar and the trip threshold is 1.5 bar), using the parameters
Quick start-up procedure HARDWARE CONFIGURATION available in the family PROCESS PID [45.00]:
Set the jumpers P6 and P7 in position 1-2 on Basis board in order to
Chapter 7 P. 21 [45.70] In Press Mon Enable On
Control mode selection and settings
configure the analog inputs AI1 and AI2 as current inputs. [45.71] In Press Mon Alm Thres 0.30 pu
[45.72] In Press Mon Trip Thres 0.15 pu
Chapter 8 P. 22 STEPS TO CONFIGURE AD1000 DRIVE [45.73] In Press Mon Ref Delta 0.01 pu
States machine and process data Set the motor parameters with the right data, using the parameters
available in the family INDUCTION MOTOR [02.00]. Note: [45.71] = alarm threshold / [13.21] = 3 [bar] / 10 [bar] = 0.30 [pu]
Chapter 9 P. 55 Set the drive parameters with the right data, in particular the size (Drive Size Note: [45.72] = trip threshold / [13.21] = 1.5 [bar] / 10 [bar] = 0.15 [pu]
Functions [16.01]), using the parameters available in the family INVERTER [06.00].
Set the AI1 parameters, using the parameters available in the family Set the behavior of the drive when Input Pressure Supervision alarms are released,
ANALOG INPUTS [17.00]: using the parameters available in the family ALARM SETTINGS [36.00]:
[17.05] AI1 Value for 1 pu 100.00 % [36.59] In Press Monitor Thres 1 Warning
[17.06] AI2 Value for 1 pu 100.00 % [36.60] In Press Monitor Thres 2 Coast Stop
[17.09] AI1 Value for 0 pu 20.00 %
[17.10] AI2 Value for 0 pu 20.00 % Figure 2 – Scheme of the hydraulic system (Example N. 3).
[17.13] AI1 Neg Range En Off
Chapter 10 P. 104 [17.14] AI2 Neg Range En Off
Fieldbus [17.25] AI1 Type mA
[17.26] AI2 Type mA

Set the full scale of the sensors, using the parameters available in the
Chapter 11 P. 128 family PER-UNIT BASE DATA [13.00]:
I/0 Configuration [13.11] User Per-Unit Press. 1 10.000 bar
[13.21] User Per-Unit Press. 2 10.000 bar
Chapter 12 P. 145
Protections and troubleshooting
instruments
Set the Speed Reference for the motor, using the parameters available in
the family SPEED REFERENCE [32.00]:
Annex P. 156
[32.01] Main Speed Ref Sel Prs PID

261